6421C Vol II System Manual For Mark VI

g
GEH-6421C, Volume II (Supersedes GEH-6421B)
GE Industrial Systems
SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI Turbine Control

System Guide, Volume II (2 of 2)
TM
Publication: Issued:
GEH-6421C, Volume II (Supersedes GEH-6421B) 2001-06-27
SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI Turbine Control

System Guide, Volume II (2 of 2)
TM
2001 by General Electric Company, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America.
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, or to provide for every possible contingency to be met during installation, operation, and maintenance. If further information is desired or if particular problems arise that is not covered sufficiently for the purchasers purpose, the matter should be referred to GE Industrial Systems, Salem, VA. This document contains proprietary information of General Electric Company, USA and is furnished to its customer solely to assist that customer in the installation, testing, operation and/or maintenance of the equipment described. This document shall not be reproduced in whole or in part nor shall its contents be disclosed to any third party without the written approval of GE Industrial Systems.
ARCNET is a registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation. CIMPLICITY is a trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation. Genius is a registered trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. Modbus is a registered trademark of Modicon. PC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. PI-ProcessBook is a registered trademark of OSI Software Inc. PI-Data Archive and PI-DataLink are registered trademarks of OSI Software Inc. Proximitor, Velomitor, and KeyPhasor are registered trademarks of Bently Nevada. QNX is a registered trademark of QNX Software Systems, LTD. Series 90 is a trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. SPEEDTRONIC is a trademark of General Electric Company, USA. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Windows NT is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
g
Your Name
To:
Reader Comments
General Electric Company
GE Industrial Systems Documentation Design, Rm. 291 1501 Roanoke Blvd. Salem, VA 24153-6492 USA Fax: 1-540-387-8651 (GE Internal DC 8-278-8651)
We welcome comments and suggestions to make this publication more useful.

Todays Date Job Site GE Requisition No. Your Job Function / How You Use This Publication Publication No. Publication Issue/Revision Date If needed, how can we contact you? Fax No. Phone No. E-mail Address
Your Companys Name and Address
General Rating Contents Organization Technical Accuracy Clarity Completeness Drawings / Figures Tables Referencing Readability Excellent Good Fair Poor Additional Comments _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________
Specific Suggestions (Corrections, information that could be expanded on, and such.) Page No. Comments
______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______
__________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________
Other Comments (What you like, what could be added, how to improve, and such.) ________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Overall grade (Compared to publications from other manufacturers of similar products, how do you rate this publication?) Superior Comparable Inferior Do not know Comment ____________________________________________
Detach and fax or mail to the address noted above.
......................................................................... Fold here and close with staple or tape .......................................................................................... ____________________________ ____________________________ ____________________________
Place stamp here.
GE Industrial Systems
Documentation Design, Rm. 291 1501 Roanoke Blvd. Salem, VA 24153-6492 USA
...........................................................................................Fold here first .........................................................................................................
Safety Symbol Legend
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury or death.
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to or destruction of equipment.
Indicates a procedure, condition, or statement that should be strictly followed in order to optimize these applications.
Note Indicates an essential or important procedure, condition, or statement.
GEH-6421C, Vol. II Mark VI System Guide
Safety Symbol Legend a
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric shock or burn. Only personnel who are adequately trained and thoroughly familiar with the equipment and the instructions should install, operate, or maintain this equipment. To minimize hazard of electrical shock or burn, approved grounding practices and procedures must be strictly followed.
To prevent personal injury or equipment damage caused by equipment malfunction, only adequately trained personnel should modify any programmable machine.
The example and setup screens in this manual do not reflect the actual application configurations. Be sure to follow the correct setup procedures for your application.
Note Component and equipment reliabilities have improved dramatically over the past several years. However, component and equipment failures can still occur. Electrical and environmental conditions beyond the scope of the original design can be contributing factors. Since failure modes cannot always be predicted or may depend on the application and the environment, best practices should be followed when dealing with I/O that is critical to process operation or personnel safety. Make sure that potential I/O failures are considered and appropriate lockouts or permissives are incorporated into the application. This is especially true when dealing with processes that require human interaction.
b Safety Symbol Legend
Mark VI System Guide GEH-6421C, Vol. II
Safety Symbol Legend
Symbol
Publication IEC 417, No. 5031 IEC 417, No. 5032 IEC 417, No. 5033
Description Direct Current Alternating Current Both direct and alternating Three-phase alternating Earth (CCOM signal ground) Terminal
IEC 617-2, No. 02-02-06 IEC 417, No. 5017
IEC 417, No. 5019
Protective Conductor Terminal (Chassis Safety Ground) Protective Conductor Terminal (Chassis Safety Ground)
PE
IEC 417, No. 5020 IEC 417, No. 5021 IEC 417, No. 5007 IEC 417, No. 5008 IEC 417, No. 5172
Frame or Chassis Terminal Equipotentiality On (Supply) Off (Supply) Equipment protected throughout Double Insulation or Reinforced Insulation (equivalent to Class II of 536)
ISO 3864, No. B.3.6 Caution, risk of electric shock ISO 3864, No. B.3.1 Caution
Safety Symbol Legend c
Locations
O R D 1 P OS E EX 2 Supplied by Others Remotely Mounted Door Mounted
Drawing Symbols
Purchaser's Equipment Bus Aux Compt Device Generator Compt Device
G
Mounted on Door 1, 2, and so on Panel Mounted Mounted in Main Operator Station Equipment Exists in place EX2000 Exciter Generator Control Panel Turbine Control
Generator Terminal Enclosure Packaged Electrical Cont. CTR (PEEC) PEECC MCC
SS LCI ISO
Static Starter Load Commutated Inverter Isolation Transformer Generator Excitation Compartment
Devices
J1
Cable Plug Connector Jumper Relay Coil Solenoid Coil Flame Detector
Case Ground Ground Bus Signal Ground Contact Actually Shown Elsewhere Customer Connection
Conventions
Twisted Pair Wire 1. For wire runs internal to the controller, twisted pairs are adequate. 2. For wire runs external to the controller (and internal to the controller when longer than 20 feet), shielded twisted pair is required. 3. All shield drain wires should be terminated on one end only, that end being the shield ground points immediately adjacent to the termination boards. The other end should be cut off and the wire taped to prevent grounding. 4. None of the shield drain wires should ever be routed through any controller terminal board-mounted ferrite cores.
Twisted Shielded Pair Wire
Shielded Pair Wire Low Level Signal Wiring Practices Required Delta Wye
L H P
Low Level Wiring High Level Wiring Power Wiring
d Safety Symbol Legend
Contents
Chapter 9 I/O Board Descriptions
Introduction.............................................................................................................. 9-1 Controller ................................................................................................................. 9-2 Operation .......................................................................................................... 9-2 UCVE Controller .............................................................................................. 9-2 UCVD Controller.............................................................................................. 9-6 UCVB Controller.............................................................................................. 9-8 Configuration Overview ................................................................................. 9-10 Diagnostics ..................................................................................................... 9-10 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-10 VCMI - Bus Master Controller .............................................................................. 9-11 Features........................................................................................................... 9-13 VDSK - Interface Board ........................................................................................ 9-19 Operation ........................................................................................................ 9-19 Board Summary ..................................................................................................... 9-20 Simplex DIN-Rail Mounted Terminal Board Summary ........................................ 9-22 Grounding....................................................................................................... 9-24 VTCC/TBTCH1C (Simplex) - Thermocouple Inputs............................................ 9-25 Operation ........................................................................................................ 9-25 Features........................................................................................................... 9-27 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-30 VTCC/TBTCH1B (TMR) - Thermocouple Inputs ................................................ 9-32 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-33 DTTC - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Thermocouple Terminal Board .................... 9-34 DTTC Board Installation ................................................................................ 9-35 VRTD/TRTDH1C (Simplex) - RTD Inputs .......................................................... 9-36 Operation ........................................................................................................ 9-37 Features........................................................................................................... 9-38 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-41 VRTD/TRTDH1B (TMR) - RTD Inputs ............................................................... 9-43 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-44 DRTD - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted RTD Terminal Board................................... 9-45 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-46 VAIC/TBAI - Analog Inputs ................................................................................. 9-47 Operation ........................................................................................................ 9-48 Features........................................................................................................... 9-50 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-54 DTAI - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Analog Input Terminal Board ....................... 9-56 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-57 VAOC/TBAO - Analog Outputs............................................................................ 9-58 Operation ........................................................................................................ 9-59 Features........................................................................................................... 9-61 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-62 DTAO - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Analog Output Terminal Board................... 9-64
Contents i
Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-65 VCCC/TBCI - Contact Inputs................................................................................ 9-66 Operation ........................................................................................................ 9-68 Features........................................................................................................... 9-70 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-71 VCCC/TICI - Isolated Digital Inputs..................................................................... 9-73 Features........................................................................................................... 9-73 DTCI - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Contact Input Terminal Board ...................... 9-74 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-75 VCCC/TRLYH1B - Relay Outputs ....................................................................... 9-76 Operation ........................................................................................................ 9-77 Features........................................................................................................... 9-79 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-81 VCCC/TRLYH1C - Relay Outputs with Voltage Sensing .................................... 9-83 Features........................................................................................................... 9-83 Installation ...................................................................................................... 0-84 VCRC - Contact Input/Relay Output Board .......................................................... 9-86 DRLYH1A and DRLYH1B - Simplex Wall Mounted Relay Output Terminal Boards .............................................................................. 9-88 VSVO/TSVO - Servo/LVDT................................................................................. 9-91 Operation ........................................................................................................ 9-92 Features........................................................................................................... 9-96 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-101 DSVO - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Servo Terminal Board ............................... 9-102 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-106 VTUR/TTUR - Turbine Control .......................................................................... 9-108 Operation ...................................................................................................... 9-109 Features......................................................................................................... 9-111 Automatic Synchronizing ............................................................................. 9-116 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-118 VTUR/TRPG - Primary Trip ............................................................................... 9-120 Operation ...................................................................................................... 9-121 Features......................................................................................................... 9-122 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-123 DTRT - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Trip Transition Board ................................ 9-125 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-126 DTUR - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Pulse Rate Terminal Board........................ 9-127 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-128 VVIB/TVIB - Vibration/Position......................................................................... 9-129 Operation ...................................................................................................... 9-131 Features......................................................................................................... 9-131 Configuration................................................................................................ 9-133 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-135 DVIB - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Vibration Terminal Board........................... 9-137 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-138 VGEN/TGEN - Generator Board......................................................................... 9-139 Operation ...................................................................................................... 9-139 Features......................................................................................................... 9-141 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-145 VPYR/TPYR - Pyrometer Board......................................................................... 9-147 Operation ...................................................................................................... 9-148 Features......................................................................................................... 9-149 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-153 VSCA/DSCB - Serial Communications Board.................................................... 9-154 Operation ...................................................................................................... 9-154 Features......................................................................................................... 9-155
ii Contents
DSCB - DIN-rail Mounted Terminal Board ................................................. 9-157 DPWA - DIN-rail Mounted Transducer Excitation Power Distribution Terminal Board..................................................................... 9-160 VPRO/TREG - Turbine Emergency Trip ............................................................ 9-162 Operation ...................................................................................................... 9-162 Features......................................................................................................... 9-164 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-166 VPRO/TPRO - Turbine Protection ...................................................................... 9-168 Operation ...................................................................................................... 9-171 Features......................................................................................................... 9-171 Specification ................................................................................................. 9-172 Configuration................................................................................................ 9-173 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-178 VME Rack Power Supply.................................................................................... 9-180 Operation ...................................................................................................... 9-180 Specification ................................................................................................. 9-184 Diagnostics ................................................................................................... 9-184 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-185 TTPW - Power Conditioning Board .................................................................... 9-186 Operation ...................................................................................................... 9-187 Installation .................................................................................................... 9-188 PDM - Power Distribution Module...................................................................... 9-189 Operation ...................................................................................................... 9-190 PDM for Interface Cabinet ........................................................................... 9-190 Diagnostic Monitoring.................................................................................. 9-192 Control Cabinet PDM ................................................................................... 9-192 Interface Cabinet PDM Installation .............................................................. 9-194 Fuses in Interface and Control Cabinet PDM ............................................... 9-195 Ground Reference Jumper ............................................................................ 9-195 Low Voltage Power Supply ................................................................................. 9-196 Specification ................................................................................................. 9-197
Glossary of Terms Index
Contents iii
Notes
iv Contents
Chapter 9
I/O Board Descriptions
Introduction
This chapter describes the Mark VI boards including the controller, VCMI, I/O processor boards along with their associated terminal boards (standard and DIN-rail mounted), and power supplies. This information in GEH-6421C, Vol. II Chapter 9 is intended to be used in conjunction with GEH-6421C, Vol. I, that includes chapters 1 through 8. The information in GEH-6421C, Vol. I is organized as follows: Chapter 1 Overview. Outlines the Mark VI system and the chapters in the manual. Chapter 2 System Architecture. Describes the main system components, the networks, and details of the TMR architecture. Chapter 3 Networks. Discusses the data highways and other communication networks, including the links to other control systems. Chapter 4 Codes and Standards. Discusses the codes, standards, and environmental guidelines used for the design of all printed circuits, modules, cores, panels, and cabinet line-ups in the Mark VI. Chapter 5 Installation. Provides instructions for system installation, wiring, grounding, checkout, and startup. Chapter 6 Tools. Summarizes the toolbox, CIMPLICITY HMI, and the Historian. Chapter 7 Applications. Covers several applications including protection logic, synchronization, and details of the servo regulators. Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics. Describes how process and diagnostic alarms are generated and displayed for the operator and service engineer. It includes a listing of the board diagnostics, and an introduction to system troubleshooting.
Chapter 9 I/O Board Descriptions 9-1
Controller
The Mark VI UCVE controller is a 6U high, single or double slot, single board computer (SBC) that operates the turbine application code. The controller mounts in a VME rack called the control module, and communicates with the turbine I/O boards through the VME bus. The controller operating system is QNX, a real time, multitasking OS designed for high-speed, high reliability industrial applications. Three communication ports provide links to operator and engineering interfaces as follows: Ethernet connections to the UDH for communication with HMIs, and other control equipment RS-232C connection for setup using the COM1 port RS-232C connection for communication with DCS systems using the COM2 port (such as Modbus slave)
Three controller versions are in use. The single slot UCVE is the current generation controller. The double slot UCVB and UCVD are no longer shipped with new systems, but are still in use in older systems. The UCVE may be used to replace these other controllers, but requires a backplane upgrade. If replacing a ICVB, an Ethernet cabling upgrade is also required.
Operation
The controller is loaded with software specific to its application to Steam, Gas, and Land-Marine aeroderivative (LM), or Balance of Plant (BOP) products. It can execute up to 100,000 rungs or blocks per second, assuming a typical collection of average size blocks. Application software can be modified online without requiring a restart. An external clock interrupt permits the controller to synchronize to the clock on the VCMI communication board to within 100 microseconds. External data is transferred to and from the Control Signal Database (CSDB) in the controller over the VME bus by the VCMI communication board. In a Simplex system, the data consists of the process inputs and outputs from the I/O boards. In a TMR system, the data consists of the voted inputs from the input boards, singular inputs from simplex boards, computed outputs to be voted by the output hardware, and the internal state values that must be exchanged between the controllers.
UCVE Controller
The UCVE is available in two different forms, UCVEH2 and UCVEM01. The UCVEH2 is the standard Mark VI controller (see Figure 9-1). It is a single-slot board using a 300 MHz Intel Celeron processor with 16 Mb of flash memory and 32 Mb of DRAM. A single 10BaseT (RJ-45) Ethernet port provides connectivity to the UDH. A separate subnet address allows the controller to uniquely identify an Ethernet port. Obtain IP subnet addresses from the Ethernet network administrator. (eg. 192,168.1.0, 192.168.2.0) The UCVEM01 has all of the features of the UCVEH2 with the addition of a second 10BaseT Ethernet port for use on a separate IP logical subnet, as shown in Figure 92. Configuration of the second Ethernet port is performed through the toolbox. The controller validates its toolbox configuration against the existing hardware each time the rack is powered up.
9-2 Chapter 9 I/O Board Descriptions
Mark VI Controller UCVEH2

x
Status LEDs
STATUS
Monitor Port for GE use

S V G A M / K C O M
1:2
VMEbus SYSFAIL Flash Activity Power Status
Keyboard/mouse port for GE use COM1 RS-232C Port for Initial Controller Setup; COM2 RS-232C Port for Serial communication
Ethernet Status LEDs Active

RST P C M I P M E Z Z A N I N E UCVE H2
x
Ethernet Port for Unit Data Highway Communication
L A N
Link
Note: To connect the batteries that enable NVRAM and CMOS, set jumper E8 to pins 7-8 ("IN") and jumper E10 to ("IN"). Also be aware that UCVE modules may be shipped with the batteries disabled.
Figure 9-1. UCVEH2 Controller Front Panel
Mark VI Controller UCVEM01

x
Status LEDs
STATUS
Monitor Port for GE use

S V G A M / K C O M
1:2
VMEbus SYSFAIL Flash Activity Power Status
Keyboard/mouse port for GE use COM1 RS-232C Port for Initial Controller Setup; COM2 RS-232C Port for Serial communication
Ethernet Status LEDs Active Link

RST
SPEED LINK/ ACT
Primary Ethernet Port for Unit Data Highway Communication (Toolbox)
L A N
Secondary Ethernet Port for Expansion IO Communication Note: To connect the batteries that enable NVRAM and CMOS, set jumper E8 to pins 7-8 ("IN") and jumper E10 to ("IN"). Also be aware that UCVE modules may be shipped with the batteries disabled.
P C M I P M E Z Z A N I N E
Speed (Off =10 MB/sec) (On = 100 MB/sec) Link / Active
UCVE M01
x
Figure 9-2. UCVEM01 Controller Front Panel
UCVE Controller Specification

Table 9-1. UCVE Controller Specification
Item
Microprocessor Memory
Specification
Intel Celeron 300 MHz 32 MB DRAM 16 MB Compact Flash Module 128 KB L2 cache Battery-backed SRAM - 8K allocated as NVRAM for controller functions QNX LED indicators on the faceplate provide status information as follows: Left Indicator Power Status Center Indicator Flash Activity Right Indicator VME bus SYSFAIL Primary Ethernet Status Upper LAN Indicator Active Lower LAN Indicator Link Secondary Ethernet Status (M01 version only) Left LAN Indicator Speed Right LAN Indicator Link/Active Control block language with Analog and Discrete blocks; Boolean logic represented in relay ladder diagram format. Supported data types include: Boolean 16-bit signed integer 32-bit signed integer 32-bit floating point 64-bit long floating point Twisted pair 10Base-T, RJ-45 connector: TCP/IP protocol used for communication between controller and toolbox Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol for communication with CIMPLICITY HMI, and Series 90-70 PLCs Ethernet Modbus protocol supported for communication between controller and third party Distributed Control System (DCS) Twisted pair 10Base-T, RJ-45 connector: Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol Ethernet Modbus protocol supported for communication between controller and third party Distributed Control System (DCS) Two Micro-miniature 9-pin D connectors: COM1 Reserved for diagnostics, 9600 baud, 8 Data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit COM2 Used for serial Modbus communication, 9600 or 19200 baud +5 V dc, 6 A typical, 8 A maximum +12 V dc, 180 mA typical, 250 mA maximum 12 V dc, 180 mA typical, 250 mA maximum +5 V dc, 6 A typical, 8.1 A maximum +12 V dc, 180 mA typical, 250 mA maximum 12 V dc, 180 mA typical, 250 mA maximum
Operating System LEDs
Programming
Primary Ethernet Interface
Secondary Ethernet Interface (M01 version only)
COM Ports
Power Requirements UCVEH2 Power Requirements UCVEM01
UCVD Controller
The UCVD is a double-slot board using a 300 MHz AMD K6 processor with 8 Mb of flash memory and 16 Mb of DRAM. A single 10BaseT (RJ-45 connector) Ethernet port provides connectivity to the UDH. It includes several legacy interfaces that are not used in the Mark VI configuration. (Refer to Figure 9-3.) The UCVD contains a double column of 8 status LEDs. These LEDs are sequentially turned on in a rotating pattern when the controller is operating normally. When an error condition occurs the LEDs display a flashing error code that identifies the problem. For more information refer to GEH-6410, Innovation Series Controller System Manual.
Mark VI Controller UCVDH1, H2
x x
Ethernet Port for Unit Data Highway Communication Controller and Communication Status LEDs
ETHERNET
ACTIVE SLOT1 BMAS ENET SYS BSLV RESET FLSH GENA
H L
Status LEDs showing Runtime Error Codes resulting from Bootup, Configuration, or Download Problems
MONITOR
Monitor Port for GE Use Only
COM1 RS-232C Port for Initial Controller Setup; COM2 RS-232C Port for serial communications
COM1
LPT1
COM2
HARD DISK
Connector for hard disk, for GE use
ISBus Drive LAN Not Used

KEYBOARD
Special Ports for GE Use, Printer, Keyboard, and Mouse
MOUSE
GENIUS
Receptacle for Genius Cable Plug
UCVD H2 x x
Figure 9-3. UCVD Controller Front Panel
UCVD Controller Specifications

Table 9-2. UCVDH1 Controller Specification
Item
Specification
AMD-K6 300 MHz 16 MB DRAM 8 MB Flash Memory in UCVD 256 KB of level 2 cache QNX LEDs on the faceplate provide status information as follows: ACTIVE Processor is active SLOT 1 Controller configured as slot 1 controller in VME rack BMAS VME master access is occurring ENET Ethernet activity BSLV VME slave access is occurring STATUS Display rotating LED pattern when OK Display flashing error code when faulted FLSH Writing to Flash memory GENX Genius I/O is active Control block language with Analog and Discrete blocks; Boolean logic represented in relay ladder diagram format. Supported data types include: Boolean 16-bit signed integer 32-bit signed integer 32-bit floating point 64-bit floating point Twisted pair 10Base-T, RJ-45 connector TCP/IP protocol used for communication between controller and toolbox Serial Request Transfer Protocol (SRTP) interface between controller and HMI Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol for communication with CIMPLICITY HMI, and Series 90-70 PLCs Ethernet Modbus protocol supported for communication between controller and third party Distributed Control System (DCS) Two Micro-miniature 9-pin D connectors: COM1 Reserved for diagnostics, 9600 baud, 8 Data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit COM2 Used for serial Modbus communication, 9600 or 19200 baud Genius Bus controller integrated with the central processing unit +5 V dc, 6 A +12 V dc, 200 mA 12 V dc, 200 mA
Programming
Ethernet Interface
COM Ports
Genius Bus Interface Power Requirements
UCVB Controller
The UCVB is a double-slot board using a 133 MHz Intel Pentium processor with 4 Mb of flash memory and 16 Mb of DRAM. A single 10Base2 (BNC connector) Ethernet port provides connectivity to the UDH. It includes several legacy interfaces that are not used in the Mark VI configuration. The UCVB contains a double column of 8 status LEDs. These LEDs are sequentially turned on in a rotating pattern when the controller is operating normally. When an error condition occurs the LEDs display a flashing error code that identifies the problem. For more information refer to GEH-6410, Innovation Series Controller System Manual.
Mark VI Controller UCVBG1

x x DLAN DROP 1 0 8 ETHERNET
Ethernet Port for Unit Data Highway Communication Controller and Communication Status LEDs
DLAN Network Drop Number Configuration Dip Switches (Not Used) Status LEDs showing Runtime Error Codes resulting from Bootup, Configuration, or Download Problems
1 ACTIVE H L SLOT1 BMAS ENET SYS BSLV RESET FLSH GENA
MONITOR
Monitor Port for GE Use Only
HARD DISK
Connector for hard disk, for GE use
COM1 RS-232C Port for Initial Controller Setup; COM2 RS-232C Port for serial communications
COM1 LPT1
COM2
DLAN Network Connection (Not Used)

DLAN
KEYBOARD
Special Ports for GE Use, Printer, Keyboard, and Mouse
GENIUS
MOUSE
Receptacle for Genius Cable Plug
UCVB G1 x x
Figure 9-4. Mark VI UCVB Controller Front Panel
UCVB Controller Specifications

Table 9-3. UCVBG1 Controller Specification
Item
Specification
Intel Pentium 133 MHz 16 MB DRAM 4 MB Flash Memory in UCVB 256 KB of level 2 cache QNX LEDs on the faceplate provide status information as follows: ACTIVE Processor is active SLOT 1 Controller configured as slot 1 controller in VME rack BMAS VME master access is occurring ENET Ethernet activity BSLV VME slave access is occurring STATUS Display rotating LED pattern when OK Display flashing error code when faulted FLSH Writing to Flash memory GENX Genius I/O is active Control block language with Analog and Discrete blocks; Boolean logic represented in relay ladder diagram format. Supported data types include: Boolean 16-bit signed integer 32-bit signed integer 32-bit floating point 64-bit long floating point Thinwire 10Base-2, BNC connector: TCP/IP protocol used for communication between controller and toolbox Serial Request Transfer Protocol (SRTP) interface between controller and HMI Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol for communication with CIMPLICITY HMI, and Series 90-70 PLCs Ethernet Modbus protocol supported for communication between controller and third party Distributed Control System (DCS) Two Micro-miniature 9-pin D connectors: COM1 Reserved for diagnostics, 9600 baud, 8 Data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit COM2 Used for serial Modbus communication, 9600 or 19200 baud Genius Bus controller integrated with the central processing unit Interface to DLAN+, a high speed multidrop network based on ARCNET, using a token passing, peer to peer protocol +5 V dc, 5.64 A +12 V dc, 900 mA 12 V dc, 200 mA
Programming
Ethernet Interface
COM Ports
Genius Bus Interface DLAN+ Interface Power Requirements
Configuration Overview
Like all the I/O boards, the controller is configured using the Control System Toolbox. This software is summarized in GEH-6421C, Vol. I Mark VI System Guide, Chapter 6 Tools. For details refer to GEH-6403 Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Turbine Controller.
Diagnostics
If a failure occurs in the Mark VI controller while it is running application code, the rotating status LEDs (if supported) on the front panel stop and an internal fault code is generated. Additionally, if the controller detects certain system errors (typically during boot-up or download) it displays flashing error codes on the status LEDs. These codes are called runtime errors, and descriptions are available on the toolbox Help screen. The error numbers and descriptions are also available on the controller serial port (COM1). For further information, refer to GEH-6421C, Vol. I Mark VI System Guide, Chapter 8, Troubleshooting and Diagnostics. Like the turbine I/O boards, the controller maintains an internal diagnostic queue that can be queried from the toolbox.
Installation
A control module contains (at a minimum) the controller and a VCMI. There are three rack types that can be used, the GE Fanuc PLC rack shown in Figure 9-5, and two sizes of Mark VI racks shown in the section, VCMI - Bus Master Controller. The GE Fanuc rack is shorter and is used for stand-alone modules with remote I/O only. The Mark VI racks are longer and can be used for local or remote I/O. Whichever rack is used, a cooling fan is mounted either above or below the controller. The stand-alone control module implemented with a GE Fanuc PLC rack also requires a VDSK board.
VCMIH2 Communication Board with Three IONet Ports (VCMIH1 with One IONet is for Simplex systems) Controller UCVX Interface Board VDSK
VME Rack
POWER SUPPLY
Power Supply
Cooling Fan behind Panel
Fan 24 Vdc Power
Figure 9-5. Typical Controller Mounted in Rack with Communication Board
VCMI - Bus Master Controller

The bus master controller, known as the VCMI, is the communication interface between the controller and the I/O boards, and the communication interface to the system control network, known as IONet. VCMI is also the VME bus master in the control racks and I/O racks, and manages the IDs for all the boards in the rack and their associated terminal boards. In the case of TMR systems the three-network version (VCMIH2X) votes all incoming data from the I/O boards and passes the results to the controller for processing. The two versions of VCMI boards are shown in Figure 9-6.
VCMI H1
x
VCMI H2
x
VCMI is OK
RUN FAIL STATUS RESET S E R I A L P A R A L L E L M O8 D4 U2 L 1 E
Error or Power up Failure Pushbutton
RUN FAIL STATUS RESET S E R I A L P A R A L L E L
VME Bus to I/O Boards and Controller
VME Bus to I/O Boards and Controller
IONet Node
M O8 D4 U2 L 1 E
TX RX CD
R S T
Channel ID
R S T TX RX CD
IONet3 port 10Base 2
TX RX CD
Transmitting Packets Receiving Packets Collisions on IONet IONet port 10Base 2

VCMI H1 x

TX RX CD VCMI H2 x
Communication Board - 1 IONet
Communication Board - 3 IONets
Figure 9-6. VCMI Boards, Single Network and Triple Network Versions
Figure 9-7 shows three Simplex system configurations with local and remote I/O using the VCMI. Multiple I/O racks can be connected to IONet, each rack with its own VCMI board. To increase data throughput for applications requiring low latency, a second IONet port on the VCMI can be used as a parallel IONet as shown in the lower portion of the figure.
V C M I
U C V X
I/O Boards
Simplex System with Local I/O UCVX is Controller VCMI is Bus Master I/O are VME Boards
R
V C M I U C V X I/O Boards V C M I
R1
I/O Boards
Simplex System with Local & Remote I/O
IONet
R
V C M I U C V X V C M I
R1
I/O Boards
Simplex System with Multiple IONets & Remote I/O
IONet R2
V C M I I/O Boards
IONet
Figure 9-7. Simplex System Configurations with Local and Remote I/O
Two sizes of TMR systems are shown in Figure 9-8. The first example is a small system where all the I/O can be mounted in the VME control rack so no remote I/O racks are required. Each channel (R, S, T) has its own IONet, and the VCMI has three IONet ports.
The second example is a larger system employing remote I/O racks. Each IONet supports multiple I/O racks, but only one rack is shown here. All I/O channels R, S, T, are identical in terms of I/O boards and points.
R
V C M I U C V X I/O Boards V C M I U C V X
S
I/O Boards V C M I U C V X
T
I/O Boards
TMR System with Local I/O UCVX is Controller VCMI is Bus Master I/O are VME Boards Termination Boards not shown
IONet - R IONet - S IONet - T
R
V C M I U C V X V C M I U C V X
S
V C M I U C V X
TMR System with Remote I/O, Termination Boards not shown
IONet - R IONet - S IONet - T
R1
V C M I I/O Boards V C M I
S1
I/O Boards V C M I
T1
I/O Boards
IONet Supports Multiple Remote I/O Racks
Figure 9-8. TMR System Configurations with Local and Remote I/O
Features
The VCMI architecture is based on the 32-bit Texas Instruments TMS320C32 digital signal processor (DSP). The main hardware features are: Interface to VME bus Three 10Base-2 Ethernet ports One RS-232C serial port One parallel port Power system monitoring Board and cable ID reading Processor watchdog timer
VME Interface
The VCMI is the VME system (slot 1) controller and the sole bus master in both the control racks and the I/O racks. It inventories and initializes all the boards in its rack.
IONet - Communications Interface

Fast I/O communication through the VCMI supports rapid controller response Communication between the control modules (control racks) and interface modules (I/O racks) is handled by the VCMIs. In the control module the VCMI operates as the IONet master while in the interface module it operates as an IONet slave. VCMI establishes the network ID, and displays the network ID, channel ID and status on its front panel. Physically, IONet communication is 10Base-2 Ethernet using thin wire RG-58 coax cable. The VCMI supports all three ports simultaneously. The VCMI serves as the master frame counter for all nodes on the IONet. Execution frames are sequentially numbered and all nodes on IONet execute in the same frame This ensures that selected data is transmitted and operated on correctly.
Input Data Collection - Simplex Systems

When used in an interface module, the VCMI collects input data from the I/O boards and transmits it to the control module over IONet. In the control module, as packets of input data are received from various racks on the IONet, the VCMI transfers them through the VME bus to the Mark VI controller for processing.
Input Data Collection and Voting - TMR Systems

For a small TMR system, all the I/O may be handled in one (triplicated) module. In this case the VCMI transfers, over the VME bus, the input values from each of the I/O boards to the pre-vote table, and simultaneously transmits the data as an input packet on the IONet. When the input packets from the other two racks are received, they are also transferred to the pre-vote table. The input data is then voted and the result is placed in a voted table and copied to the controller for processing. Analog data (floating point) is voted by median select, while two-out-of-three votes logical data (bit values). For a larger TMR system with remote I/O racks, the procedure is very similar except that packets of input values may come into each master VCMI not only from I/O boards in its own rack, but also from remote I/O racks in its channel through IONet. After all the input data for the channel is accumulated, it is placed in the pre-vote table and then sent to the other control modules over IONet. Once the input packets from all three channels have been received by a master VCMI, volting occurs as described above.
State Exchange and Voting - TMR Systems

A selected portion of the variables in a controller (for example, the internal states such as counter/timer values and sequence steps) must also be transferred across the IONet to be voted by the VCMIs and recopied to the controllers. This is known as the state exchange. The synchronization of state variables ensures that no steps are generated in the outputs if one of the controllers fails, or is powered down and back up again.
Output Data Distribution

After application code execution, the VCMI reads the output values from the controller across the VME bus. All the output data from a control module VCMI is placed in one packet. This packet is then broadcast on the IONet and received by all connected interface and control modules. Each interface module VCMI extracts the required information and distributes to its associated I/O boards.
Voter Disagreement Detector

The master VCMIs generate diagnostics when local pre-volte data does not match the resulting voted data. The first pass through the pre-vote data determines the control values to be used. On the second pass, the VCMI determines whether bad values exist by comparing its set of local channel pre-vote values with the voted result. If there is any disagreement then the local value has been outvoted and represents a bad value. For analog values, a dead band is defined to allow minor variations in the pre-vote values without creating an alarm. For logic values, any disagreement is considered bad. A time delay is required before generating an alarm to eliminate the problem of transients causing false alarms.
Performance
The Simplex frame rate can be as fast as 10 milliseconds allowing turbine control at 100 Hz, while the TMR frame rate can be as fast as 20 ms for control at 50 Hz. The control module is synchronized to the wall clock ensuring the sequence of events (SOE) times are within 1 ms of the actual event times.
Board IDs and Addresses

Each terminal board has an ID chip for each cable connector that is read serially into the I/O board. Each I/O board in the VME rack, plus the VCMI, also has its own ID chip which is read by the VCMI, so the VCMI can acquire the identity of all the boards and associated terminal boards in its rack. In addition, there is an eight-bit configuration switch on the backplane tied to slot 1 of the VME rack. This switch provides the IONet address and R/S/T channel identity, and is read by the VCMI to determine what channel it is on. The VCMI in the control rack acquires packages of ID information from each I/O rack. These contain the catalog number, serial number, and revision of each board in the module along with the slot number, and the identity of each terminal board with its slot P3/P4 location. This information is captured and stored in the controller.
Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer protects against a processor stall condition. If a stall occurs the watchdog times out after approximately 200 ms and resets the processor. It notifies the VME backplane that the processor has been reset, and shuts off IONet communication while stalled. The front panel reset button (if present) can be used to force the timer to the stalled state from which it transitions to the operational state. On line testing of the watchdog function can be performed.
VCMI Diagnostics
The internal 5V, 12V, 15V, and 28V power supply buses are monitored and alarmed. The alarm settings are configurable and usually set at 3.5%, except for the 28-Volt supplies, which are set at 5.5%.
Diagnostic signals from the Power Distribution Module, connected through J301, are also monitored. These include ground fault and over/under voltage on the P125V bus, two differential 5Vdc analog inputs, P28A and PCOM for external monitor circuits, and digital inputs. Descriptions of the VCMI diagnostics are in GEH-6421C, Vol. I Mark VI System Guide, Chapter 8, Troubleshooting and Diagnostics.
Specification
Table 9-4. VCMI Specification Item Board Type Processor Memory Specification 6U high VME board, 0.787 inch wide Texas Instruments TMS320C32 32-bit digital signal processor Dual-port memory, 32 Kbytes in 32 bit transfer configuration SRAM, 64k x 32 Flash memory, 128k x 8 Communication H1 version: One IONet 10 Base-2 Ethernet Port, BNC connector, 10 Mbits/sec H2 version: Three IONet 10 Base-2 Ethernet Ports, BNC connectors, 10 Mbits/sec VME bus block transfers 1 RS-232C Serial Port, male "D" style connector, 9600, 19,200, or 38,400 bits/sec 1 Parallel Port, eight bit bi-directional , EPP Version1.7 mode of IEEE 1284-1994 Frame Rate 10 ms (100 Hz) for Simplex 40 ms (25 Hz) for TMR
Like all I/O boards, the VCMI is configured using the Control System Toolbox. This software usually runs on a data-highway connected CIMPLICITY station or workstation. Table 9-5 summarizes configuration choices and defaults. For details refer to GEH-6403 Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Controller.
Table 9-5. VCMI Toolbox Configuration (Part 1 of 2) Parameter Configuration System Limits PS_Limit1 PS_Limit2 PwrBusLimits 125 vBusHlim 125 vBusLlim 125 vBusGlim J3 Power Monitor Logic_In_1 Logic_In P125_Grd Input Type Low_Input Low_Value High_Input High_Value Input _Filter TMR_DiffLimit Sys Lim 1 Enabl Sys Lim 1 Latch Sys Lim 1 Type Enable or disable All System Limits Power Supply Limits for P5, P15, N15 in % Power Supply Limits for P12, N12, P28, N28 in percent Enable or disable Power Bus Diagnostics High Limit for 125 Volt DC Bus in Volts Low Limit for 125 Volt DC Bus in Volts Low Volts to Ground Limit for 125 Volt DC bus (diagnostic) PDM Monitor First of 12 logical inputs Card Point Signal Configurable Item P125 with respect to Grd Card Point Signal Type of Analog Input Input Volts at Low Value Input Value in engineering units at Low MA Input Volts at High Value Input Value in engineering units at High MA Bandwidth of input signal filter in Hz Difference limit for Voted TMR inputs in % of highlow values Enable System Limit 1 Fault Check Input fault latch Input fault type Enable, disable 0 to 10 0 to 10 Enable, disable 0 to 150 0 to 150 0 to 150 Connected, Not conn. Point Edit (Input BIT) Used, Unused Point Edit (Input FLOAT) Used, Unused 10 to +10 3.4082e+038 to 3.4028e+038 10 to +10 3.4082e+038 to 3.4028e+038 Unused, 0.75 Hz, 1.5 Hz, 3 Hz, 0 to 10 Enable, disable Latch, unlatch Greater than or equal Less than or equal Sys Lim 1 Sys Lim 2 N125 Gnd Spare 01 Spare 02 Input limit in Engineering Units Same as above for Sys Lim 1 Same as for P125 Grd Card Point Signal Similar to P125 Grd Card Point Signal Similar to P125 Grd Card Point Signal -3.4082e+038 to 3.4028e+038 Same as for Sys Lim 1 Same as for P125 Grd Similar to P125 Grd Similar to P125 Grd Description Choices
Table 9-5. VCMI Toolbox Configuration (Part 2 of 2) Parameter Card Point Signal L3Diag_VCMI1 L3Diag_VCMI2 L3Diag_VCMI3 SysLimit1-1 SysLimit1-2 SysLimit1-3 SysLimit1-4 SysLimit1_125 SysLimit2-1 SysLimit2-2 SysLimit2-3 SysLimit2-4 SysLimit2_125 P125Bus ResetSYS ResetDIA ResetSuicide MasterReset Logic_In_1 Logic_In_2 Logic_In_3 Logic_In_4 Logic_In_5 Logic_In_6 Logic_In_7 Logic_In_8 Logic_In_9 Logic_In_10 Logic_In_11 Logic_In_12 P125_Grd N125_Grd Spare01 Spare02 Description Description - Point Edit (Enter Signal Connection) Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic P125_Grd N125_Grd Spare 01 Spare 02 P125 Bus Out of Limits P125_Grd N125_Grd Spare 01 Spare 02 P125 Bus Out of Limits (Input exceeds limit) (Input exceeds limit) (Input exceeds limit) (Input exceeds limit) (Input exceeds limit) (Input exceeds limit) (Input exceeds limit) (Input exceeds limit) (Input exceeds limit) (Input exceeds limit) Choices Direction Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Type BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT
Calc 125 V dc Bus Voltage(P125Grd - N125Grd) System Limit Reset Diagnostic Reset Suicide Reset (Special VCMI output to I/O bds) (Special VCMI output to I/O bds) (Special VCMI output to I/O bds)
Master Reset L86MR (Special VCMI out to I/O bds) Battery Bus Fault AC1 Source Fault AC2 Source Fault Misc Contact Fuse 31, J19 Fault Fuse 32, J20 Fault Fuse 29, J17 Fault Spare 01 Spare 02 Spare 03 Spare 04 Spare 05 P125 with respect to Grd, P3 28 to 29 N125 with respect to Grd, negative number, P3 26 to 27 Analog spare 01, P3 07 to 08 Analog spare 02, P3 05 to 06
VDSK - Interface Board

The VDSK interface board provides power subsystem monitoring to the VCMI. VDSK is mounted adjacent to the Mark VI controller in the standalone controller rack as shown in Figure 9-9. It is not used in the other types of control racks.
Mark VI Controller x x x VDSK Board
J4
J3 24 V dc Supply to Cooling Fan below Rack
VDSK x Cable to Power Sub-System
Figure 9-9. VDSK Board with Adjacent Controller
Operation
VDSK supports three functions as follows: Interconnects the PDM with the power subsystem monitoring functions of the VCMI through the 96-pin P2 backplane connector and the 37-pin sub-miniature D connector on the front panel. This connection is through a 64-pin ribbon cable connected at the back of the VME backplane. Interconnects +12 V dc and 12 V dc from the 96-pin P1 backplane connector to a front panel mounted 2-pin connector to power the 4.3 watt 24 V dc VME rack mounted fan assembly. This is from the front panel J4 connector. Provides a board mounted 16-pin Ethernet ID connector, which interfaces to the VCMI board through the P2 backplane connector ribbon cable.
Board Summary
Listed in Table 9-6 are all the I/O processor boards, the number of I/O per processor that they support, and their associated standard terminal boards. Some standard terminal boards have Simplex and TMR versions (in addition to Simplex DIN-rail mounted ones). Refer to the section, Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Terminal Board Summary for Simplex DIN-rail mounted terminal board information.
Table 9-6. I/O Processor Boards and Standard Terminal Boards I/O Processor Board VAIC VAOC VCCC I/O Signal Type Analog Inputs, 01 ma, 420 mA, voltage Analog Outputs, 420 mA, 0200 mA Analog Outputs, 420 mA Contact Inputs Solenoid Outputs Dry Contact Relay Outputs Contact Inputs Solenoid Outputs Dry Contact Relays Outputs Analog Inputs, 420 mA Potential Transformers, Gen (1) Bus (1) Current Transformers on Generator Relay Outputs (optional) Pulse rate inputs Potential Transformers, Gen (1), Bus (1) Thermocouple Inputs Analog Inputs, 420 mA Trip Solenoid Drivers Trip Interlock Inputs Emergency-Stop Input (Hardwired) Economizing Relays Trip Solenoid Drivers Emergency-Stop Input (Hardwired) Economizing Relays VPYR VRTD VSVO Pyrometer Temperature Inputs (4/probe) KeyPhasor Shaft Position Inputs Resistance Temperature Device RTD Servo Outputs to Hydraulic Servo Valve LVDT Inputs from Valve Position LVDT Excitation Outputs Pulse Rate Inputs for Flow Monitoring Pulse Rate Probe Excitation Thermocouple Inputs Number of I/O per Processor 20 4 16 48 12 12 48 12 12 4 2 3 12 3 2 3 3 3 7 1 3 3 1 3 2 2 16 4 12 8 2 2 24 Associated Terminal Boards TBAI TBAI TBAO TBCI, TICI TRLY TRLY TBCI TRLY TRLY TGEN TGEN TGEN TRLY TPRO TPRO TPRO TPRO TREG TREG TREG TREG TREG TREG TREG TPYR TPYR TRTD TSVO TSVO TSVO TSVO TSVO TBTC
VCRC
VGEN
VPRO
(through J3) (through J3) (through J3) (through J3) (2nd board through J4) (2nd board through J4) (2nd board through J4)
VTCC
Table 9-6. I/O Processor Boards and Standard Terminal Boards Continued I/O Processor Board VTURH1B I/O Signal Type Pulse Rate Magnetic Speed Pickups Potential Transformers, Generator and Bus Shaft Current and Voltage Monitor Breaker Interface Flame Detectors (Geiger Mueller) Trip Solenoid Drivers for ETDs Same as Above, Plus 3 Trip Solenoid Drivers Shaft Proximitor/Seismic Probes (Vib/Displ/Accel) Shaft Proximity Probes (Displacement) Shaft Proximity Reference (KeyPhasor) 16 8 2 Number of I/O per Processor 4 2 2 1 8 3 Associated Terminal Boards TTUR TTUR TTUR TTUR TRPG TRPG TRPG TVIB TVIB TVIB
(through J4) (through J4) (2 board through J4A)

nd
VTURH2B VVIB
Simplex DIN-Rail Mounted Terminal Board Summary

Speed control systems for small turbines require a simplified system architecture. Simplex control is used to reduce cost and save space. Compact DIN-rail mounted terminal boards are available instead of the larger T-type terminal boards used on TMR systems. IONet is not used since the D-type terminal boards cable directly into the control chassis to interface with the I/O boards. In the VME rack, a VCMI board provides two-way communication between the controller and the I/O processor boards. The controller Ethernet port is used to communicate with other system components, such as an operator interface or PLC. Additional PLC I/O can be tied into the system using the controller Genius port. A typical system is illustrated in Figure 3-1. The system is powered by 24 V dc, and uses a low voltage version of the standard VME rack power supply. The board designations and functions along with the corresponding I/O processor boards are listed in Table 9-7. In all cases, the signal conditioning on the DIN-type terminal boards is the same as on the T-type boards, and the I/O specifications described apply. However, the number of inputs and outputs, and the grounding provisions differ, and the boards do not support TMR. Permanently mounted highdensity Euro Block terminal blocks are used to save space. The blocks have terminals accepting wire sizes up to one #12 wire, or two #14 wires. The typical wire size used is #18 AWG.
Fan To Sequencer & Operator Interface Serial Modbus Communication

x x x x x x x x
Ethernet V C M I U C V B V T U R V T U R V V V T A A C I I C C C V S V O
COM2
V V V S S R C P V T R A O D C R E
Power Supply
10 11 12 13
24 V dc power
DTUR Turbine Control
DTRT Transit -ion Bd. DRLY Relay Output
DTCI Contact Inputs DTUR Turbine Control
DTCI Contact Inputs
DRLY Relay Outputs
DRLY Relay Outputs
DTTC Thermo -couples
DTTC Thermo -couples
DTAI Analog Inputs
DTAI Analog Inputs
DRTD RTD Inputs
DRTD RTD Inputs
DSVO Servo Outputs DTAI Analog Inputs DTAI Analog Inputs
DSVO Servo Outputs
DSVO Servo Outputs
DSVO Servo Outputs
Figure 9-10. Small Simplex System Rack, Boards, and Cabling
Table 9-7. Simplex DIN-Rail Mounted Terminal Boards DIN Euro Size Terminal board DTTC DRTD DTAI Number of Points 12 8 10 Description of I/O Thermocouple temperature inputs with one cold junction reference RTD temperature inputs I/O Processor Board VTCC VRTD
2 DTAO DTCI DRLY DTRT DTUR DSVO 8 24 12 -------4 2 6 2 DVIB 8 4 1
Analog current or voltage inputs with on-board 24 V dc VAIC power supply Analog current outputs, with choice of 20 mA or 200 mA Analog current outputs, 020 mA Contact Inputs with external 24 V dc excitation Form-C relay outputs, dry contacts, customer powered VAOC VCRC (or VCCC) VCRC (or VCCC)
Transition board between VTUR and DRLY for solenoid VTUR trip functions Magnetic (passive) pulse rate pickups for speed and fuel flow measurement Servovalve outputs with choice of coil currents from 10 mA to 120 mA LVDT valve position sensors with on-board excitation Active pulse rate probes for flow measurement, with 24 V dc excitation provided Shaft Proximitor/Seismic Probes (Vib/Displ/Accel) Shaft Proximity Probes (Displacement) Shaft Proximity Reference (KeyPhasor) VTUR VSVO
VVIB
Grounding
During panel design, provisions for grounding the terminal board and wiring shields must be made. These connections should be as short as possible. A metal grounding strip can be firmly mounted to the panel on the right hand side of the terminal board. Shields and the SCOM connection can be conveniently made to this strip. Note that only the thermocouple board has screws for the shield wires. The VME rack is grounded to the mounting panel by the metal-to-metal contact under the mounting screws. No wiring to the ground terminal is required. The individual terminal boards are described in the following sections.
VTCC/TBTCH1C (Simplex) - Thermocouple Inputs

The thermocouple processor board VTCC accepts 24 type E, J, K, S (see note), or T thermocouple inputs. These inputs are wired to two barrier type blocks on the terminal board TBTC. Cables with molded plugs connect the terminal board to the VME rack where the VTCC thermocouple board is located, as shown in Figure 9-11. Input data is transferred over the VME backplane from VTCC to the VCMI and then to the controller.
TBTC Terminal Board VTCC VME Board
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
x
x x x x x x x x x x x x
TC Inputs
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
TBTC, capacity for 24 thermocouple inputs
RUN FAIL STAT
VME Bus to VCMI Communication Board

JA1
37-pin "D" shell type connectors with latching fasteners
x x x
TC Inputs
x x x x x x x x x x
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 x
JB1
Cables to VME Rack Connectors on VME Rack
VTCC x
J3
Shield Bar Ground
J4
BarrierType Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from board for maintenance
Figure 9-11. Thermocouple Input Terminal Board, I/O Board, and Cabling
Operation
The 24 thermocouple inputs can be grounded or ungrounded. They can be located up to 300 meters (984 feet) from the turbine control cabinet with a maximum two-way cable resistance of 450 ohms. High frequency noise suppression and two cold junction reference devices are mounted on TBTC as shown in Figure 9-12.
Linearization for individual thermocouple types is performed in software by VTCC. A thermocouple, which is determined to be out of the hardware limits, is removed from the scanned inputs in order to prevent adverse affects on other input channels. If both cold junction devices are within the configurable limits, then the average of the two is used for cold junction compensation. If only one cold junction device is within the configurable limits, then that cold junction is used for compensation. If neither cold junction device is within the configurable limits, then a default value is used. Note VTCC boards manufactured after approximately 07/01 (software version VTCC-100100C and higher) have additional thermocouple and cold junction (CJ) features. The new design boards permit the use of S-type thermocouples, in addition to all previous types. They also provide for a remote CJ compensation feature for thermocouple inputs. This allows the user to select whether CJ compensation is done based on a temperature reading at a remote location (Remote CJ Compensation) or at the terminal board as explained above (Standard CJ Compensation). The calculations are the same as previous VTCC boards, only the source of the CJ reading changes.
Terminal Board TBTC
<R> or <S> or <T> Rack
Thermocouple Input Board VTCC
Local Cold Junction Reference
JA1
J3
Excitation
Thermocouple
High Noise Low Suppression
Remote Cold Junction References
Grounded or ungrounded
(12) thermocouples
ID
Local Cold Junction Reference
JB1
Connectors at bottom of VME rack Excit. J4
A/D
I/O Core Processor TMS320C32

VMEbus
Thermocouple
High Low
Noise Suppression
(12) thermocouples
ID
Figure 9-12. Thermocouple Inputs and Processor Board
Features
Thermocouple Limits
Thermocouple inputs are supported over a full-scale input range of 8.0 mV to +45.0 mV. Table 9-8 shows typical input voltages for different thermocouple types versus minimum and maximum temperature range. It is assumed the cold junction temperature ranges from +32 to +158 F.
Table 9-8. Thermocouple Types and Range
Thermocouple Type
Low range, F / C mV at low range with reference at 158 F (70 C) High range, F / C mV at high range with reference at 32 F (0 C)
E
60 / 51 7.174
J
60 / 51 6.132
K
60 / 51 4.779
S
0 / 17.78 0.524
T
60 / 51 4.764
1100 / 593 44.547
1400 / 798 42.922
2000 / 1093 44.856
3200 / 1760 18.612
750 / 399 20.801
Cold Junctions
There are two cold junction (CJ) references used per VTCC, one for connector J3 and J4. Each reference can be selected as either remote (from VME bus) or local (from associated terminal board, T type or D type). All references are then treated as sensor inputs (for example, averaged, limits configured). The two references can be mixed, one local and one remote. CJ signals go into signal space and are available for monitoring. Normally the average of the two is used. Acceptable limits are configured, and if a CJ goes outside the limit, a logic signal is set. A 1 F error in the CJ compensation will cause a 1F error in the TC reading. Hard coded limits are set at 32 to 158 F, and if a CJ goes outside these, it is regarded as bad. Most CJ failures are open or short circuit. If one CJ fails, the good one is used. If both CJs go bad, the backup value is used, which can be derived from CJ readings on other terminal boards, or can be the configured default value.
Diagnostics
Three LEDs at the top of the front panel provide status information. The normal RUN condition is a flashing green, and FAIL is a solid red. The third LED shows a steady orange if a diagnostic alarm condition exists in the board. Each thermocouple type has Hardware Limit Checking based on preset (nonconfigurable) high and low levels set near the ends of the operating range. If this limit is exceeded a logic signal is set and the input is no longer scanned. If any one of the 24 inputs hardware limits is set it creates a composite diagnostic alarm, L3DIAG_VTCC, referring to the entire board. Details of the individual diagnostics are available from the toolbox. The diagnostic signals can be individually latched, and then reset with the RESET_DIA signal. Each thermocouple input has System Limit Checking based on configurable high and low levels. These limits can be used to generate alarms, and can be configured for enable/disable, and as latching/nonlatching. RESET_SYS resets the out of limit signals. In TMR, Systems Limit logic signals are voted and the resulting composite diagnostic is present in each controller.
Each terminal board cable has its own ID device which is interrogated by the I/O board. The board ID is coded into a read-only chip containing the terminal board serial number, board type, revision number, and the JA1/JB1 connector location. The TMR version of this board has six ID devices, one for each cable connector. Details of the VTCC diagnostics are in GEH-6421C, Vol. I Mark VI System Guide, Chapter 8, Troubleshooting and Diagnostics.
Calibration
The thermocouple inputs and cold junction inputs are automatically calibrated using the filtered calibration reference and zero voltages.
Specification
Table 9-9. Typical VTCC Specification Item Number of Channels Thermocouple types Span A/D Converter Cold junction compensation Specification 24 channels per terminal board and I/O board E, J, K, S, T thermocouples, and mV inputs -8 mV to +45 mV Sampling type 16-bit A/D converter with better than 14-bit resolution Reference junction temperature measured at two locations on each TC terminal board (optional for remove CJs). TMR board has six cold junction references. Cold junction accuracy 2 F Maximum software error 0.25 F 53 microvolts (excluding cold junction reading) Example: Common mode rejection Common mode voltage Normal mode rejection Scan time Fault detection 3 F, type K, at 1000 F, including cold junction contribution (RSS)
Cold junction temperature accuracy Conformity error Measurement accuracy
AC common mode rejection 110 dB @ 50/60 Hz, for balanced impedance input +/- 5 Volts Rejection of 250 mV Rms is 80 dB @ 50/60 Hz All inputs are sampled at 120 times per second for 60 Hz operation; for 50 Hz operation it is 100 times per second High/low (hardware) limit check High/low system (software) limit check Monitor readings from all TCs, CJs, calibration voltages, and calibration zero readings
Like all I/O boards, the thermocouple board is configured using the Control System Toolbox. Table 9-10 summarizes configuration choices and defaults. For details refer to GEH-6403, Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Controller.
Table 9-10. Thermocouple Board Configuration (Part 1 of 2) Parameter Configuration SysFreq SystemLimits Auto Reset J3J4:I200TBTCH1A ThermCpl1 ThermoCpl Type System Frequency (used for noise rejection) Enables or Disables All System Limit Checking Automatic Restoring of Thermocouples removed from scan Terminal Board First of 24 thermocouples - Card Point Signal Thermocouples supported by VTCC; unused inputs are removed from scanning, mV inputs are primarily for maintenance. Enable 2 Hz low pass filter Enables or disables a temperature limit which can be used to create an alarm. Determines whether the limit condition will latch or unlatch; reset used to unlatch. Limit occurs when the temperature is greater than or equal (>=), or less than or equal to (<=) a preset value. Enter the desired value. Enables or disables a temperature limit which can be used to create an alarm. Determines whether the limit condition will latch or unlatch; reset used to unlatch. Limit occurs when the temperature is greater than or equal (>=), or less than or equal to (<=) a preset value. Enter the desired value. Limit condition occurs if 3 temperatures in R, S, T differ by more than a preset value (deg F); this creates a voting alarm condition. First Cold Junction Reference - Card Point Signal (similar configuration as for thermocouples but no low pass filter or CJ type choices of local or remote). Second Cold Junction Reference - Card Point Signal (similar configuration as for thermocouples but no low pass filter or CJ type choices of local or remote). 50 or 60 Hz Enable, Disable Enable, Disable Connected, Not Connected Point Edit (Input FLOAT) Unused, mV, S, T, K, J, E Description Choices
LowPassFiltr SysLim1 Enabl SysLim1 Latch SysLim1 Type SysLimit 1 SysLim2 Enabled SysLim2 Latch SysLim2 Type SysLimit 2 TMR Diff Limt
Enable, Disable Enable, Disable Latch, Unlatch Greater Than or Equal, Less Than or Equal Engineering Units Enable, Disable Latch, Unlatch Greater Than or Equal, Less Than or Equal Engineering Units 60 to 2,000
ColdJunc1
As above (Input FLOAT)
ColdJunc2
As above (Input FLOAT)
Table 9-10. Thermocouple Board Configuration (Part 2 of 2) Card Points (Signals) L3DIAG_VTCC1 L3DIAG_VTCC2 L3DIAG_VTCC3 SysLim1TC1 : SysLim1TC24 SysLim1CJ1 SysLim1JC2 SysLim2TC1 : SysLim2TC24 SysLim2CJ1 SysLim2CJ2 CJ Backup CJ Remote 1 CJ Remote 2 ThermCpl1 : ThermCpl24 ColdJunc1 ColdJunc2 Description - Point Edit (Enter Signal Connection Name) Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic System Limit 1 for Thermocouple : System Limit 1 for Thermocouple System Limit 1 for Cold Junction System Limit 1 for Cold Junction System Limit 2 for Thermocouple : System Limit 2 for Thermocouple System Limit 2 for Cold Junction System Limit 2 for Cold Junction Cold Junction Backup Cold Junction Remote 1 Cold Junction Remote 2 Thermocouple reading : Thermocouple reading Cold Junction for TC's 112 Cold Junction for TC's 1324 Direction Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Input Input Input Input Input Type BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT
Installation
Thermocouples are wired directly to two I/O terminal blocks. These blocks are mounted on the terminal board and held down with two screws as shown in Figure 913. Each block has 24 terminals accepting up to #12 AWG wires. A shield termination strip attached to chassis ground is located immediately to the left of each terminal block.
Thermocouple Terminal Board TBTCH1C
Input 1 (-) Input 2 (-) Input 3 (-) Input 4 (-) Input 5 (-) Input 6 (-) Input 7 (-) Input 8 (-) Input 9 (-) Input 10(-) Input 11(-) Input 12(-)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
Input 1 (+) Input 2 (+) Input 3 (+) Input 4 (+) Input 5 (+) Input 6 (+) Input 7 (+) Input 8 (+) Input 9 (+) Input 10(+) Input 11(+) Input 12(+)
JA1
Input 13(-) Input 14(-) Input 15(-) Input 16(-) Input 17(-) Input 18(-) Input 19(-) Input 20(-) Input 21(-) Input 22(-) Input 23(-) Input 24(-)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
Input 13(+) Input 14(+) Input 15(+) Input 16(+) Input 17(+) Input 18(+) Input 19(+) Input 20(+) Input 21(+) Input 22(+) Input 23(+) Input 24(+)
JB1
Cable to J3 on I/O Rack
Cable to J4 on I/O Rack
I/O Terminal Blocks with Barrier Terminals Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from terminal board for maintenance Up to two #12 AWG wires per point with 300 volt insulation
TMR version of this board has connectors JRA, JSA, and JTA for inputs 1-12, and connectors JRB, JSB, and JTB for inputs 13-24.
Figure 9-13. TBTC Wiring and Cabling
VTCC/TBTCH1B (TMR) - Thermocouple Inputs

TBTCH1B provides redundant thermocouple inputs by fanning the inputs out to VTCC boards in the R, S, and T racks, refer to Figure 9-14. The inputs have the same environmental, codes, resolution, suppression, and function requirements as with the TBTC terminal board.
Terminal Board TBTCH1B JRA

Local Cold Junction Reference ID
<R> Rack J3 Thermocouple Input Board VTCC Excitation.
Thermocouple
High Low
NS
Noise Suppression
JSA
ID
Remote Cold Junction References To <S >
(12) thermocouples JTA

ID
A/D
To <T >
Processor
VMEbus
JRB
Local Cold Junction Reference ID
J4
Excit.
Thermocouple
High Low
NS
JSB
ID
(12) thermocouples
To <S > JTB

ID
Analog-Digital Converter
To <T >
Figure 9-14. Redundant Thermocouple Inputs (TMR)
Installation
Thermocouples are wired directly to two I/O terminal blocks. These blocks are mounted on the terminal board and held down with two screws as shown in Figure 915. Each block has 24 terminals accepting up to #12 AWG wires. A shield termination strip attached to chassis ground is located immediately to the left of each terminal block. Two cables connect to J3 and J4 on each of the R, S, and T racks. Thermocouples 112 connect to the JRA, JSA, and JTA connectors; thermocouples 1324 connect to JRB, JSB, and JTB.
Thermocouple Terminal Board TBTCH1B JTA JTB
Input 1 (-) Input 2 (-) Input 3 (-) Input 4 (-) Input 5 (-) Input 6 (-) Input 7 (-) Input 8 (-) Input 9 (-) Input 10(-) Input 11(-) Input 12(-)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
Input 1 (+) Input 2 (+) Input 3 (+) Input 4 (+) Input 5 (+) Input 6 (+) Input 7 (+) Input 8 (+) Input 9 (+) Input 10(+) Input 11(+) Input 12(+)
To J3 Rack T
JSA
JSB
Cable to J4 on I/O Rack T
To J3 Rack S
Input 13(-) Input 14(-) Input 15(-) Input 16(-) Input 17(-) Input 18(-) Input 19(-) Input 20(-) Input 21(-) Input 22(-) Input 23(-) Input 24(-)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
Input 13(+) Input 14(+) Input 15(+) Input 16(+) Input 17(+) Input 18(+) Input 19(+) Input 20(+) Input 21(+) Input 22(+) Input 23(+) Input 24(+)
JRA
JRB
Cable to J4 on I/O Rack S
Cable to J4 on I/O Rack R Cable to J3 on I/O Rack R
I/O Terminal Blocks with Barrier Terminals Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from terminal board for maintenance Up to two #12 AWG wires per point with 300 volt insulation
Figure 9-15. TBTCH1B Wiring and Cabling (TMR)
DTTC - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Thermocouple Terminal Board

The DTCC board is a compact terminal board, designed for DIN-rail mounting. The board has 12 thermocouple inputs and connects to the VTCC thermocouple processor board with a single 37-pin cable. This cable is identical to the one used on the larger TBCC terminal board. The on-board signal conditioning and cold junction reference are identical to those on the TBTC board. An on-board ID chip identifies the board to the VTCC for system diagnostic purposes. Two DTTC boards can be connected to the VTCC for a total of 24 inputs, as shown in Figure 9-16. Only the Simplex version of the board is available. The terminal boards can be stacked vertically on the DIN-rail to conserve cabinet space. High density Euro Block type terminal blocks are permanently mounted to the board with two screw connections for the ground connection (SCOM). Every third screw connection is for the shield.
<R> Control Rack DTTC Terminal Board Local Cold Junction Reference (1) Thermocouple Input Board VTCC
JA1
J3
Excitation 24 Thermocouples
Thermocouple
1 Pos 2 Neg
Noise Suppression
Remote Cold Junction References
3 Shld SCOM (12) thermocouples ID Connectors at bottom of VME rack J4 Excit. I/O Core Processor TMS320C32 Connector for cable from second DTTC terminal board Sampling Type A/D Converter
A/D
Processor
VMEbus
Figure 9-16. DTTC Terminal board for Thermocouple Inputs
DTTC Board Installation

Shield screws are provided on this board, internally connected to SCOM. The DTTC board slides into a plastic holder, which mounts on the DIN-rail. Thermocouples are wired directly to the terminal block as shown in Figure 9-17. The Euro Block type terminal block has 42 terminals and is permanently mounted on the terminal board. Typically #18 AWG wires are used. There are two screws for the SCOM (ground) connection, which should be as short a distance as possible.
DIN Thermocouple Terminal Board DTTC
Screw Connections Input 1 (-) Input 2 Shld Input 2 (-) Input 3 (-) Input 4 Shld Input 4 (-) Input 5 (-) Input 6 Shld Input 6 (-) Input 7 (-) Input 8 Shld Input 8 (-) Input 9 (-) Input 10 Shld Input 10 (-) Input 11 (-) Input 12 Shld Input 12 (-) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41
Screw Connections Input 1 (+) Input 1 Shld Input 2 (+) Input 3 (+) Input 3 Shld Input 4 (+) Input 5 (+) Input 5 Shld Input 6 (+) Input 7 (+) Input 7 Shld Input 8 (+) Input 9 (+) Input 9 Shld Input 10 (+) Input 11 (+) Input 11 Shld Input 12 (+) Chassis Ground
37-pin "D" shell connector with latching fasteners
JA1
Cable to J3 connector in I/O rack for the VTCC board
Chassis Ground
SCOM
Euro Block type terminal block
Plastic mounting holder DIN-rail mounting Figure 9-17. DTTC Wiring and Cabling
VRTD/TRTDH1C (Simplex) - RTD Inputs

The RTD (Resistance Temperature Device) processor board (VRTD) accepts 16, three-wire RTD inputs. These inputs are wired to two barrier type blocks on the RTD terminal board (TRTD). Inputs to TRTD have noise suppression circuitry to protect against surge and high frequency noise. Cables with molded fittings connect the terminal board to the VME rack where the VRTD processor board is located. VRTD converts the inputs to digital temperature values and transfers them over the VME backplane to the VCMI, and then to the controller. There are two versions of TRTD, the type shown in Figure 9-18, and a TMR version that fans out the signals to three VRTD boards,
TRTD Terminal Board
x
VRTD VME Board

x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x
8 RTD Inputs
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
TRTD capacity for 16 RTD inputs
RUN FAIL STAT
VME Bus to VCMI JA1 37-pin "D" shell type connectors with latching fasteners
8 RTD Inputs
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 x
JB1 Cables to VME I/O Rack Connectors on VME I/O Rack

VRTD x
J3
Shield Bar
J4
Figure 9-18. RTD Input Terminal Board, I/O Board, and Cabling
Operation
The terminal board supplies a 10 mA dc multiplexed (not continuous) excitation current to each RTD, which can be grounded or ungrounded. The 16 RTDs can be located up to 300 meters (984 feet) from the turbine control cabinet with a maximum two-way cable resistance of 15 ohms. The RTD inputs and signal processing are shown in Figure 9-19. The VCO type A/D converter in the VRTD board uses voltage to frequency converters and sampling counters. The converter samples each signal and the excitation current four times per second for normal mode scanning, and 25 times per second for fast mode scanning, using a time sample interval related to the power system frequency. Linearization for the selection of 15 RTD types is performed in software by the digital signal processor. RTD open and short circuits are detected by out of range values. An RTD that is determined to be out of hardware limits is removed from the scanned inputs in order to prevent adverse affects on other input channels. Repaired channels are reinstated automatically in 20 seconds, or can be manually reinstated.
<R> or <S> or <T> I/O Rack Termination Board TRTD

Noise Suppression
RTD Input Board VRTD
Excitation RTD Signal Return Grounded or ungrounded
JA1
J3
Excit.
NS

ID
(8) RTDs
Noise Suppression
JB1
Connectors at A/D bottom of VME rack Excit. J4
Processor VMEbus VME Bus
NS
VCO Type A/D Converter
ID
(8) RTDs
Figure 9-19. RTD Inputs and Signal Processing
Features
RTD Limits
RTD inputs are supported over a full-scale input range of 0.3532 to 4.054 volts. Table 9-11 shows the types of RTDs used and the temperature ranges.
Table 9-11. RTD Types and Ranges RTD Type 10 ohm copper 100 ohm platinum 100 ohm platinum Name/Standard MINCO_CA GE 10 Ohm Copper SAMA 100 DIN 43760 IEC-751 MINCO_PD MINCO_PE PT100_DIN MINCO_PA IPTS-68 PT100_PURE MINCO_PB Rosemount 104 PT100_USIND MINCO_NA N 120 PT 200 Range degree C 51 to +260 51 to +593 51 to +700 Range degree F 60 to +500 60 to +1100 60 to +1292
100 ohm platinum
51 to +700
60 to +1292
100 ohm platinum
51 to +700
60 to +1292
120 ohm nickel 200 ohm platinum
51 to +249 51 to +204
60 to +480 60 to +400
Calibration
RTD inputs are automatically calibrated using the filtered calibration source and null voltages.
Front panel
Three LEDs at the top of the VRTD front panel provide status information. The normal RUN condition is a flashing green and FAIL is a solid red. The third LED is normally off but shows a steady orange if a diagnostic alarm condition exists in the board.
Specification
Table 9-12. VRTD Specification Item Number of Channels RTD Types Specification 16 channels per terminal board 16 channels per VRTD board 10, 100, and 200 ohm platinum 10 ohm copper 120 ohm nickel 0.3532 to 4.054 volts 14-bit resolution Normal scan 250 ms (4 Hz) Fast scan 40 ms (25 Hz) Less than 12 watts See Table 3-11 Ac common mode rejection 60 dB @ 50/60 Hz Dc common mode rejection 80 dB 5 Volts Rejection of up to 250 mV rms is 60 dB @ 50/60 Hz system frequency for normal scan 15 ohms maximum two way cable resistance High/low (hardware) limit check High/low (software) system limit check
Span A/D Converter Resolution Scan Time Power Consumption Measurement Accuracy Common Mode Rejection Common Mode Voltage Range Normal Mode Rejection Maximum Lead Resistance Fault Detection
Table 9-13. RTD Accuracy RTD Type 120 ohm Nickel 200 ohm Platinum 100 ohm Platinum 100 ohm Platinum (60 F to 400 F) 10 ohm Copper Group Gain Normal_ 1.0 Normal_ 1.0 Normal_ 1.0 Gain_ 2.0 10 ohm Cu_10 Accuracy at 400 F 2 F 2 F 4 F 2 F 10 F
Like all I/O boards, the RTD board is configured using the Control System Toolbox. This software usually runs on a data-highway connected CIMPLICITY station or workstation. Table 9-14 summarizes configuration choices and defaults. For details refer to GEH-6403, Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Turbine Controller.
Table 9-14. Typical VRTD Configuration Module Parameter Configuration System Limits Auto Reset Group A Rate Enable or disable all system limit checking Enable or disable restoring of RTDs removed from scan Sampling rate and system frequency filter for first group of 8 inputs Gain 2.0 is for higher accuracy if ohms <190, first group of 8 inputs Sampling rate and system frequency filter for second group of 8 inputs Gain 2.0 is for higher accuracy if ohms <190, second group of 8 inputs Terminal Board First of 16 RTDs - Card Point Signal RTDs linearizations supported by VRTD; select RTD or Ohms Input (unused inputs are removed from scanning) Enable, Disable Enable, Disable 4 Hz, 50 Hz filter 4 Hz, 60 Hz filter 25 Hz Normal_1.0 Gain_2.0 10 ohm Cu_10.0 4 Hz, 50 Hz filter 4 Hz, 60 Hz filter 25 Hz Normal_1.0 Gain_2.0 10 ohm Cu_10.0 Connnected, Not Connected Point Edit (Input FLOAT) Unused CU10 PT100_DIN PT100_PURE PT100_USIND N120 MINCO_PIA PT200 Ohms Enable, Disable Latch, Unlatch Greater Than or Equal Less Than or Equal 60 to 1,300 Enable, Disable Latch, Unlatch Greater Than or Equal Less Than or Equal 60 to 1,300 MINCO_CA MINCO_PD MINCO_PA MINCO_PB MINCO_NA PT100_SAMA MINCO_PK Description Choices
Group A Gain
Group B Rate
Group B Gain
J3J4:IS200TRTDH1C RTD1 RTD Type
SysLim1 Enable SysLim1 Latch SysLim1 Type
Enables or disables a temperature limit for each RTD, can be used to create an alarm Determines whether the limit condition will latch or unlatch for each RTD; reset used to unlatch. Limit occurs when the temperature is greater than or equal (>=), or less than or equal to (<=) a preset value. Enter the desired value of the limit temperature, Deg F or Ohms Enables or disables a temperature limit which can be used to create an alarm Determines whether the limit condition will latch or unlatch; reset used to unlatch. Limit occurs when the temperature is greater than or equal (>=), or less than or equal to (<=) a preset value. Enter the desired value of the limit temperature, Deg F or Ohms
System Limit 1 SysLim2 Enable SysLim2 Latch SysLim2 Type
System Limit 2
TMR Diff Limt
Limit condition occurs if 3 temperatures in R,S,T differ by more than a preset value; this creates a voting alarm condition. Description-Point Edit (Enter Signal Connection) Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic System Limit 1 : System Limit 1 System Limit 2 : System Limit 2
60 to 1,300
Card Point Signals L3DIAG_VRTD1 L3DIAG_VRTD2 L3DIAG_VRTD3 SysLim1RTD1 : SysLim1RTD16 SysLim2RTD1 : SysLim2RTD16
Direction Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Type BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT
Diagnostics
Two types of diagnostic checking are applied to all inputs, Hardware Limit Checking and System Limit Checking. Each RTD type has Hardware Limit Checking based on preset (non-configurable) high and low levels set near the ends of the operating range. If this limit is exceeded a logic signal is set and the input is no longer scanned. If any one of the 16 inputs hardware limits is set it creates a composite diagnostic alarm, L3DIAG_VRTD, referring to the entire board. Details of the individual diagnostics are available from the toolbox. The diagnostic signals can be individually latched, and then reset with the RESET_DIA signal. Each RTD input has System Limit Checking based on configurable high and low levels. These limits can be used to generate alarms, and can be configured for enable/disable, and as latching/nonlatching. RESET_SYS resets the out of limit signals. In TMR systems limit logic signals are voted and the resulting composite diagnostic is present in each controller. Each connector has its own ID device, which is interrogated by the I/O board. The board ID is coded into a read-only chip containing the terminal board serial number, board type, revision number, and the JA1/JB1 connector location. The TMR board version has six ID chips, one for each connector. Descriptions of the VRTD diagnostics are in GEH-6421C, Vol. I Mark VI System Guide, Chapter 8, Troubleshooting and Diagnostics.
Installation
The sixteen RTDs are wired directly to two I/O terminal blocks mounted on the terminal board. Each block is held down with two screws and has 24 terminals accepting up to #12 AWG wires, as shown in Figure 9-20. A shield termination strip attached to chassis ground is located immediately to the left of each terminal block. For grounded RTD operation, see application note in Figure 9-20.
RTD Terminal Board TRTDH1C Screw Connections Input 1 Input 2 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 8 (Sig) (Exc) (Ret) (Sig) (Exc) (Ret) (Sig) (Exc) (Ret) (Sig) (Exc) (Ret)
Screw Connections
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
Input 1 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 7 Input 8
(Exc) (Ret) (Sig) (Exc) (Ret) (Sig) (Exc) (Ret) (Sig) (Exc) (Ret) (Sig)
First 8 TCs to JA1
JA1
Input 9 (Sig) Input 10 (Exc) Input 10 (Ret) Input 11 (Sig) Input 12 (Exc) Input 12 (Ret) Input 13 (Sig) Input 14 (Exc) Input 14 (Ret) Input 15 (Sig) Input 16 (Exc) Input 16 (Ret)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
Cable to J3 on I/O Rack JB1 Second 8 TCs to JB1
A RTD B C
Excxx
Cable to J4 on I/O Rack Application Note: - Optional Ground: connnect the "B" wire to ground; - RTD Group wiring, that is sharing the "B" wire; tie the "B" wires together at the RTDs, tie the "Sigxx" signals together at the TRTD termination bboard, and interconnect with one wire.
Figure 9-20. RTD Terminal Board Wiring
Sigxx Retxx
VRTD/TRTDH1B (TMR) - RTD Inputs

TRTDH1B provides redundant RTD inputs by fanning the inputs out to VRTD boards in the R, S, and T racks, refer to Figure 9-21. The inputs meet the same environmental, codes, resolution, suppression, and function requirements as with the TRTD terminal board, however, the fast scan is not available. All RTD signals have high frequency decoupling to ground at signal entry. RTD multiplexing on the VRTD boards is coordinated by redundant pacemakers so that the loss of a single cable or loss of a single VRTD does not cause the loss of any RTD signals in the control database. VRTD boards in R, S, and T read RTDs simultaneously, but skewed by two RTDs, so that when R is reading RTD3, S is reading RTD5, and T is reading RTD7, and so on. This ensures that the same RTD is not excited by two VRTDs simultaneously, and hence produce bad readings.
Terminal Board TRTDH1B Signals PM= Pacemaker Tx = VRTD Transmit Rx = VRTD Receive
Noise Suppression
JRA
ID
NS
JSA
ID
PM, Tx PM, Rx, S
(8) RTDs to JRA, JSA, JTA
PM, Tx PM, Rx, R JTA

ID
PM, Tx PM, Rx, R Excitation RTD Signal Return Grounded or ungrounded

ID
Noise Suppression
JRB
ID
PM, Tx
NS
JSB (8) RTDs to JRB, JSB, JTB
PM, Rx, T
PM, Tx PM, Rx, T JTB

ID
PM, Tx PM, Rx, S
Figure 9-21. Redundant RTD Inputs (TMR)
TRTDH1B can be configured for TMR or Simplex operation. When configured for Simplex operation, the pacemaker is ignored. When configured for TMR operation only the slow (4 Hz) scan rate is allowed.
Installation
The sixteen RTDs are wired directly to two I/O terminal blocks mounted on the terminal board. Each block is held down with two screws and has 24 terminals accepting up to #12 AWG wires, as shown in Figure 9-22. A shield termination strip attached to chassis ground is located immediately to the left of each terminal block. For grounded RTD wiring, refer to the Application Note in Figure 9-20.
RTD Terminal Board TRTDH1B

x
JTA
JTB
(Sig) (Exc) (Ret) (Sig) (Exc) (Ret) (Sig) (Exc) (Ret) (Sig) (Exc) (Ret)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
To J3 Rack T
8 circuits to JRA, JSA, JTA
JSA
JSB
Cable to J4 on I/O Rack T
To J3 Rack S
Input 9 (Sig) Input 10 (Exc) Input 10 (Ret) Input 11 (Sig) Input 12 (Exc) Input 12 (Ret) Input 13 (Sig) Input 14 (Exc) Input 14 (Ret) Input 15 (Sig) Input 16 (Exc) Input 16 (Ret)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
JRA 8 circuits to JRB, JSB, JTB
JRB
Cable to J4 on I/O Rack S
Cable to J4 on I/O Rack R Cable to J3 on I/O Rack R Figure 9-22. RTDH1B Terminal Board Wiring
DRTD - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted RTD Terminal Board

The DRTD board is a compact RTD terminal board, designed for DIN-rail mounting. The board has eight RTD inputs and connects to the VRTD processor board with a single 37-pin cable, as shown in Figure 9-23. This cable is identical to those used on the larger TRTD terminal board. The terminal boards can be stacked vertically on the DIN-rail to conserve cabinet space. Two DRTD boards can be connected to the VRTD for a total of 16 temperature inputs. Only a Simplex version of the board is available. The on-board noise suppression is similar to that on the TRTD. High density Euro Block type terminal blocks are permanently mounted to the board, with two screw connections for the ground connection (SCOM). An on-board ID chip identifies the board to the VRTD for system diagnostic purposes.
<R> Control Rack RTD Input Board VRTD DRTD Board

Noise Suppression JA1
Excitation 1
B
J3
Excit.
16 RTD Inputs
RTD
C
Signal 2 Return 3

Connectors at bottom of VME rack
SCOM
(8) RTDs ID
A/D
Processor
VME Bus
J4
Excit.
Connector for cable from second DRTD board
VCO Type A/D Converter
Figure 9-23. DRTD Board
Installation
There is no shield termination strip with this design. The DRTD board slides into a plastic holder, which mounts on the DIN-rail. The eight RTDs are wired directly to the terminal block as shown in Figure 9-24. The Euro Block type terminal block has 36 terminals and is permanently mounted on the terminal board. Typically #18 AWG wires (shielded twisted triplet) are used. Terminals 25 through 34 are spares. There are two screws for the SCOM (ground) connection, which should be as short a distance as possible. For wiring grounded RTDs, see the section, Installation for the TRTD board.
DRTD Screw Connections Input 1 (Signal) Input 2 (Excitation) Input 2 (Return) JA1 Input 3 (Signal) Input 4 (Excitation) Input 4 (Return) Input 5 (Signal) Input 6 (Excitation) Input 6 (Return) Input 7 (Signal) Input 8 (Excitation) Input 8 (Return) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 Input 1 (Excitation) Input 1 (Return) Input 2 (Signal) Input 3 (Excitation) Input 3 (Return) Input 4 (Signal) Input 5 (Excitation) Input 5 (Return) Input 6 (Signal) Input 7 (Excitation) Input 7 (Return Input 8 (Signal)
Cable to J3 or J4 connector in I/O rack for VRTD board
Chassis Ground SCOM
Chassis Ground
Plastic mounting holder DIN-rail mounting
Figure 9-24. DRTD Board Wiring and Cabling
VAIC/TBAI - Analog Inputs

The Analog Input Board (VAIC) accepts 20 analog inputs and controls four analog outputs. Ten inputs and two outputs are wired to each Analog Input Terminal board (TBAI). Inputs and outputs have noise suppression circuitry to protect against surge and high frequency noise. Cables connect the terminal board to the VME rack where the VAIC processor board is located, as shown in Figure 9-25. The VAIC converts the inputs to digital values and transfers these over the VME backplane to the VCMI, and then to the controller. Input signals are fanned out to three VME board racks R, S, and T for TMR applications. The VAIC requires two terminal boards to monitor 20 inputs.
TBAI Terminal Board
x
TBAI Terminal Board

x
VAIC VME Board

x
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
JT1
JS1 To Rack T
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
JT1
RUN FAIL STAT
JS1
VME Bus to VCMI
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 x
JR1
To Rack S
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 x
Cable to VME Rack T JR1 Cable to VME Rack S

VAIC x
Connectors on VME Rack
J3
Shield Bar
J4
Cables to VME Rack R
Figure 9-25. Analog Input Terminal boards, I/O Board, and Cabling (TMR System)
Operation
24 V dc power is available on the terminal board for all the transducers, and there is a choice of current or voltage inputs using jumpers. One of the two analog output circuits is 4 20 mA, and the other can be jumper configured for 4 20 mA or 0 200 mA. The same terminal board can be used for TMR applications. The VAIC board accepts 20 analog inputs, controls four analog outputs, and contains signal conditioning, an analog MUX, A/D converter, and D/A converter, as shown in Figure 9-26.
<R> Module Controller Application Software
Terminal Board TBAI 8 Circuits per Termination Board Typical transmitter, Mark VI powered +24 V dc T +/-5,10 Vdc 4-20 ma Return Open
Noise Suppression
Current Limit
P28V Analog Input Board VAIC
N S
Vdc
J#A 20 ma
250 ohms
A/D
D/A
J#B Return Connectors at bottom of VME rack Excitation

JR1 J3/4
PCOM
2 Circuits per Termination Board +24 V dc +/-1 ma 4-20 ma Return N S

P28V
Current Limit
1 ma
250 ohm
J#A
20 ma 5k ohms
Open
J#B Return
Current Regulator/ Power Supply
Jump select on one circuit only; #2 Circuit is 4-20 ma only

Signal
Two Output Circuits

200 ma 20 ma
JO
Maximum Load 0-200 ma, 50 ohms 4-20 ma, 500 ohms
N S
SCOM
Return
ID
Figure 9-26. Analog Input Processing, Simplex
In a TMR system, analog inputs fanout to the three control racks from JR1, JS1, and JT1. The 24 V dc power to the transducers comes from all three VAIC boards and is diode shared on the terminal board. Each analog current output is fed by currents from all three VAIC, as shown in Figure 9-27. The actual output current is measured with a series resistor, which feeds a voltage back to each control rack. The resulting output is the voted middle value of the three currents.
Terminal Board TBAI Typical transmitter, Noise Mark VI powered +24 V dc T +/-5,10 Vdc 4-20 ma Return
Open
<R> Module Controller Application Software

P28V<T> P28V<S>
8 Circuits per Termination Board P28VR

Current Limit
Suppression
N S
Vdc
J#A 20 ma
Analog Input Board VAIC
250 ohms
A/D
D/A
J#B Return
PCOM
2 Circuits per Termination Board
Connectors at bottom of VME rack Excitation JR1 J3/J4

Filter 2 Pole
+24 Vdc +/-1 ma 4-20 ma Return N S
P28VR
Current Limit
1 ma J#A 20 ma
250 ohm
5k ohms
Open
PCOM
J#B Return
S T ID Current Regulator/ Power Supply
Two Output Circuits #2 Circuit is 4-20 ma only Maximum Load 0-200 ma, 50 ohms 4-20 ma, 500 ohms
Signal
200 ma 20 ma
JO
N S
SCOM
S T
JS1
Return
ID
JT1
To Rack<S> To Rack<T>
ID
Figure 9-27. Analog Input Processing, TMR
Features
The VAIC analog input/output capacity, using two TBAI terminal boards, is shown in Table 9-15.
Table 9-15. Quantity and Types of VAIC Analog Inputs and Outputs Qty 16 4 Analog Input Types 10 Vdc, or 5 Vdc, or 420 mA 420 mA, or 1 mA Qty 2 2 Analog Output Types 020 mA, or 0200 mA 020 mA
Transmitter/transducers can be powered by the 24 V dc source in the control system, or can be independently powered. Terminal board jumpers J#A, J#B, and JO set up the type of voltage and current inputs, and select the type of current output. Each output is monitored by diagnostics, and a suicide relay disconnects the corresponding output if a fault cannot be cleared by a command from the processor.
Noise Filtering
Hardware filters on the terminal board suppress high frequency noise. Additional software filters on VAIC provide configurable low pass filtering. With the above noise suppression and filtering, the input ac common mode rejection (CMR) is 60 dB, and the dc CMR is 80 dB.
Front panel
Three LEDs at the top of the VAIC front panel provide status information. The normal RUN condition is a flashing green, and FAIL is a solid red. The third LED is normally off but displays a steady orange if a diagnostic alarm condition exists in the board.
Specification
Table 9-16. VAIC Board Specifications Item Number of Channels Input Span Input Converter Resolution Scan Time Measurement accuracy Noise Suppression on inputs Specification 12 channels per terminal board (10 AI, 2 AO) 24 channels per VAIC board (20 AI, 4 AO) 1 5 V dc 16-bit A/D converter with 14-bit resolution Normal scan 10 ms (100 Hz) Inputs 1 through 4 available for scan at 200 Hz Better than 0.1% full scale The first ten circuits (J3) have a hardware filter with single pole down break at 500 radians/second. The second ten circuits (J4) have a hardware filter with a two pole down break at 72 and 500 rad/second. A software filter, using a two pole low pass filter, is configurable for 0, .75, 1.5 Hz, 3 Hz, 6 Hz, 12 Hz Ac common mode rejection 60 dB @ 60 Hz, with up to 5 volt common mode voltage. Dc common mode rejection 80 dB with from 5 to +7 peak volt common mode voltage.
Common mode rejection
Table 9-16. VAIC Board Specifications Continued Item Common mode voltage range Maximum lead resistance Output Converter Output Load Power consumption Compressor Stall Detection Fault detection Specification 5 Volts ( 2 Volt CMR for the 10 Volt inputs) 15 ohms maximum two-way cable resistance, cable length up to 300m (984 ft) 12-bit D/A converter with 0.5% accuracy 500 ohms for 420 mA output 50 ohms for 200 mA output Less than 31 watts Detection and relay operation within 30 sec Monitor D/A outputs, output currents, and total current Monitor suicide relays and 20/200 mA scaling relays
Diagnostics
Each analog input has Hardware Limit Checking based on preset (non-configurable) high and low levels set near the ends of the operating range. If this limit is exceeded a logic signal is set and the input is no longer scanned. If any one of the inputs hardware limits is set, it creates a composite diagnostic alarm, L3DIAG_VAIC, which refers to the entire board. Details of the individual diagnostics are available from the toolbox. The diagnostic signals can be individually latched, and then reset with the RESET_DIA signal. Each input has System Limit Checking based on configurable high and low levels. These limits can be used to generate alarms, and can be configured for enable/disable, and as latching/nonlatching. RESET_SYS resets the out of limits. Details of the diagnostics are in GEH-6421C, Vol. I Mark VI System Guide, Chapter 8, Troubleshooting and Diagnostics. The TBAI terminal board has its own ID device, which is interrogated by the I/O board. The board ID is coded into a read-only chip containing the terminal board serial number, board type, revision number, and the JR, JS, JT connector location.
Table 9-17 summarizes configuration choices and defaults. For details refer to GEH6403, Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Turbine Controller.
Table 9-17. Typical VAIC Configuration Parameter Configuration System Limits Output Voting Min_ MA_Input Max_ MA_Input CompStalType InputForPS3A InputForPS3B InputForPS3C SelMode PressDelta TimeDelay KPS3_Drop_Min KPS3_Drop_I KPS3_Drop_S KPS3_Delta_S KPS3_Delta_I KPS3_Delta_Mx KPS3_Drop_L KPS3_Drop_Mx J3:IS200TBAIH1A AnalogIn1 Input Type Low_Input Low_Value High_Input High_Value Input _Filter TMR Diff Limit Sys Lim 1 Enable Sys Lim 1 Latch Sys Lim 1 Type Sys Lim 1 Sys Lim 2 Enable Enable or disable system limits Select type of output voting Select minimum current for healthy 4-20 mA input Select maximum current for healthy 4-20 mA input Select Compressor Stall Algorithm (# of transducers) Select analog input circuit for PS3A Select analog input circuit for PS3B Select analog input circuit for PS3C Select mode for excessive difference Pressure Excessive Difference pressure threshold Time Delay on Stall Detection, in msec Minimum Pressure rate Pressure rate intercept Pressure rate slope Pressure delta slope Pressure delta intercept Pressure delta Max Threshold Pressure rate Max pressure rate Terminal board connected to VAIC via J3 First of 10 Analog Inputs - Card Point Current or voltage input type Value of current at the low end of scale Value of input in engineering units at low end of scale Value of current at the high end of scale Value of input in engineering units at high end of scale Bandwidth of input signal filter Difference limit for voted inputs in % of high-low values Input fault check Input fault latch Input fault type Input limit in Engineering Units Input fault check Enable, Disable Simplex, TMR 0 to 21 mA 0 to 21 mA 0, 2, or 3 AnalogIn 1, 2, 3, or 4 AnalogIn 1, 2, 3, or 4 AnalogIn 1, 2, 3, or 4 Max, Avg 5 to 500 10 to 40 10 to 2000 10 to 100 0.05 to 10 0.05 to 10 10 to 100 10 to 100 10 to 2000 10 to 2000 Connected, not connected Point Edit (Input FLOAT) Unused, 420 ma, 5 V, 10 V 10 to +20 3.4082e+038 to 3.4028e+038 10 to +20 3.4082e+038 to 3.4028e+038 Unused, 0.75, 1.5 Hz, 3 Hz, 6 Hz, 12 Hz 0 to 100 Enable, Disable Latch, Unlatch Greater Than or Equal Less Than or Equal 3.4082e+038 to 3.4028e+038 Enable, Disable Description Choices
Sys Lim 2 Latch Sys Lim 2 Type Sys Lim 2 AnalogOut1 Output_MA Low_MA Low_Value High_MA High_Value TMR Suicide Diff Limit D/A Err Limit J4:IS200TBAIH1A AnalogIn11 AnalogOut3 Card Points (Signals) L3DIAG_VAIC1 L3DIAG_VAIC2 L3DIAG_VAIC3 SysLimit1_1 : SysLimit1_20 SysLimit2_1 : SysLimit2_20 OutSuicide1 : OutSuicide4 DeltaFault CompStall Out1MA : Out4MA CompPressSel PressRate Sel CompStallPerm
Input fault latch Input fault type Input limit in Engineering Units First of two analog outputs - Card Point Type of output current Output mA at low value Output in Engineering Units at low mA Output mA at high value Output value in Engineering Units at high mA Suicide for faulty output current, TMR only Current difference for suicide, TMR only Difference between D/A reference and output, in % for suicide, TMR only Terminal board connected to VAIC via J4 First of 10 Analog Inputs - Card Point First of two analog outputs - Card Point Description Point Edit (Enter Signal Connection) Card diagnostic Card diagnostic Card diagnostic System Limit 1 : System Limit 1 System Limit 2 : System Limit 2 Status of Suicide Relay for Output 1 : Status of Suicide Relay for Output 4 Excessive difference pressure Compressor Stall Feedback, Total Output Current, mA : Feedback, Total Output Current, mA Selected Compressor Press, by Stall Algo. Selected Compressor Press rate, by Stall Algor. Compressor Stall Permissive
Latch, Unlatch Greater Than or Equal Less Than or Equal 3.4082e+038 to 3.4028e+038 Point Edit (Output FLOAT)
Unused, 020 mA, 0200 mA 0 to 200 mA 3.4082e+038 to 3.4028e+038 0 to 200 mA 3.4082e+038 to 3.4028e+038 Enable, Disable 0 to 200 mA 0 to 100 % Connected, Not Connected Point Edit Point Edit (Input FLOAT) (Output FLOAT) Type BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT BIT
Direction Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output
Installation
The 10 inputs and two outputs are wired directly to two I/O terminal blocks mounted on the terminal board. Each block is held down with two screws and has 24 terminals accepting up to #12 AWG wires. A shield termination strip attached to chassis ground is located immediately to the left of each terminal block. The types of analog inputs and outputs that can be accommodated are as follows: Analog input, two-wire transmitter Analog input, three-wire transmitter Analog input, four-wire transmitter Analog input, externally powered transmitter Analog input, voltage 5 V, 10 V dc Analog output, 20 mA Analog output, 200 mA The various types are selected with jumpers, as shown in Figure 9-28.
Analog Input Terminal Board TBAI

x
(20ma) (Ret) (20ma) (Ret) (20ma) (Ret) (20ma) (Ret) (20ma) (Ret) (20ma) (Ret)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
(24V) (Vdc) (24V) (Vdc) (24V) (Vdc) (24V) (Vdc) (24V) (Vdc) (24V) (Vdc)
Board Jumpers Circuit Jumpers 20ma/VDC OPEN/RET Input 1 J1A J1B Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 J2A J3A J4A J5A J6A J2B J3B J4B J5B J6B
JT1
To I/O Rack T JS1
Input 7 (20ma) Input 7 (Ret) Input 8 (20ma) Input 8 (Ret) Input 9 (20ma) Input 9 (Ret) Input 10 (20ma) Input 10 (Ret)
x x x x x x x x x x
Output 1 (Ret) Output 2 (Ret)
x x
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
Input 7 (24V) Input 7 (Vdc) Input 8 (24V) Input 8 (Vdc) Input 9 (24V) Input 9 (1ma) Input 10 (24V) Input 10 (1ma)
Input 7 Input 8
J7A
J7B To I/O Rack S
J8A J8B 20ma/1 ma OPEN/RET Input 9 J9A J9B Input 10 J10A J10B
JR1
Output 1 (Sig) Output 2 (Sig)
Output 1 Output 2
20ma/200ma J0 No Jumper (0-20ma) To I/O Rack R
Two-Wire transmitter wiring 4-20ma
+24 V dc T Voltage input 4-20 ma Return

Open
VDC J#A 20 ma
Three-wire transmitter wiring 4-20 ma

T
+24 V dc Voltage input 4-20 ma Return VDC J#A 20 ma
J#B
Open
J#B
PCOM
Externally powered transmitter wiring 4-20 ma

Power Supply + T + -
+24 V dc Voltage input 4-20 ma Return

Open
VDC J#A 20 ma
Four-wire transmitter wiring 5 Vdc

T
+24 V dc Voltage input 4-20 ma Signal Return VDC J#A 20 ma
J#B
Max. common mode voltage is 7.0 V dc
Open
J#B
PCOM
Misc return to PCOM

PCOM
Figure 9-28. TBAI Terminal Board Wiring
DTAI - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Analog Input Terminal Board

The DTAI board is a compact analog input terminal board, designed for DIN-rail mounting. The board has 10 analog inputs and two analog outputs, and connects to the VAIC processor board with a single 37-pin cable, as shown in Figure 9-29. This cable is identical to those used on the larger TBAI terminal board. The terminal boards can be stacked vertically on the DIN-rail to conserve cabinet space. Two DTAI boards can be connected to the VAIC for a total of 20 analog inputs and four analog outputs. Only a Simplex version of the board is available. The functions and on-board noise suppression are the same as those on the TBAI. High density Euro Block type terminal blocks are permanently mounted to the board, with two screw connections for the ground connection (SCOM). An on-board ID chip identifies the board to the VAIC for system diagnostic purposes.
<R> Module DTAI Board Typical transmitter, Mark VI powered 8 Circuits per Terminal Board Noise
Suppression
Current Limit
Controller Application Software
+24 V dc 1
P28V Analog Input Board VAIC
Voltage input 3
(+/-5,10 V dc)
N 2 S 4-20 ma Return 4
Vdc
J1A 20 ma
250 ohms
A/D
D/A
J1B (For other Open Return transmitter hookups, see Fig. 10-7) PCOM 41 PCOM 43 SCOM 2 Circuits per Terminal Board P28V 33 +24 V dc Current Limit N 4-20 ma 34 S Return 36
Open
Connectors at bottom of VME rack Excitation

JR1 J3/4
+/-1 ma 35
1 ma
250 ohm
J9A
20 ma 5k ohms
J9B
Return PCOM Current Regulator/ Power Supply
Jump select on one circuit only; #2 Circuit is 4-20 ma only Maximum Load 4-20 mA, 500 ohms 0-200 mA, 50 ohms
Two Output Circuits 200 ma JO

20 ma
Signal 45
N 46 S SCOM
ID
Return
Figure 9-29. DTAI Board
Installation
There is no shield termination strip with this design. The DTAI board slides into a plastic holder, which mounts on the DIN-rail. The Euro Block type terminal block has 48 terminals and is permanently mounted on the board. Typically #18 AWG wires (shielded twisted pair) are used. There are two screws for the SCOM (ground) connection, which should be as short a distance as possible.
DTAI
Jumpers 37-pin "D" shell connector with latching fasteners

JP1B JP1A
Screw Connections 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
TB1 Screw Connections Circuit 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 Input 1 (24V) Input 1 (Vdc) Input 2 (24V) Input 2 (Vdc) Input 3 (24V) Input 3 (Vdc) Input 4 (24V) Input 4 (Vdc) Input 5 (24V) Input 5 (Vdc) Input 6 (24V) Input 6 (Vdc) Input 7 (24V) Input 7 (Vdc) Input 8 (24V) Input 8 (Vdc) Input 9 (24V) Input 9 (1mA) Input 10 (24V) Input 10 (1mA) PCOM Chassis Ground Output 1 (Signal) Output 2 (Signal) Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Output 1 Output 2
Jumpers Open/Return 20ma/Vdc J1B J2B J3B J4B J5B J6B J7B J8B J9B J10B J1A J2A J3A J4A J5A J6A J7A J8A 20ma/1ma J9A J10A J0 No jumper
+24 V dc
JR1
Cable to J3 connector in I/O rack for VAIC board
Input 1 (20mA) JP2B JP2A Input 1 (Return) Input 2 (20mA) JP3B JP3A Input 2 (Return) Input 3 (20mA) JP4B JP4A Input 3 (Return) Input 4 (20mA) JP5B JP5A Input 4 (Return) Input 5 (20mA) JP6B JP6A Input 5 (Return) Input 6 (20mA) JP7B JP7A Input 6 (Return) Input 7 (20mA) JP8B JP8A Input 7 (Return Input 8 (20mA) JP9B JP9A Input 8 (Return Input 9 (20mA) JP10B JP10A Input 9 (Return) Input 10 (20mA) Input 10 (Ret) JP0 PCOM Chassis Ground Output 1 (Return) Output 2 (Return)
SCOM
Externally powered transmitter DIN-rail mounting

Power Supply + T + -
Voltage input 4-20 ma Return
J1A
20 ma J1B Open Return PCOM
+24 V dc
Alternate Transmitter
Three-wire transmitter
Voltage input T 4-20 ma Return Open J2B Return PCOM J2A 20 ma
Figure 9-30. DTAI Wiring, Cabling, and Jumper Positions
VAOC/TBAO - Analog Outputs

The Analog Output Board (VAOC) controls 16 analog, 20 mA, outputs. These outputs are wired to two barrier type blocks on the Analog Output Terminal board (TBAO). Noise suppression circuitry to protect against surge and high frequency noise is mounted on the terminal board. Cables with molded plugs connect the terminal board to the VME rack where the VAOC processor board is located. The VAOC receives digital values from the controller over the VME backplane from the VCMI, and converts these to analog output currents. Note that for TMR applications control signals are fanned into the same terminal board from three VME board racks R, S, and T, as shown in Figure 9-31. Six cables are required to support all 16 outputs with TMR.
TBAO Terminal Board
x
x
8 Analog Outputs
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
JT1 JT2
VAOC VME Board x

RUN FAIL STAT
VME Bus to VCMI Communication Board JS1 JS2 Cables to VME Rack T
8 Analog Outputs
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
Cables to VME Rack S JR1 JR2

VAOC x
Connectors on VME Rack R

x
J3
Shield Bar Barrier Type Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from board for maintenance
J4 Cables to VME Rack R
Figure 9-31. Analog Output Terminal board, I/O Board, and Cabling
Operation
The terminal board supports 16 analog outputs. Driven devices have a maximum resistance of 500 ohms and can be located up to 300 meters (984 feet) from the turbine control cabinet. VAOC in the VME rack contains the D/A converter and driver which generates the controlled currents, as shown in Figure 9-32. The output current is controlled by the voltage drop across a resistor on the terminal board.
<R> Module Analog Output Board VAOC TBAO Terminal Board
Suicide
100 Relay ohms
D/A
From Controller
Current Regulator/ Power Driver

Current Sensing
J3
JR1
50 ohms
Noise Suppression 01 NS 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Maximum Load 4-20 ma, 500 ohms

Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return
Circuit #1 Circuit #2 Circuit #3 Circuit #4 Circuit #5 Circuit #6 Circuit #7 Circuit #8 Circuit #9 Circuit #10 Circuit #11 Circuit #12 Circuit #13 Circuit #14 Circuit #15 Circuit #16
Output Current
Sensing
First group of 8 analog 0-20 ma outputs

ID
Group 1
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D/A
From Controller

Current
100 ohms
Suicide Relay
J4
JR2
50 ohms
NS
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Sensing
Output Current Sensing
Second group of 8 analog 0-20 ma outputs

ID
Group 2
Connectors at bottom of VME rack Figure 9-32. Analog Output Processing, Simplex
31 32
In a TMR system, each analog current output is fed by the sum of the currents from the three VAOCs, as shown in Figure 9-33. The total output current is measured with a series resistor which feeds a voltage back to each control rack and VAOC. The resulting output is the voted middle value of the three currents. If one output fails, the other two pickup the current to the correct value. If one output fails high, it is disconnected by the suicide relay.
VME Racks <T> Current Output Board VAOC <R> <S> Terminal Board TBAO
100 ohms
D/A
From Controller

Current
Suicide Relay
J3
JR1
50 ohms
Noise Suppression
Maximum Load 500 ohms

01 02
Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return
NS
Circuit #1 Circuit #2 Circuit #3 Circuit #4 Circuit #5 Circuit #6 Circuit #7 Circuit #8
Sensing
03 04
Total Current
Sensing
05 06 07 08 ID Group 1 09 10 11 12 ID 13 14 15 16
J3 First group of (8) 0-20ma outputs Same for <S>
JS1
J3 Same for <T> J4 Same for <R> J4 Second group of (8) 0-20ma outputs Same for <S>
JT1
ID
JR2
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Group 2 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return Signal Return
Circuit #9 Circuit #10 Circuit #11 Circuit #12 Circuit #13 Circuit #14 Circuit #15 Circuit #16
ID
JS2
ID
Same for <T>
J4
JT2
ID
32
Figure 9-33. Analog Output Processing, TMR
Features
Each output is monitored by diagnostics. Voltage drops across the local and outer loop current sense resistors, at the control reference, D/A outputs, and at the suicide relay contacts are sampled and digitized. In the event of a malfunction that cannot be cleared by a command from the processor, the circuit is disconnected by opening the suicide relay contacts. This isolation function is only operational when configured for TMR operation. Filters reduce high frequency noise and suppress surge on each output near the point of signal exit.
Front panel
Three LEDs at the top of the VAOC front panel provide status information. The normal RUN condition is a flashing green, and FAIL is a solid red. The third LED is normally off but displays a steady orange if a diagnostic alarm condition exists in the board.
Specification
Table 9-18. VAOC Specification Item Number of Channels Analog Outputs D/A Converter Resolution/Accuracy Frame Rate Fault detection Specification 16 current output channels, single ended (one side connected to common) 020 mA, up to 500 ohm burden Response better than 50 rad/sec 12-bit resolution with 0.5% accuracy 100 Hz on all 12 outputs Local current Outer total (TMR) current D/A converter output Suicide relay operation
Diagnostics
Standard diagnostic information is available on the inputs and outputs, including high and low limit checks, and high and low system limit checks (configurable). If any one of the 16 outputs goes unhealthy a composite diagnostic alarm, L3DIAG_VAOC, occurs. Details of the individual diagnostics are available from the toolbox. The diagnostic signals can be individually latched, and then reset with the RESET_DIA signal if they go healthy. Each cable connector on the terminal board has its own ID device which is interrogated by the I/O board. The ID device is a read-only chip coded with the terminal board serial number, board type, revision number, and the JR, JS, JT connector location.
Like all I/O boards, the VAOC board is configured using the Control System Toolbox. This software usually runs on a data-highway connected CIMPLICITY station or workstation. Table 9-19 summarizes the configuration choices. Refer to GEH-6403, Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Turbine Controller.
Table 9-19. Typical VAOC Configuration Parameter Configuration Output Voting J3:IS200TBAOH1A AnalogOut1 Output_MA Low_MA Low_Value High_MA High_Value TMR_ Suicide TMR_Diff Limit D/A_Err Limit J4:IS200TBAOH1A AnalogOut9 Select type of output voting Terminal board connected to VAOC via J3 Analog Output 1 - Card Point (first set of 8 Analog Outputs) Type of output current Output MA at Low Value Output in Engineering Units at Low MA Output MA at High Value Output Value in Engineering Units at High MA Enable Suicide for faulty output current, TMR only Current difference in MA for suicide, TMR only Difference between D/A reference and output, in % for suicide, TMR only Terminal board connected to VAOC via J4 Analog Output 9 - Card Point (second set of 8 Analog Outputs) DescriptionPoint Edit (Enter Signal Connection) Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Status of Suicide Relay for Output 1 : Status of Suicide Relay for Output 16 Measure Total Output Current in mA : Measure Total Output Current in mA Simplex, TMR Connected, Not Connected Point Edit (Output FLOAT) Description Choices
Unused, 020 mA 0 to 20 mA 3.4028e+038 to 3.4028e+038 0 to 20 mA 3.4028e+038 to 3.4028e+038 Enable, Disable 0 to 20 mA 0 to 100 % Connected, Not Connected Point Edit (Output FLOAT)
Card Points Signals L3DIAG_VAOC1 L3DIAG_VAOC2 L3DIAG_VAOC3 OutSuicide1 : OutSuicide16 Out1MA : Out16MA
Direction Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Type BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT
Installation
The 16 analog outputs are wired directly to two I/O terminal blocks mounted on the terminal board, as shown in Figure 9-34. Each block is held down with two screws and has 24 terminals accepting up to #12 AWG wires. A shield termination strip attached to chassis ground is located immediately to the left of each terminal block.
Analog Output Terminal Board TBAO
JT1
JT2
Output 1 (Return) Output 2 (Return) Output 3 (Return) Output 4 (Return) Output 5 (Return) Output 6 (Return) Output 7 (Return) Output 8 (Return) Output 9 (Return) Output 10(Return) Output 11(Return) Output 12(Return)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
Output 1 (Signal) Output 2 (Signal) Output 3 (Signal) Output 4 (Signal) Output 5 (Signal) Output 6 (Signal) Output 7 (Signal) Output 8 (Signal) Output 9 (Signal) Output 10(Signal) Output 11(Signal) Output 12(Signal)
To J4 on I/O Rack T JS1 JS2 To J3 on I/O Rack T
Output 13(Return) Output 14(Return) Output 15(Return) Output 16(Return)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
Output 13 (Signal) Output 14 (Signal) Output 15 (Signal) Output 16 (Signal)
To J4 on I/O Rack S JR1 JR2 To J3 on I/O Rack S
To J4 on I/O Rack R To J3 on I/O Rack R
I/O Terminal Block with Barrier Terminals Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from terminal board for maintenance Up to two #12 AWG wires per point with 300 volt insulation
Figure 9-34. TBAO Terminal Board Wiring
DTAO - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Analog Output Terminal Board

The DTAO board is a compact analog output terminal board, designed for DIN-rail mounting. The DTAO board has eight analog outputs, and connects to the VAOC processor board with a single 37-pin cable, as shown in Figure 9-35. This cable is identical to those used on the larger TBAO terminal board. The terminal boards can be stacked vertically on the DIN-rail to conserve cabinet space. Two DTAO boards can be connected to the VAOC for a total of 16 analog outputs. Only a Simplex version of this board is available. The functions and on-board noise suppression are the same as those on TBAO. High density Euro Block type terminal blocks are permanently mounted to the board, with two screw connections for the ground connection (SCOM). An on-board ID chip identifies the board to the VAOC for system diagnostic purposes
<R> Module VAOC Board
Suicide Relay
DTAO Terminal Board

Noise Suppresion 01 50 ohms 02 SCOM 03 04 05 06 07 08
D/A
From Controller

Sensing
100 ohms
J3
JR1
Analog Outputs Maximum Load 4-20 mA, 500 ohms

Signal Return Signal
Circuit #1
Sensing
Return Circuit #2 Signal Return Circuit #3 Signal Return Circuit #4 Signal Return Circuit #5 Signal Return Circuit #6 Signal Return Circuit #7 Signal Return Circuit #8
First group of 8 analog 4-20 mA outputs ID

Suicide Relay
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D/A
From Controller
Current Regulator/ Power Driver Sensing
100 ohms
J4
Eight Analog Outputs
Sensing To second DTAO terminal board Second group of 8 analog 4-20 mA outputs
Figure 9-35. DTAO Board
Installation
There is no shield termination strip with this design. The DTAO board slides into a plastic holder, which mounts on the DIN-rail. The eight analog outputs are wired directly to the terminal block as shown in Figure 936. The Euro Block type terminal block has 36 terminals and is permanently mounted on the terminal board. Typically #18 AWG wires (shielded twisted pair) are used. There are two screws for the SCOM (ground) connection which should be as short a distance as possible.
DTAO
Screw Connections Output 1 (Return) Output 2 (Return) Output 3 (Return) Output 4 (Return) Output 5 (Return) Output 6 (Return) Output 7 (Return) Output 8 (Return) Chassis Ground
SCOM
Screw Connections 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 Output 1 (Signal) Output 2 (Signal) Output 3 (Signal) Output 4 (Signal) Output 5 (Signal) Output 6 (Signal) Output 7 (Signal) Output 8 (Signal) Chassis Ground
JR1
Cable to J3 or J4 connector in I/O rack for VAOC board
Plastic mounting holder DIN-rail mounting
Figure 9-36. DTAO Wiring and Cabling
VCCC/TBCI - Contact Inputs

The Contact Input/Relay Output Board (VCCC) with its associated daughter board, accepts 48 discrete inputs and controls 24 relay outputs. VCCC is a double width module and connects to two sets of J3/J4 plugs via the VME backplane as shown in Figure 9-37. The Contact Input Terminal board (TBCI) accepts 24 dry contact inputs, and two boards are required to support 48 inputs. The Relay Output Terminal board (TRLY) controls 12 relays and is described in the next section. VCRC is a single slot version of VCCC with the same functionality. Contact input cables plug into the front of the board, as discussed in the VCRC section.
VME Rack J1 VCCC Board J2 J2 VCCC Daughter Board
Backplane Cable Connectors
J3
J3
Backplane Wiring
J4
J4
Terminal Boards
TB3 JF1 JF2 Power Plugs
JE1 JE2 Power Plugs
JE1 JE2 Power Plugs
TRLY JT1 Relay/ Sol Outputs JS1 12 per board

JA1
Power JG1 Plug

JA1
Power JG1 Plug
JT1 TBCI Contact Inputs JS1 24 per board JR 1
Figure 9-37. Boards and Cabling for Contact Inputs and Relay Outputs, Simplex
The first 24 dry contact inputs are wired to two barrier type blocks on the TBCI, and a second terminal board is required for inputs 25 48. Dc power for the contacts is provided. Contact inputs have noise suppression circuitry to protect against surge and high frequency noise. Cables with molded plugs connect the terminal board to the VME rack where the VCCC processor board is located, as shown in Figure 9-38.
TBCI Contact Input Terminal Board

x
VCCC VME Board

x
12 Contact Inputs
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 JE1 JE2 9 11 13 15 17 19 JS1 21 23
JT1
37-pin "D" shell type connectors with latching fasteners VME Bus to VCMI
RUN FAIL STAT
Cable to VME Rack T
12 Contact Inputs
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 x
Cable to VME Rack S JR1 Cable to VME Rack R Connectors on VME Rack R
VCCC x
J3
J3
Shield Bar J4 Barrier Type Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from board for maintenance J4
To Relay Output Boards
Cable from Second TBCI
Figure 9-38. Contact Input Terminal board, I/O Board, and Cabling
Operation
The VCCC passes the input voltages through optical isolators and transfers the signals over the VME backplane to the VCMI. The VCMI then sends them to the controller. The contact input processing is shown in Figure 9-39. The dry contact inputs are powered from a floating 125 V dc (100 145 V dc) supply from the turbine control. Power converters convert the 115/230 V ac and/or 125 V dc power sources to a redundant, internal 125 V dc bus to power the electronics. The 125 V dc bus is current limited in the Power Distribution Module prior to feeding each contact input.
Terminal Board TBCI JE1 (+) Floating (-) JE2 (+) (-)
Noise Suppression N S
<R> Rack Contact Input Board VCCC
From Power Distribution Module <PDM> 125 Vdc Power Source
Gate
Total of 48 circuits JR1 J3
Gate
P5
Gate Gate
(+) (-)
Ref. ID
Field Contact
(+) (-)
N S
Gate Gate
Field Contact
(+) (-)
N S
BCOM
Optical Isolation J4
Gate
Field Contact
(+) (-)
N S
Field Contact
(+) (-)
N S
Field Contact
(+) (-)
N S
Field Contact
BCOM
Contact Inputs from Second TBCI Terminal Board 24 Contact Inputs per Terminal Board Figure 9-39. Contact Input Processing, Simplex
A pair of termination points is provided for each input with one point (screw) providing the positive dc source and the second point providing the return (input) to the board. The current loading is 2.5 mA per point for 21 of the inputs on each terminal board, and the other three have a 10 mA load to support interface with remote solid-state output electronics.
Each input is optically isolated and sampled at frame rate for control functions, and at 1ms for sequence of events (SOE) reporting. A 4 ms hardware filter is used, and noise rejection is 60 V rms at 125 V dc excitation. Contact input circuitry is designed for NEMA Class G creepage and clearance. For TMR applications contact input voltages are fanned out to three VME board racks R, S, and T via plugs JR1, JS1, and JT1, as shown in Figure 9-40. The signals are processed by the three VCCC and the results voted by the VCMI board in each controller rack.
<T> <S> <R>
Terminal Board TBCI JE1 (+) Floating (-) JE2 (+) (-)
(+) (-)
Noise Suppression N S
VME Racks
Contact Input Board VCCC Shown for <R>
From Power Distribution Module <PDM> 125 V dc Power Source
Gate
Total of 48 circuits JR1 J3
Gate
P5
Gate Gate
Field Contact (+) (-) Field Contact (+) (-) Field Contact (+) (-) Field Contact (+) (-) Field Contact (+) (-) Field Contact
ID
BCOM
Ref.
Gate Gate
N S
JS1
J3 Optical Isolation
Gate
N S
ID
BCOM
JT1
N S
J3 J4
N S
ID
BCOM
From Second TBCI
N S
BCOM
24 Contact Inputs per Terminal Board. Each contact input terminates on one point and is fanned to <R>, <S>, and <T> Figure 9-40. Contact Input Processing, TMR
Features
Sequence of Events
High speed scanning and recording at 1 ms rate is available for inputs monitoring important turbine variables. The sequence of events recorder reports all contact openings and closures with a time resolution of 1 ms. Contact chatter and pulse widths down to 6 ms are reported.
Noise Filtering
Filters reduce high frequency noise and suppress surge on each input near the point of signal exit. Noise and contact bounce is filtered with a 4 ms filter. AC voltage rejection (50/60 Hz) is 60 V rms with 125 V dc excitation.
Front panel
Three LEDs at the top of the VCCC front panel provide status information. The normal RUN condition is a flashing green, FAIL is a solid red. The third LED is normally off but shows a steady orange if a diagnostic alarm condition exists in the board.
Specification
Table 9-20. VCCC Specification Item Number of Channels Excitation Voltage Input Current Specification 48 dry contact voltage input channels (24 per terminal board) Nominal 125 V dc, floating, ranging from 100 to 145 V dc For 125 V dc applications: First 21 circuits draw 2.5 mA (50 kohms) Last three circuits draw 10 mA (12.5 kohms) Optical Isolation to 1500 volts on all inputs Hardware filter, 4 ms 60 V rms @ 50/60 Hz at 125 V dc excitation System dependent scan rate for control purposes 1,000 Hz scan rate for Sequence of Events monitoring 20.6 watts on the terminal board NA watts in the VCCC board Loss of contact input excitation voltage Non-responding contact input in test mode Unplugged cable
Isolation Input Filter AC Voltage Rejection Frame Rate Power consumption Fault detection
Like all I/O boards, the VCCC is configured using the toolbox. This software usually runs on a data-highway connected CIMPLICITY station or workstation. Table 9-21 summarizes configuration choices and defaults. Refer to GEH-6403, Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Turbine Controller.
Table 9-21. Typical VCCC (Contact Input) Configuration Parameter Configuration System Limits J3A:IS200TBCIH1A Contact01 Contact Input Signal Invert Sequence of Events Signal Filter J4A:IS200TBCIH1A Contact01 Card Points Signals L3DIAG_VCCC1 L3DIAG_VCCC2 L3DIAG_VCCC3 Enable all System Limit Checking Terminal board connected to VCCC from J3 First contact of 24 on first terminal board Card Point Select contact input Inversion makes signal true if contact open Select input for sequence of events scanning Contact Input Filter in msec Terminal board connected to VCCC from J4 First contact of 24 on second terminal board Card Point Description-Enter Signal Connection Name Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic (For relay output points, see TRLY) Enable, Disable Connected, Not Connected Point Edit (Input BIT) Description Choices
Used, Unused Normal, Invert Enable, Disable 0, 10, 20, 50 Connected, Not Connected Point Edit (Input BIT) Type BIT BIT BIT
Direction Input Input Input
Diagnostics
The dry (isolated) external contacts are monitored, and also the excitation voltage. If the excitation drops to below 40% of the nominal voltage, a diagnostic alarm is set and latched. All inputs associated with this TB are forced to the open contact (fail safe) state. Any input that fails the diagnostic test is forced to the failsafe state. If any one of the 48 inputs goes unhealthy a composite diagnostic alarm, L3DIAG_VCCC occurs. Details of the individual diagnostics are available from the toolbox. The diagnostic signals can be individually latched, and then reset with the RESET_DIA signal if they go healthy. Each terminal board connector has its own ID device which is interrogated by the I/O board. The board ID is coded into a read-only chip containing the board serial number, board type, revision number, and the JR1/JS1/JT1 connector location. Refer to GEH-6421C, Vol. I Mark VI System Guide, Chapter 8, Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Installation
The 24 dry contact inputs are wired directly to two I/O terminal blocks mounted on the terminal board. Each block is held down with two screws and has 24 terminals accepting up to #12 AWG wires. A shield termination strip attached to chassis ground is located immediately to the left of each terminal block. The 125 V dc excitation voltage is cabled in through plugs JE1 and JE2, as shown in Figure 9-41.
Contact Input Terminal Board TBCI
1 JT1
Input 1 (Return) Input 2 (Return) Input 3 (Return) Input 4 (Return) Input 5 (Return) Input 6 (Return) Input 7 (Return) Input 8 (Return) Input 9 (Return) Input 10(Return) Input 11(Return) Input 12(Return)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
3 3 Input 1 (Positive) JE1 JE2 Input 2 (Positive) Input 3 (Positive) Contact Excitation Input 4 (Positive) Source, 125 Vdc Input 5 (Positive) Input 6 (Positive) Input 7 (Positive) Input 8 (Positive) Input 9 (Positive) Input 10 (Positive) Input 11 (Positive) Input 12 (Positive)
To Rack T JS1
Input 13 (Return) Input 14 (Return) Input 15 (Return) Input 16 (Return) Input 17 (Return) Input 18 (Return) Input 19 (Return) Input 20 (Return) Input 21 (Return) Input 22 (Return) Input 23 (Return) Input 24 (Return)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
(Positive) (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) (Positive) (Positive)
To Rack S JR1
Inputs 22, 23, 24 are 10 mA, all others are 2.5 mA
To Rack R Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from terminal board for maintenance Up to two #12 AWG wires per point with 300 volt insulation Figure 9-41. TBCI Terminal Board Wiring
VCCC/TICI - Isolated Digital Inputs

The Isolated Digital Input terminal board (TICI) is an input board which works with VCCC (but not VCRC) in a similar way to TBCI. TICI provides voltage detection circuits to detect a range of voltages across relay contacts, fuses, and switches, as shown in Figure 9-42.
Features
The TICI is similar to the TBCI, except for the following items: TICI input voltage ranges are: 70 145 V dc, nominal 125 V dc, with a detection threshold of 39 to 61 V dc 200 250 V dc, nominal 250 V dc, with a detection threshold of 39 to 61 V dc 90 132 V rms, nominal 115 V rms, 47-63 Hz, with a detection threshold of 35 to 76 V ac 190 264 V rms, nominal 230 V rms, 47-63 Hz, with a detection threshold of 35 to 76 V ac Input hardware filtering is provided using time delays of 15 msec, nominal: For dc applications the time delay is 15 8 msec For ac applications the time delay is 15 13 msec In addition to hardware filters, the contact input state is software filtered using configurable time delays, selected from 0, 10, 20, 50, and 100 msec. For ac inputs, a filter of at least 10 ms is recommended.
TICI Terminal Board Auto Run Customer's Load/Motor Voltage Sensing Circuit
V ac Supply
Figure 9-42. TICI Sensing Available Control Voltage Across Device
The following restrictions should be noted regarding creepage and clearance on the 230 V rms application: For NEMA requirements: 230 V single-phase For CE Mark: 230 V single or 3-phase
Refer to the section Contact Inputs TBCI for information on monitoring dry (isolated) contact inputs, and on the VCCC board.
DTCI - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Contact Input Terminal Board

VCRC is a single-width board and is preferred to VCCC. The DTCI board is a compact contact input terminal board, designed for DIN-rail mounting. The DTCI board has 24 contact inputs with a nominal excitation of 24 V dc, and connects to the VCRC processor board with a single 37-pin cable, as shown in Figure 9-43. This cable is identical to those used on the larger TBCI terminal board. The terminal boards can be stacked vertically on a DIN-rail to conserve cabinet space. Two DTCI boards can be connected to the VCRC for a total of 48 contact inputs. Only a Simplex version of this board is available. The function and on-board signal conditioning are the same as those on TBCI, except they are scaled for 24 V dc. High density Euro Block type terminal blocks are permanently mounted to the board with two screw connections for the ground connection (SCOM). The input excitation range is 18 to 32 V dc, and the threshold voltage is 50% of the excitation voltage. The ac voltage rejection is 12 V rms. Contact inputs take 2.5 mA nominal current on the first 21 circuits, and 10 mA on circuits 22 through 24.
DTCI Board 49 52 24 V dc Excitation Power Source 50 53 51 54 (+) (-) (+) (-) (+) (-) ID JR1 J3 Total of 48 circuits P5 <R> Rack Contact Input Board VCRC
Gate Gate Gate Gate

Reference
Noise SuppInput 1 Positive 1 ression N Input 1 Return 2 S Input 2 Positive
Gate Gate Gate
Input 2 Return 4 Input 3 Positive
N S
Optical Isolation J4
Input 3 Return 6 Input 4 Positive
N S
Input 4 Return 8
N S
. . . .
Input 24 Positive 47
. . . .
N Input 24 Return 48 S SCOM
Contact Inputs from Second DTCI Terminal Board 24 Contact Inputs per Terminal Board
Field Contacts (24)
BCOM
Figure 9-43. DTCI Board
Installation
There is no shield termination strip with this design. The DTCI board slides into a plastic holder, which mounts on the DIN-rail. The contact inputs are wired directly to the terminal block as shown in Figure 9-44. The Euro Block type terminal block has 60 terminals and is permanently mounted on the terminal board. Typically #18 AWG wires are used. There are two screws for the SCOM (ground) connection, which should be as short a distance as possible, and six screws for the 24 V dc excitation power.
DTCI Board Screw Connections Input 1 (Return) Input 2 (Return) Input 3 (Return) Input 4 (Return) Input 5 (Return) Input 6 (Return) Input 7 (Return Input 8 (Return) JR1 Input 9 (Return) Input 10 (Return) Input 11 (Return) Input 12 (Return) Input 13 (Return) Input 14 (Return) Input 15 (Return) Input 16 (Return) Input 17 (Return) Input 18 (Return) Input 19 (Return) Input 20 (Return) Input 21 (Return) Input 22 (Return) Input 23 (Return) Input 24 (Return) Excitation (Positive) Excitation (Negative) Excitation (Negative) Chassis Ground
SCOM
Cable to J3 or J4 connector in I/O rack for VCRC board
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59
Input 1 (Positive) Input 2 (Positive) Input 3 (Positive) Input 4 (Positive) Input 5 (Positive) Input 6 (Positive) Input 7 (Positive) Input 8 (Positive) Input 9 (Positive) Input 10 (Positive) Input 11 (Positive) Input 12 (Positive) Input 13 (Positive) Input 14 (Positive) Input 15 (Positive) Input 16 (Positive) Input 17 (Positive) Input 18 (Positive) Input 19 (Positive) Input 20 (Positive) Input 21 (Positive) Input 22 (Positive) Input 23 (Positive) Input 24 (Positive) Excitation (Positive) Excitation (Positive) Excitation (Negative) Chassis Ground
Contact Excitation 24 V dc DIN-rail mounting
Euro Block type terminal block Plastic mounting holder
Figure 9-44. DTCI Wiring and Cabling
VCCC/TRLYH1B - Relay Outputs

The Contact Input/Relay Output Board (VCCC), with its associated daughter board, controls 24 relay/solenoid outputs. VCCC is a double-width module and connects to two sets of J3/J4 plugs via the VME backplane as shown in Figure 9-45 below. The main board controls 12 relays via the Relay Output Terminal board (TRLY). Two TRLY boards are required for a total of 24 relays. VCRC is a single slot version of VCCC with the same functionality (except driving TICI). Relay output cables plug into J3 and J4, as discussed in the VCRC section.
VME Rack J1 VCCC Board J2 J2 VCCC Daughter Board
Backplane Cable Connectors
J3
J3
Backplane Wiring
J4
J4
Terminal Boards
JE1 JE2 Power Plugs
JE1 JE2 Power Plugs

JA1
Power JG1 Plug

JA1
Power JG1 Plug
Figure 9-45. Cabling for Contact Inputs and Relay Outputs, Simplex
TRLY holds twelve plug-in magnetic relays. A second board is required for output relays 13-24. Cables with molded fittings connect the terminal board to the VME rack where the VCCC processor board is located, as shown in Figure 9-46. Plug JA1 connnects to J3/4 on Simplex systems, and plugs JR1, JS1, and JT1 are used for TMR systems.
Relay Output Terminal Board TRLY
Solenoid Power X JT1 Cable to VME Rack T
VME Board VCCC x

RUN FAIL STAT
x
TB3
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
JF1 JF2
Fuses JS1
VME Bus to VCMI
Cable to VME Rack S

26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
Output Relays JA1 JR1 Cable to VME Rack R
Daughter Board
VCCC x
J3
J3
Solenoid Power Cables to Relay Output Terminal Boards To Second TRLY J4 J4
To Contact Input Board
Figure 9-46. Relay Output Terminal board, I/O Board, and Cabling
Operation
For Simplex operation, cables carry control signals plus monitor feedback voltages between VCCC to TRLY through JA1. Relay drivers, fuses, and jumpers are mounted on the relay board. The first six relay circuits can be jumper configured for either dry, Form-C contact outputs, or to drive external solenoids. A standard 125 V dc or 115 V ac source, or an optional 24 V dc source, with on-board suppression can be provided for solenoid power. This comes in on JF1 (or TB), as shown in Figure 9-47. The next five relays (7 11) are unpowered isolated Form-C contacts. Output 12 is an isolated Form-C contact, used for ignition transformers, for example.
Relay Terminal Board - TRLYH1B Alternate Power, 20 A 24 V dc or 125 V dc or 115 V ac or 240 V ac Normal Power Source,pluggable (7 Amp) Power Daisy-Chain <R> VCCC Relay J3/4 Output JR1 TB3
1 2 3 4
Dry P125/24 V dc FU7 JP1
Output 01 NC 1 K1 Com 2 NO 3
JF1 1
3
N125/24 Vdc
FU1
K1
K1
3.15 Amp slow-blow

Monitor >14 Vdc >60 Vac
Sol 4 "6" of the above circuits Output 07 NC K7 Com

26 25
Field Solenoid
+ -
JF2
1 3
JA1 Monitor Select
NO
27 K7 K7 "5" of these circuits
Dry Contact, Form-C
<R>
P28V
Relay Driver
Coil K#
ID
JS1
RD Output 12 NC K12 Com

46 45
ID
JT1
"12" of the above circuits
Special Circuit
NO
ID
Available for GT Ignition Transformers (6 Amp at 120 Vac 3 Amp at 240 Vac)
K12 K12 Sol "1" of these circuits
47
JG1 1 3 48
Figure 9-47. Relay Output Board, Simplex
For TMR applications, relay control signals are fanned into TRLY from the three VME board racks R, S, and T through plugs JR1, JS1, and JT1. These signals are voted and the result controls the corresponding relay driver. Power for the relay coils comes in from all three racks and is diode shared, as shown in Figure 9-48.
Relay Terminal Board - TRLYH1B
Output 01 NC 1 K1 Com 2
Alternate Power, 20 A 24 V dc or 125 V dc or 115 V ac or 240 V ac Normal Power Source,pluggable (7 Amp) Power Daisy-Chain <S> <R> VCCC J3/4 Relay Output <T>
TB3
1 2 3 4
Dry P125/24 V dc FU7 JP1
NO 3 FU1 K1 K1 Field Solenoid + -
JF1 1
3
N125/24 Vdc
3.15 Amp slow-blow
Sol 4 "6" of the above circuits Output 07 NC K7 Com

26 25
JF2
1 3
JA1 Monitor Select
NO
27 K7 K7 "5" of these circuits
Dry Contact, Form-C
JR1
P28V
Relay Driver
Coil
K#
<R> J3/4 Same for <S>
ID
JS1
RD Output 12 NC K12 Com

46 45
ID
J3/4 Same for <T>
JT1
Special Circuit
NO
ID
K12 K12 Sol "1" of these circuits
47
JG1 1 3 48
Figure 9-48. Relay Output Board, TMR
Features
Relays are driven at the frame rate. For system powered solenoids, the excitation voltage is monitored and an alarm is latched if this voltage drops below 12 V dc. Each relay coil current is also monitored and if it does not agree with the control signal an alarm is latched.
Relay Characteristics
Relays have a 3.0 Amp rating. The rated contact to contact voltage is 500 V ac for one minute, and the rated coil to contact voltage is 1,500 V ac for one minute. The typical time to operate is 10 ms.
Failsafe Outputs
The relay outputs have failsafe features so that when a cable is unplugged, the inputs vote to de-energize the corresponding relays. Similarly, if communication with the associated VME board is lost, the relays de-energize.
Front panel
Three LEDs at the top of the VCCC front panel provide status information. The normal RUN condition is a flashing green, FAIL is a solid red. The third LED is normally off but shows a steady orange if a diagnostic alarm condition exists in the board.
Diagnostics
The output of each relay (coil current) is monitored and checked against the command, at the frame rate. If there is no agreement for two consecutive checks, an alarm is latched. The solenoid excitation voltage is monitored downstream of the fuses and an alarm is latched if it falls below 12 Volts (ac or dc). If any one of the 12 outputs goes unhealthy a composite diagnostic alarm, L3DIAG_VCCC occurs. Details of the individual diagnostics are available from the toolbox. The diagnostic signals can be individually latched, and then reset with the RESET_DIA signal if they go healthy. Each of the three terminal board connectors have their own ID device which is interrogated by the I/O board. The board ID is coded into a read-only chip containing the board serial number, board type, revision number, and the JR1/JS1/JT1 connector location.
Specification
Table 9-21. VCCC Relay Output Specification Item Number of Relay Channels on one TRLY board Specification 12 relays: 6 relays with optional solenoid driver voltages 5 relays with dry contacts only 1 relay with 7 Amp rating VCCC total is 24 relays on two TRLY boards a: b: a: b: c: Nominal 125 V dc or 24 V dc Nominal 120 V ac or 240 V ac 0.6 Amp for 125 V dc operation 3.0 Amp for 24 V dc operation; 3.0 Amp for 120/240 V ac, 50/60 Hz operation
Rated Voltage on Relays Max Load Current
Max response Time On Max response Time Off Contact Material Contact Life
25 ms typical 25 ms typical Silver cad-oxide Electrical operations: Mechanical operations: 100,000 10,000,000
Fault detection
Loss of relay solenoid excitation current or coil current disagreement with command. Unplugged cable or loss of communication with VME board. Relays deenergize if communication with associated VME board is lost.
Like all I/O boards, the VCCC module is configured using the Control System Toolbox. This software usually runs on a data-highway connected CIMPLICITY station or workstation. Table 9-22 summarizes the configuration choices and defaults. Refer to GEH-6403, Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Turbine Controller.
Table 9-22. Typical VCCC Relay Configuration Parameter Configuration System Limits J3:IC200TRLYH1B Relay01 Relay Output FuseDiag Relay01Fdbk Contact Input Signal Invert Signal Filter J4:IC200TRLYH1B Relay01 Relay01Fdbk Card Points Signals L3DIAG_VCCC1 L3DIAG_VCCC2 L3DIAG_VCCC3 Select System Limits Terminal board 1 connected to VCCC via J3 Enable, Disable Connected, Not Connected (Output BIT) Description Choices
First Relay Output (from first set of 12 relays) - Card Point Edit Point Select Relay Output Enable fuse diagnostic Relay 01 Contact Voltage (first set of 12 relays) Card Point Configurable Item:slot# Inversion makes Signal True if contact is open Contact Input filter in msec Terminal board 2 connected to VCCC via J4 Relay Output 1 (second set of 12 relays) - Card Point Relay 1 Contact Voltage (second set of 12 relays) - Card Point Description- Enter Signal Connection Name Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic
Used, Unused Enable, Disable Point Edit (Input BIT)
Used, Unused Normal, Invert 0, 10, 20, 50 Connected, not connected Point Edit Point Edit (Output BIT) (Input BIT) Type BIT BIT BIT
For VCCC contact input points, see TBCI section.
Installation
The customers 12 relay outputs are wired directly to two I/O terminal blocks mounted on the terminal board as shown in Figure 9-49. Each block is held down with two screws and has 24 terminals accepting up to #12 AWG wires.
A shield termination strip attached to chassis ground is located immediately to the left of each terminal block. Solenoid power for outputs 16 is plugged to JF1 normally. JF2 can be used to daisy-chain power to other TRLYs. Alternatively customer power may be wired directly into TB3 when power is not plugged into JF1/JF2. JG1 provides power to customers special solenoid, Output 12. Jumpers JP1JP6 are removed in the factory and shipped in a plastic bag. Reinstall the appropriate jumper if power to a field solenoid is required. These jumpers (JP16) are for isolation of the monitor circuit when used on isolated contact applications. The fuses should also be removed for this application to ensure that suppression leakage is removed from the power bus.
Alternative Customer Power Wiring Power Return TB3 N125/24 Vdc P125/24 Vdc JF1 x 4
3
x
Power Source
JF2 1 1
Relay Output Terminal Board TRLYH1B
x 1
x 2
x 3
Powered, Fused Solenoids Form-C
Output 01 (COM) Output 01 (SOL) Output 02 (COM) Output 02 (SOL) Output 03 (COM) Output 03 (SOL) Output 04 (COM) Output 04 (SOL) Output 05 (COM) Output 05 (SOL) Output 06 (COM) Output 06 (SOL)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
Output 01 (NC) Output 01 (NO) Output 02 (NC) Output 02 (NO) Output 03 (NC) Output 03 (NO) Output 04 (NC) Output 04 (NO) Output 05 (NC) Output 05 (NO) Output 06 (NC) Output 06 (NO)
Relays FU1 Out 01 -
+ FU7 +
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 To Connectors JA1, JR1, JS1, JT1
FU2 Out 02 FU8 + FU3 Out 03 FU9 + FU4 Out 04 FU10 + FU5 Out 05 FU11 + FU6 Out 06 FU12 Fuses Fuses Neg,return Pos, High -
Output 07 (COM) Dry Contacts Form-C Output 08 (COM) Output 09 (COM) Output 10 (COM) Special Circuit, Form-C, Ign. Xfmr. Output 11 (COM) Output 12 (COM) Output 12 (SOL)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
Jumper Choices: Power (JPx) or Dry Contact (Dry)
To Connectors JA1, JR1, JS1, JT1
Power to Special Circuit 12 JG1 1 2 3 4 Customer Return Customer Power
JF1, JF2, and JG1 are Power Plugs Figure 9-49. TRLY Terminal Board Wiring
VCCC/TRLYH1C - Relay Outputs with Voltage Sensing

Relay contact voltage detection is available with the optional TRLYH1C relay terminal board. TRLYH1C is driven by VCCC (or VCRC) in the same way as TRLY, and has the same 12 output relays. Voltage sensing is done with 24 small voltage monitor boards as shown in Figure 9-50. Individual voltage monitors can be isolated by removing a jumper.
Features
TRLYH1C is the same as the standard TRLY board except for the following: Six jumpers for converting the solenoid outputs to dry contact type are removed. These jumpers were associated with the fuse monitoring. Input relay coil monitoring is removed from the 12 relays. Relay contact voltage monitoring is added to the 12 relays. Individual monitoring circuits have voltage suppression, and can be isolated by removing their associated jumper. High frequency snubbers are installed across the NO and Sol terminals on the six solenoid driver circuits and on the special circuit, output 12. 16-32 V dc, nominal 24 V dc 70-145 V dc, nominal 125 V dc 90-132 V rms, nominal 115 V rms, 47-63 Hz 190-264 V rms, nominal 230 V rms, 47-63 Hz 24 V dc applications: 125 V dc applications: 10 to 16 V dc 40 to 65 V dc
The contact voltage ranges for the monitors are as follows:
The threshold voltage ranges for the monitors are as follows:
115/230 V ac applications: 45 to 72 V ac
The contact input state is software filtered using time delays.
Relay Terminal Board - TRLYH1C
Output 01 NC 1 K1 Com 2 NO 3
Alternate Power, 20 A 24 V dc or 125 V dc or 115 V ac or 240 V ac Normal Power Source,pluggable (7 Amp) Power Daisy-Chain <S> <R> VCCC J3/4 Relay Output <T>
TB3
1 2 3 4
P125/24 V dc
FU7
JF1 1
3
N125/24 Vdc
FU1
"6" of these circuits
K1
K1
Snub
Field Solenoid
+ -
3.15 Amp slow-blow
Sol JP1
Output 07
JF2
1 3
NC K7
25
JA1 Monitor Select
Com
Dry 26 Contact Form-C NO

27
K7 K7 JP7 JR1 P28V

K#
Coil <R> J3/4 Same for <S>

ID ID
Relay Driver
JS1
RD
JP12 K12 Com
46 Output 12
NC
45
J3/4 Same for <T>
JT1
Special Circuit
NO
ID
K12 K12
Snub
47
JG1 1 3
Sol 48
Figure 9-50. Relay Output Board with Contact Voltage Sensing
Installation
TRLYH1C wiring is the same as for TRLY, but the jumpers are different. It is not possible to jumper convert the solenoid driver circuits to isolated output contacts, but the two fuses can be removed for this purpose. Twelve jumpers are available to isolate the contact voltage monitors. The default is jumper in place, and isolation is by removing the jumper. The board is shown in Figure 9-51.
Alternative Customer Power Wiring
Power Return TB3
N125/24 Vdc P125/24 Vdc JF1 x 4 3

3
Power Source
JF2 1 1
Relay Output Terminal Board TRLYH1C (Contact Voltage Sensing)

x
x 1
x 2
x 3
Powered, Fused Solenoids Form-C
Output 01 (COM) Output 01 (SOL) Output 02 (COM) Output 02 (SOL) Output 03 (COM) Output 03 (SOL) Output 04 (COM) Output 04 (SOL) Output 05 (COM) Output 05 (SOL) Output 06 (COM) Output 06 (SOL)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
FU1 FU2 FU3 FU4 FU5 -
Out 01 Out 02 Out 03 Out 04 Out 05
+ FU7 + FU8 + FU9 + FU10 + FU11
JP1 Solenoid JP2 Solenoid JP3 Solenoid JP4 Solenoid
Output 07 (COM) Dry Contacts Form-C Output 08 (COM) Output 09 (COM) Output 10 (COM) Special Circuit, Form-C, Ign. Xfmr. Output 11 (COM) Output 12 (COM) Output 12 (SOL)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
JP5 Solenoid + FU6 Out 06 FU12 JP6 Solenoid Fuses Fuses Neg,Return Pos,High Cable JP7 Dry Contact Connectors JA1, JR1, JP8 JS1, JT1 Dry Contact Relays Power to Circuit 12 JG1 JP10 Customer Dry Contact 1 Power 2 JP11
Dry Contact Dry Contact
JP9
3 4
JP12
Special Circuit
Customer Return
Figure 9-51. TRLYH1C (Voltage Sensing) Terminal Board Wiring
VCRC - Contact Input/Relay Output Board

The VCRC board has the same functionality as the VCCC board but takes up only one VME slot. The VCCC daughter board is not required, and two front panel connectors, J33 and J44, accept the contact inputs from the TBCI boards. Relay outputs on TRLY use the J3 and J4 ports on the VME rack, as shown in Figure 9-52. VCRC does not support the TICI contact voltage sensing board.
VCRC Single Width Front Panel
P1
P2 J33
37
J44
37
J3
VME backplane wiring
J4
Terminal Boards JT1 TBCI Contact Inputs 24 per JS1 board JR1 JT1 TBCI Contact Inputs 24 per JS1 board JR1 JT1 TRLY Relay/Sol Outputs 12 per JS1 board JA1 JT1 TRLY Relay/Sol Outputs 12 per JS1 board JA1
Figure 9-52. VCRC with Boards and Cabling to Contact Inputs and Relay Outputs
The VCRC firmware, configuration, and specifications are the same as for the VCCC board. Cabling to TBCI is shown in Figure 9-53.
TBCI Contact Input Terminal Board

x
VCRC VME Board

x RUN FAIL STAT
12 Contact Inputs
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
JT1 1 3 5 7 JE1 JE2 9 11 13 15 17 19 JS1 21 23
VME Bus to VCMI
Cable to VME Rack T
J33
12Contact Inputs
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 x
Cable to VME Rack S JR1

VCRC x
J44
Cable to VME Rack R Connectors on VME Rack R
J3
Shield Bar BarrierType Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from board for maintenance
J4
Cable from Second TBCI
To Relay Output Boards
Figure 9-53. VCRC with Contact Input Board and Cabling
DRLYH1A and DRLYH1B - Simplex Wall Mounted Relay Output Terminal Boards
VCRC is a single-width board and is preferred to the VCCC. There are two versions of the DRLY terminal board, IS200DRLYH1A and IS200DRLYH1B. The IS200DRLYH1B is certified by UL to UL-1604 Class 1, Groups A and B, Temperature Class T4, Division 2. This certification is commonly referred to as Class 1 Div. 2. The DRLYH1A has high powered relay contacts than DRLYH1B. Certification under UL-1604 Class 1, Groups A and B, Temperature Class T4, Division 2 certifies the following: That the DSVO can operate in hazardous locations where acetylene and hydrogen (groups A and B) may be present (class 1), but not likely to exist under normal operating conditions (division 2). That no part on the board will exceed 135 C with the terminal board ambient temperature at its maximum 65 C (temperature class T4).
Note Turbine fuel is not specifically addressed by UL-1604, but UL equates turbine fuel to the acetylene and hydrogen groups (A and B) in terms of volatility and flammability. The DRLY board is a compact relay output terminal board, designed for wall mounting (not DIN-rail mounting). The board has 12 output relays, each with one Form-C contact, and connects to the VCRC processor board with a single 37-pin cable, as shown in Figure 9-54. The 37-pin cable is identical to those used on the larger TRLY terminal board. Two DRLY boards can be connected to the VCRC for a total of 24 contact outputs. Only a Simplex version of this board is available. Solenoid source power is not included, and there is one set of dry contacts per relay, (there are two NO contacts in series). The relay outputs meet NEMA Class B 300 V creepage and clearance. Unlike TRLY, there is no on-board suppression, and no relay state monitoring. Table 9-23A lists the output ratings for the DRLYH1A board and Table 9-23B lists the output ratings for the DRLYH1B board. The DRLYH1A is designed for general purpose use and has ratings covering most applications, whereas the DRLYH1B relay is sealed and has smaller contacts for Class 1 Div. 2 applications. An on-board ID chip identifies the board to the VCRC for system diagnostic purposes
DRLY Board JR1 From J3 or J4 on I/O rack, from VCRC board P28V P28 OK Relay Driver LED COIL 3 COM 5 TB2 1 2
SCOM
TB1 1 NC Output 1 of 12 Dry Contact Outputs
NO
RD
ID
12 of the above circuits
Figure 9-54. Wall Mounted DRLY Board
Table 9-23A. DRLYH1A Output Specifications Application Environment General Requirements 28 V dc 125 V dc Conditions 0 65 C ambient Safety, electrical, environmental, packaging Resistive load Inductive load without suppression Resistive load Inductive load without suppression Inductive load, MOV suppression across load, 2 contacts used in series on the same relay Resistive load Inductive load without suppression Motor load Resistive load Inductive load without suppression Motor load Operate Release Output Specification General purpose See GEH-6421C, Vol. I Mark VI System Guide Chapter 4, Codes and Standards 10 A 2 A, L/R = 7 ms 0.5 A 0.2 A, L/R = 7 ms 0.65 A, L/R = 150 ms
120 V ac
10 A 2 A, 10 A inrush, PF = 0.4 1/3 Hp 3A 2 A, 10 A inrush, PF = 0.4 1/2 Hp 15 ms typical 10 ms typical
240 V ac
Response Time
Table 9-23B. DRLYH1B Output Specifications Application Environment General Requirements 28 V dc 125 V dc 120 V ac 240 V ac Maximum switching voltage Maximum operating current Maximum switching capacity Response Time Conditions 0 65 C ambient Safety, electrical, environmental, packaging Resistive load Resistive load Resistive load Resistive load Dc, resistive load Ac, resistive load Dc, resistive load Ac, resistive load Dc, resistive load Ac, resistive load Operate Release Output Specification Class 1, Div. 2 See GEH-6421C, Vol. I Mark VI System Guide Chapter 4, Codes and Standards 2A 0.5 A 1A 0.5 A 220 V dc 250 V rms 2 A dc 2 A rms 60 watts 125 VA 3 ms typical 2 ms typical
Installation
There is no shield termination strip with this design. The DRLY board is supported on a metal plate, which can be wall mounted with four screws. The 12 relay outputs are wired directly to the odd-numbered screws on the terminal blocks as shown in Figure 9-55. The high-density Euro Block type terminal blocks can be plugged into the numbered receptacles on the board. There are two separate screws on TB2 for the SCOM (chassis ground) connection, which should be as short a distance as possible.
DRLY Board Screw Connections Output 1 (NC) Output 1 (COM) Output 1 (NO) Output 2 (NC) Output 2 (COM) Output 2 (NO) Output 3 (NC) Output 3 (COM) Output 3 (NO) Output 4 (NC) Output 4 (COM) Output 4 (NO) Output 5 (NC) Output 5 (COM) Output 5 (NO) Output 6 (NC) Output 6 (COM) Output 6 (NO) 1 TB1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 1 2 TB2 SCOM K7 K1 K8 K2 K9 K3 K10 K4 K11 K5 K12 K6 JR1 P28 OK LED 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 Screw Connections Output 7 (NC) Output 7 (COM) Output 7 (NO) Output 8 (NC) Output 8 (COM) Output 8 (NO) Output 9 (NC) Output 9 (COM) Output 9 (NO) Output 10 (NC) Output 10 (COM) Output 10 (NO) Output 11 (NC) Output 11 (COM) Output 11 (NO) Output 12 (NC) Output 12 (COM) Output 12 (NO)
Cable from J3 or J4 on I/O rack, from VCRC board
LED relay state indicator 37-pin "D" shell connector Figure 9-55. DRLY Wiring and Cabling
Mounting Holes
VSVO/TSVO - Servo/LVDT
The Servo Board (VSVO) controls four electrohydraulic servo valves that actuate the steam/fuel valves. These four channels are divided between two TSVO terminal boards. Valve position is measured with linear variable differential transformers (LVDT). Three cables to VSVO use the J5 plug on the front of the board and the J3/4 connectors on the VME rack, as shown in Figure 9-56. TSVO provides simplex signals via the JR1 connector, and fans out TMR signals to the JR, JS, and JT connectors. Plugs JD1 or JD2 are for an external trip from the protection module.
TSVO Terminal Board External trip
VSVO VME Board

x RUN FAIL STAT
x
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
JT1
JD1 JD2
37-pin "D" shell type connectors with latching fasteners VME Bus to VCMI
JT5 JS1
Cables to VME Rack T
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
JS5 JR1 JR5
Cables to VME Rack S
J5
VSVO x
J3
x
Connectors on VME Rack R Cables to VME Rack R
J4
From Second TSVO Figure 9-56. Servo/LVDT Terminal Board, Processor Board, and Cabling
Operation
The servo board provides four channels consisting of bi-directional servo current outputs, LVDT position feedback, LVDT excitation, and pulse rate flow inputs. The TSVO provides excitation for, and accepts inputs from, up to six LVDT valve position inputs. There is a choice of one, two, three, or four LVDTs for each servo control loop. If three inputs are used they are voted in a median selector. Two pulse rate inputs are available for gas turbine flow measuring applications, and these signals come through TSVO and go directly to the VSVO board front at J5. These inputs are shown in Figure 9-57, and the outputs in Figure 9-58. Each servo output is equipped with an individual suicide relay under firmware control that shorts the VSVO output to signal common when de-energized, and recovers to nominal limits after a manual reset command is issued. Diagnostics monitor the output status of each servo voltage, current, and suicide relay.
Capacity 6 LVDT/R inputs on each of 2 Termination Boards, and total of 2 active/passive magnetic pickups. Termination Board TSVOH1B (Input portion) JR1 LVDT 3.2k Hz, 7 V rms Excitation Source or LVDR
LVDT1H
<R> Control Module Controller Application Software
Servo Board VSVO J3 Digital Regulator
1
SCOM
A/D
P28VR
Regulator Servo
LVDT1L
A/D Converter
D/A D/A Converter

Servo Driver
Voltage Limit
6 Ckts.
P28V
P28V
J3
P24V1 P24VR1
41 42 39 43 44 45 46 40 47 48
(
Current Limit
Configurable Gain
Suicide Relay
Pulse Rate Inputs Active Probes 0 - 12 k Hz
P1TTL
JR5
J5
To Servo Outputs
To TSVO
PR TTL
P1H P1L
Pulse Rate
3.2KHz
Excitation
(PR only available on 1 of 2 TSVOs) Pulse Rate Inputs, Magnetic Pickups 0 - 12 k Hz
CL
P24V2 P24VR2 P2TTL
Connector on front of VSVO board
To Second
TSVO
PR MPU
P2H P2L
Noise Suppr.
Figure 9-57. LVDT and Pulse Rate Inputs, Simplex
Each of the servo output channels can drive either one or two-coil servos in Simplex applications, or two or three-coil servos in TMR applications. The two-coil TMR applications are for 200# oil gear systems where each of two control modules drive one coil each, and the third control module has no servo coil interface. Servo cable lengths up to 300 meters (984 feet) are supported with a maximum two-way cable resistance of 15 ohms. Since there are many types of servo coils, a variety of bidirectional current sources are jumper selectable, as shown in Figure 9-58. The primary and emergency overspeed systems will trip the hydraulic solenoids independent of this circuit Another trip override relay K1 is provided on each terminal board which is driven from the Protection Module. If an emergency overspeed condition is detected in the Protection Module, the K1 relay will energize and disconnect the VSVO servo output from the terminal block and apply a bias to drive the control valve closed. This is only used on Simplex applications to protect against the servo amplifier failing high, and is functional only with respect to the servo coils driven from <R>.
<R> Controller Application Software Terminal Board TSVOH1B (continued)
Servo Board VSVO A/D Converter Digital
Coil Current Range 10,20,40,80,120 ma P28VR JD1 K1 JP1 JD2

25 31
A/D
From LVDT TSVO
Regulator Servo
Regulator
1 2
Trip input from Module(J1)
D/A D/A Converter

Servo Driver
Voltage Limit
P28VR J3 JR1
120B 120 80 40 20 10
1 2
Servo coil from<R>
S1RH S1SH
P28V
Configurable Gain
Suicide Relay
2 Ckts.
N S
26
SCOM
1k ohm
S1RL
22 ohms 89 ohms 1k ohm
J5
Pulse Rate
3.2KHz Excitation 2 Ckts.

To Second TSVO
17 ER1H
N S 18
SCOM
ER1L
Connector on front of VSVO
Noise Suppression
3.2KHz, 7V rms Excitation Source for LVDTs
Figure 9-58. Servo Coil and LVDT Outputs, Simplex (continued)
Only two pulse rate probes on one TSVO are used
In TMR applications the LVDT signals on TSVO fan out to three racks via JR1, JS1, and JT1, as shown in Figure 9-59. These connectors also bring power into TSVO where the three voltages are diode high-selected and current limited to supply 24 V dc to the pulse rate active probes.
<R>
<S> <T> Controller Application Software
Terminal Board TSVOH1B (Input Portion) LVDT 3.2k Hz, 7 V rms Excitation Source
LVDT1H 1
Servo Board VSVO J3 A/D Converter Digital
JR1
P28VR
A/D
JS1
SCOM
Regulator Servo
Regulator
LVDT1L
J3
P28V Same for <S> J3 Same for <T>
D/A D/A Converter

Servo Driver
Voltage Limit
6 Ckts.
P28VS
JT1
P28VT
To Servo Outputs on TSVO
Diode Voltage Select

P24V1 P24VR1
41 42 39 43( 44 45 46 40 47 ( 48
CL P28V
Pulse Rate Inputs Active Probes PR 0 - 12 kHz (PR only available on 1 of 2 TSVOs) Pulse Rate Inputs, Magnetic Pickups 0 - 12 kHz
P1TTL P1H P1L
JR5
Connector on front of VSVO card in <R> J5 Pulse Rate J5 in <S>
Configurable Gain
3.2KHz Excitation
To TSVO
TTL
JS5
CL
P24V2 P24VR2 P2TTL
JT5
J5 in <T>
PR MPU
P2H P2L
Noise Suppression Figure 9-59. LVDT and Pulse Rate Inputs, TMR
For TMR systems, each servo channel has connections to three output coils with a range of current ratings up to 120 mA, selected by jumper, as shown in Figure 9-60.
<R> <S> <T> Controller Application Software Terminal Board TSVOH1B (continued) Servo Current Range 10,20,40,80,120 ma P28VR P28VR J3 JR1 JD1
1 2
Servo Board VSVO A/D Converter
A/D
From TSVO LVDT
Regulator D/A
Digital Servo Regulator Suicide Relay
Trip input from Not Used for TMR
JP1
JD2
1 2 25 31 S1RH
Servo Driver
Voltage Limit
120B 120 80 40 20 10
Servo coil from <R>
2 Ckts.
Configurable Gain
N S
26 S1RL
22 ohms 89 ohms 1k ohm 3.2KHz, 7V rms Excitation Source For LVDTs Servo coil from <S>
J5
Pulse Rate
3.2KHz
17
ER1H
Excitation J3 JS1
2 Ckts S JP2
120B 120 80 40 20 10
N
18 ER1L
Connector on front of VSVO card
27
S1SH
2 Ckts.
N S
28 21
S1SL ESH
1 Ckt. N
S
22
ESL
J3
JT1
120B 120 80 40 20 10
JP3
29 S1TH
3.2KHz, 7V rms Excitation Source Servo coil from <T>
2 Ckts.
N S
30 23
S1TL ETH
N 1 Ckt. S
24
ETL
Noise Suppression
3.2KHz, 7V rms Excitation Source For LVDTs
Figure 9-60. Servo Coil Outputs and LVDT Excitation, TMR
Features
The range of servo coil ratings that can be jumper selected on the terminal board are shown in Table 9-24.
Table 9-24. Servo Coil Ratings Coil Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Nominal Current 10 mA 20 mA 40 mA 40 mA 80 mA 120 mA (A) 120 mA (B) Coil Resistance (Ohms) 1,000 125 62 89 22 40 75 Internal Resistance (Ohms) 180 442 195 195 115 46 10 Application Simplex and TMR Simplex Simplex TMR TMR Simplex TMR
Table 9-24 summarizes the standard servo coil resistance and their associated internal resistance, selectable with the terminal board jumpers shown in Figure 3-36. In addition to these standard servo coils, it is possible to drive non-standard coils by using a non-standard jumper setting. For example, an 80 mA, 125-ohm coil could be driven by using a jumper setting 120B. The total resistance would be equivalent to the standard setting. Regulation of the output current is within 2% of the nominal full scale, when properly configured and loaded for the coil resistance specified in the previous table. Resolution over the full-scale range is 12 bits. Servo coil inductance is not a specified parameter, but it is nominally less than 5 Henries.
Control Valve Position Feedback

Valve position is sensed with either a four wire LVDT or a three-wire linear variable differential reluctance (LVDR). Redundancy implementations for the feedback devices is determined by the application software to allow the maximum flexibility. LVDT/Rs can be mounted up to 300 meters (984 feet) from the turbine control with a maximum two-way cable resistance of 15 ohms. Two LVDT/R excitation sources are located on each terminal board for Simplex applications and another two for TMR applications. Excitation voltage is 7 V rms and the frequency is 3.2 kHz with a total harmonic distortion of less than 1% when loaded. The excitation source is isolated from signal common (floating), and is capable of operation at common mode voltages up to 35 V dc, or 25 V rms, 50/60 Hz. A typical LVDT/R has an output of 0.7 V rms as the zero stroke position of the valve stem, and an output of 3.5 V rms at the designed maximum stroke position (some applications have these reversed). The LVDT/R input is converted to dc and conditioned with a low pass filter. Diagnostics perform a high/low (hardware) limit check on the input signal and a high/low system (software) limit check. The software limit check is adjustable in the field.
Pulse Rate Inputs

Two pulse rate inputs are cabled to a single J5 connector on the VSVO board front. This is a dedicated connection to minimize noise sensitivity on the pulse rate inputs.
Inputs support both passive magnetic pickups and active pulse rate transducers (TTL type) interchangeably without configuration. Normally, these inputs are not used on steam turbine applications, but are usually for liquid fuel flow measurement, and monitoring flow divider feedback in gas turbine applications. Pulse rate inputs can be located up to 300 meters (984 feet) from the turbine control cabinet; this assumes shielded-pair cable is used with typically 70 nF single-ended or 35 nF differential capacitance and 15 ohms resistance. A frequency range of 2 to 12 kHz can be monitored at a normal sampling rate of either 10 or 20 ms. Magnetic pickups typically have an output resistance of 200 ohms and an inductance of 85 mH excluding cable characteristics. The transducer is a high impedance source, generating energy levels insufficient to cause a spark. The maximum short circuit current is approximately 100 mA with a maximum power output of 1 watt.
Front panel
Three LEDs at the top of the VSVO front panel provide status information. The normal RUN condition is a flashing green, and FAIL is a solid red. The third LED is normally off but displays a steady orange if an alarm condition exists in the board.
Specification
Table 9-25. Specification Item Number of Inputs (per TSVO) Specification 6 LVDT windings 2 Pulse Rate signals (total of 2 per VSVO) External trip signal 2 Servo Valves (total of 4 per VSVO board) 4 Excitation Sources for LVDTs 2 Excitation Sources for Pulse Rate transducers 200 Hz Nominal 24 V dc 1 % with 14-bit resolution Low pass filter with 3 down breaks at 50 rad/sec 15% CMR is 1 Volt, 60 dB at 50/60 Hz Frequency of 3.2 +/- 0.2 kHz Voltage of 7.00 +/- 0.14 V rms 0.05% of reading with 16-bit resolution at 50 Hz frame rate Noise of acceleration measurement is less than 50 Hz/sec for a 10,000 Hz signal being read at 10 ms Minimum signal for proper measurement at 2 Hz is 33 mVpk, and at 12 kHz is 827 mVpk. Generates 150 V p-p into 60 K ohms Generates 5 to 27 V p-p into 60 K ohms 2% with 12-bit resolution Dither amplitude and frequency adjustable Suicide servo outputs initiated by: Servo Current out of limits or not responding Regulator Feedback signal out of limits
Number of Outputs (per TSVO)
Internal Sample Rate Power Supply Voltage LVDT Accuracy LVDT Input Filter LVDT Common Mode Rejection LVDT Excitation Output Pulse Rate Accuracy
Pulse Rate Input Magnetic PR Pickup Signal Active PR Pickup Signal Servo Valve Output Accuracy Fault detection
Diagnostics
Servo diagnostics cover items such as out of range LVDT voltage, servo suicide, servo current open circuit, and short circuit. If any one of the signals goes unhealthy a composite diagnostic alarm, L3DIAG_VSVO occurs. If the associated regulator has two sensors, the bad sensor is removed from the feedback calculation and the good sensor is used. Details of the individual diagnostics are available from the toolbox. The diagnostic signals can be individually latched, and then reset with the RESET_DIA signal if they go healthy. Connectors JR1, JS1, JT1 on the terminal board have their own ID device that is interrogated by the I/O board. The ID device is a read-only chip coded with the terminal board serial number, board type, revision number, and the plug location.
Like all I/O boards, the VSVO module is configured using the toolbox. This software usually runs on a data-highway connected CIMPLICITY station or workstation. Table 9-26 summarizes the configuration choices and defaults. For details refer to GEH-6403, Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Turbine Controller.
Table 9-26. Typical VSVO Configuration Parameter Configuration System Limits Regulator Regulator 1 RegType LVDT/R Calibration Algorithm used in the regulator Online LVDT calibration, Yes/No Unused 2_PlsRateMAX 2_LV_PosMIN 2_LvpilotCyl 4_LV_LM 100 to 100 100 to 100 Dither Amp: 0 to 10 1_PulseRate 1_LVPosition 2_LV_PosMID 4_LVp/cylMAX 2_LV_posMAX Select System Limits Enable, Disable Description Choices
RegGain RegNullBias Dither Ampl Monitor Monitor 1 Monitor Type
Position Loop Gain in (%Current/%position) Null Bias in % current, Balances Servo Spring Force Dither in % Current (minimizes hysteresis)
Monitor Algorithm
Unused 2_LVposMIN 3_LVposMID 2_LVposRatio
1_Lvposition 2_LVposMAX 1_LvposRatio
J3:IS200TSVOH1A Servo Output1 Reg Number Servo_MA_Out EnableCurSuic Curr_Suicide
Terminal Board 1 connected to VSVO via J3 Measured Output Current in Percent Card Point Identify Regulator Number Select current output for coil windings Select Suicide function based on current Percent current error to initiate suicide
Connected, Not Connected Point Edit (Input FLOAT)
Unused, Reg1, Reg2, Reg3, Reg4 10, 20, 40, 80, 120 mA Enable, Disable 0 to 100% (output current error)
EnablFbkSuic Fdbk_Suicide Servo Output2 J4:IS200TSVOH1A Servo Output3 Servo Output4 J5:IS00TSVOH1A FlowRate1 PRType PRScale SysLim1Enabl SysLim1Latch SysLim1Type SysLimit SystemLim2 TMR_DiffLimt FlowRate2 Card Points Signals L3DIAG_VSVO1 L3DIAG_VSVO2 L3DIAG_VSVO3 SysLim1PR1 SysLim2PR1 SysLim1PR2 SysLim2PR2 Reg1Suicide : Reg4Suicide Reg1_PosAFlt : Reg4_PosAFlt Reg1_PosBFlt : Reg4_PosBFlt Reg1_PosDif1 : Reg4_PosDif1 Reg1_PosDif2 :
Select Suicide function based on feedback Percent position error to initiate suicide Measured Output Current in Percent - Card Point Terminal Board 2 connected to VSVO via J4 Servo current output wired to valve - Card Point Servo current output wired to valve - Card Point Pulse Rate inputs cabled to J5 connector Pulse rate input selected - Card Point Select Speed or Flow type signal Convert Hz to Engineering Units Select System Limit Select whether alarm will latch Select type of alarm initiation Select alarm level in GPM or RPM Same as above Difference Limit off voted pulse inputs (EU) Pulse rate input selected - Card Point (as above) Description Point Edit (Enter Signal Connection) Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Process Alarm Process Alarm Process Alarm Process Alarm Reg1 Suicide relay status : Reg4 Suicide relay status Reg1, LM Machine only, Position A failure : Reg4, LM Machine only, Position A failure Reg1, LM Machine only, Position B failure : Reg4, LM Machine only, Position B failure Reg1, LM Machine only, Position Diff failure : Reg4, LM Machine only, Position Diff failure Reg1, LM Machine only, Position Diff failure :
Enable, Disable 0 to 100% (actuator position error) Point Edit (Input FLOAT)
Connected, not connected Point Edit Point Edit (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT)
Unused, Speed, or Flow 0 to 1,000 Enable, Disable Latch, Not Latch >= or <= 0 to 12,000 Same as above 0 to 12,000 Point Edit (Input FLOAT) Type BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT
Direction Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Reg4_PosDif2 RegCalMode Reg1_Fdbk : Reg4_Fdbk PilotFdbk1 : PilotFdbk4 Reg1_Error : Reg4_Error Accel1 Accel2 Mon1 : Mon12 CalibEnab1 : CalibEnab4 SuicideForce1 : SuicideForce4 PossDiffEnab1 : PossDiffEnab4 Reg1_Ref : Reg4_Ref Reg1-GainMod : Reg4-GainMod Reg1_NullCor : Reg4_NullCor Internal Variables
Reg4, LM Machine only, Position Diff failure Regulator under Calibration Regulator 1 Feedback : Regulator 4 Feedback Pilot/Cyl : Pilot/Cyl Null Bias error Input : Null Bias error Input GPM/sec GPM/sec Position Monitor : Position Monitor Enable Calibration Reg 1 : Enable Calibration Reg 4 Force Suicide Reg 1 : Force Suicide Reg 4 Position Difference Enable Reg 1, LM only : Position Difference Enable Reg 4, LM only Reg 1 Position Ref : Reg 4 Position Ref Reg 1 Gain Modifier : Reg 4 Gain Modifier Reg 1 Null Bias Correction : Reg 4 Null Bias Correction Internal variables to service the auto-calibration display, not configurable
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT
Installation
Sensors and servo valves are wired directly to two I/O terminal blocks mounted on the terminal board. Each block is held down with two screws and has 24 terminals accepting up to #12 AWG wires. Shielded twisted 18 AWG wire is recommended for the pulse rate sensors. A shield termination strip attached to chassis ground is located immediately to the left of each terminal block. External trip wiring is plugged into either JD1 or JD2. The screw connections and position choices for the servo current jumpers are shown in Figure 9-61.
Servo/LVDT Terminal Board TSVOH1B

x
1 2
External Trip from GND

1 2
LVDT 01 (L) LVDT 02 (L) LVDT 03 (L) LVDT 04 (L) LVDT 05 (L) LVDT 06 (L)
x x x x x x x x
Exc R1 (L) Exc R2 (L) Exc S (L) Exc T (L)
x x x x
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
LVDT 01 (H) LVDT 02 (H) LVDT 03 (H) LVDT 04 (H) LVDT 05 (H) LVDT 06 (H)
JD1
External Trip GND
JD2
Exc R1 (H) Exc R2 (H) Exc S (H) Exc T (H)
To Connectors JR5, JS5, JT5, JR1, JS1, JT1 JP1 Servo 01 R

JP2 Servo 01 S
Servo 01 R (L) Servo 01 S (L) Servo 01 T(L) Servo 02SMX(H) Servo 02 R (L) Servo 02 S (L) Servo 02 T (L) Pulse 02 (TTL) Pulse 01 (24R) Pulse 01 (L) Pulse 02 (24R) Pulse 02 (L)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
Servo 01 R (H) Servo 01 S (H) Servo 01 T (H) Servo 01 SMX (H) Servo 02 R (H) Servo 02 S (H) Servo 02 T (H) Pulse 01 (TTL) Pulse 01 (24V) Pulse 01 (H) Pulse 02 (24V) Pulse 02 (H)
JP3 Servo 01 T JP4 Servo 02 R JP5 Servo 02 S JP6 Servo 02 T Jumper Choices: 120B +/-120 ma (75 ohm coil) 120A +/-120 ma (40 ohm coil) 80 +/- 80 ma 40 +/- 40 ma 20 +/- 20 ma 10 +/- 10 ma Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from terminal board for maintenance
Up to two #12 AWG wires per point with 300 volt insulation
Figure 9-61. Servo/LVDT Terminal Board Wiring
DSVO - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Servo Terminal Board

The DSVO board is a compact servo terminal board, designed for DIN-rail mounting. This board has two servo valve outputs, I/O for six LVDT position sensors, and two active pulse rate inputs for flow measurement, as shown in Figure 9-62 (DSVOH1A) and Figure 9-63 (DSVOH1B, H2B). Servo coil currents ranging from 10 to 120 mA can be jumper selected. DSVO connects to the VSVO processor board with a 37-pin cable and a 15-pin cable, which are identical to those used on the larger TSVO board. The terminal boards can be stacked vertically on the DIN-rail to conserve cabinet space. Two DSVO boards can be connected to the VSVO, if required. Only the Simplex version of this board is available. The on-board functions and high frequency decoupling to ground are the same as those on the TSVO. High density Euro Block type terminal blocks are permanently mounted to the board with six screws for the ground connection (SCOM). Each of the two connectors, JR1 and J5, connect to signals from on-board ID chips which identify the board to the VSVO for system diagnostic purposes. There are currently two versions (groups) of the DSVO, IS200DSVOH1B and IS200DSVOH2B. The IS200DSVOH1B is a direct replacement for the previous IS200DSVOH1A design. The IS200DSVOH2B is certified by UL to UL-1604 Class 1, Groups A and B, Temperature Class T4, Division 2. (This certification is commonly referred to as Class 1 Division 2. Certification under UL-1604 Class 1, Groups A and B, Temperature Class T4, Division 2 certifies the following: That the DSVO can operate in hazardous locations where acetylene and hydrogen (groups A and B) may be present (class 1), but not likely to exist under normal operating conditions (division 2). That no part on the board will exceed 135 C with the terminal board ambient temperature at its maximum 65 C (temperature class T4).
Note Turbine fuel is not specifically addressed by UL-1604, but UL equates turbine fuel to the acetylene and hydrogen groups (A and B) in terms of volatility and flammability. The differences between the H1B and H2B versions of DSVO are shown in the following chart.
Function Class 1, Div. 2 Certification Servo Valves Accommodated LVDT Excitation Outputs Excitation for Pulse Rate Probes Additional Pulse Rate Inputs for TTL Signals H1B No 75, 40, 22, 62, 89, 125, 1k Ohms Qty. = 2, 120 mA each Qty. = 2, 24 V dc, 100 mA each No H2B Yes 1k Ohms (10 mA) Qty. = 4, 60 mA each No Qty. = 2
Cable to J3 connector in I/O rack for VSVO board
JR1
ID P28V
DSVOH1A Jumper position: 120B is 75 ohm coil 120A is 40 ohm coil P28VT P28VR JD1
1 2 1 2
K1
JD2
External Trip
LVDT 3.2k Hz, 7 V rms Excitation Source
Noise Suppression
LVDT1H
1 SCOM
LVDT1L
JP1
120B 120A 80 40 20 10
Noise Suppression
17 SR1H 21 SS1H
Total of six LVDT input circuits
3 4
Current Limit
N S K1 P28V P28VR
SCOM
Servovalve coil
18 SR1L
P1 24V P1 24R
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
JP2
Pulse Rate Inputs Active Probes 0 - 12 kHz
P1 H P1 L P2 24V P2 24R
120B 120A 80 40 20 10
19 SR2H
N S
22 SS2H
Servovalve coil
20 SR2L
CL
P28V
SCOM
Pulse Rate Inputs Active Probes 0 - 12 kHz
P2 H P2 L
3.2 kHz Excitation
13 14 15 16
E1H E1L E2H E2L
LVDT Excitation
SCOM
JR5
SCOM
Cable to front of VSVO board Figure 9-62. DSVOH1A Board
Mark VI Servo Valve Terminal Board IS200DSVOH1B, H2B

(IS200DSVOH1B Replaces IS200DSVOH1A)
FROM CNTL RACK
PCOM P28
H2B is Certified to UL-1604 Class 1 Div 2

CONN SHLD
EXT TRIP
P28VR
JD1
1 2
JR1
P28VR RP28V PCOM
K1 1 2
JD2
12 Exc
1 LV1H
ID
4
P28VR 3328
S S
LV1L
K1
108 IN VSVO
LVDT
LV2H
S S
H1B ONLY 08 368 1058 1858 4328 1708 1708
PCOM 120B 120A 80 40 20 10 10mA, 1K Coil
JP1
S S S
SR1H
Servo Valve 17 Coils

21
LV2L
SS1H
H2B ONLY 10mA, 1K Coil
SR1L 18
Total of six LVDT input Ckts.

Current Limit
23 P24V1
S S
CL
PCOM
P28VR
4
24
P24R1
LVDT Input TB Locations: LVx H L. 1 1 2 2 3 4 3 5 6 4 7 8 5 9 10 6 11 12

108 IN VSVO
JPx (mA) Coil Res. 120 B 75 ohm 120 A 40 ohm 80 22 ohm 40 62 or 89 ohm 20 125 ohm 10 1000 ohm
H1B ONLY 08 368 1058 1858 4328 1708 1708 120B 120A 80 40 20 10 10mA, 1K Coil
JP2
S S S
SR2H
37
TTL1
Servo Valve 19 Coils

22
K1
P28VR 3328
25
PR1H
PR
S S
SS2H
26
PR1L
H2B ONLY 10mA, 1K Coil 108 IN VSVO
SR2L
20
(SCREWS 37 & 38 ARE NC IN H1B) (SCREWS 23, 24,27,28 ARE NC IN H2B) 27 P24V2
S S
CL
PCOM
P28VR
ERH1
13
28
P24R2
ERL1
14
38
TTL2
ERH3
39
29
PR2H
PR
S
(SCREWS 39-42 ARE NC IN H1B)
30
PR2L
S 4
ID
CONN SHLD
ERH2
15
ERL2
16
JR5
FROM CNTL RACK
{
32 33 34 35 36 SCOM
ERH4
41
ERL4 31
42
bv:06-04-01
CHASSIS
Figure 9-63. DSVOH1B, H2B Board (Part 1 of 2)
LVDT Excitation
ERL3
40
Mark VI Servo Valve Terminal Board IS200DSVOH1B, H2B
Servo Driver Circuit: DSVOH#B VSVO

H1B Only P28V Voltage Limiter 11 vlt 10 ohm Suicide Relay H2B Only P28VR Isc = 19mA
JD1
Ext Trip Ckt
JD2
120B (75 Ohm Coil) 120A (40 ) 80 40 20 10 (22) (62 or 89) (125) (1K) Dir. of Current to Shutdown Actuated Device
JP1
Current Ref
Servo Coils
10 mA, 1K Coil 10 mA, 1K Coil
Configurable Gain
J2 J3/J4 Back plane ACOM
LVDT Excitation:
VSVO
Monitoring P2 J3 JR1 13 14 39 40 15 16 41 42 #1 #3 -- NC in H1B #2 #4 -- NC in H1B
DSVOH#B
3.2 Khz
Monitoring
7.0 Vrms 120 mA Each
To LVDT's
Monitoring P2
J4
Monitoring
7.0 Vrms 120 mA Each
To Second DSVO Termination Board
Figure 9-63. DSVOH1B, H2B Board (Part 2 of 2)
Installation
There is no shield termination strip with this design. The DSVO board slides into a plastic holder, which mounts on the DIN-rail. The servo I/O are wired directly to the Euro Block type terminal block as shown in Figure 9-64 (DSVOH1A) and Figure 9-65 (DSVOH1B, H2B). This has 36 terminals (DSVOH1A) or 42 terminals (DSVOH1B, H2B); typically #18 AWG shielded twisted pair wiring is used. There are six screws for the SCOM (ground) connection, which should be as short a distance as possible.
DSVOH1A
Screw Connections LVDT1 (Low) LVDT2 (Low) LVDT3 (Low) Coil Current LVDT4 (Low) Jumpers LVDT5 (Low) LVDT6 (Low) JP1 Excitat1(Low) Excitat2(Low) 1020 80 12 ServoR1(Low) 40 12 0A ServoR2(Low) 0B JP2 ServoS2(High) Pulse 1(24R) 12 Pulse1 (Low) 12 1020 80 40 0A Pulse 2(24R) 0B Pulse2 (Low) Chassis Ground JR1 Chassis Ground Chassis Ground JR5 JD2 JD1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35
Screw Connections LVDT 1 (High) LVDT 2 (High) LVDT 3 (High) LVDT 4 (High) LVDT 5 (High) LVDT 6 (High) Excitation 1 (High) Excitation 2 (High) ServoR1 (High) ServoR2 (High) ServoS1 (High) Pulse 1 (24V) Pulse 1 (High) Pulse 2 (24V) Pulse 2 (High) Chassis Ground Chassis Ground Chassis Ground Euro Block type terminal block External trip circuits
SCOM
Cable to J5 on front of VSVO board Plastic mounting holder
DIN-rail mounting Figure 9-64. DSVOH1A Wiring and Cabling
DSVOH1B, H2B JP1 JP2 Coil 120B 120B Current 120A 120A Jumpers 80 80 Screw Connections LVDT1 (Low) LVDT2 (Low) LVDT3 (Low) LVDT4 (Low) LVDT5 (Low) LVDT6 (Low) Excitat1(Low) Excitat2(Low) ServoR1(Low) ServoR2(Low) ServoS2(High) Pulse 1(24R) Pulse1 (Low) Pulse 2(24R) Pulse2 (Low) JR1 Pulse2TTL (High) Excitation3 (Low) Excitation4 (Low) External trip circuits JD2 JD1
40 20 10 40 20 10
H1B and H2B Connection Differences Screw # H1B H2B 23, 24 N/C 27, 28 N/C 37, 38 N/C 39, 40 N/C 41, 42 N/C N/C = Not Connected Screw Connections LVDT 1 (High) LVDT 2 (High) LVDT 3 (High) LVDT 4 (High) LVDT 5 (High) LVDT 6 (High) Excitation 1 (High) Excitation 2 (High) ServoR1 (High) ServoR2 (High) ServoS1 (High) Pulse 1 (24V) Pulse 1 (High) Pulse 2 (24V) Pulse 2 (High) 31 - 36 DSVO SCOM, connect to chassis ground Pulse1TTL (High) Excitation3 (High) Excitation4 (High) Euro Block type terminal block
JR5
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41
Cable to J5 on front of VSVO board DIN-rail mounting
Plastic mounting holder
Figure 9-65. DSVOH1B, H2B Wiring and Cabling
VTUR/TTUR - Turbine Control

The Turbine Control Board (VTURH1) controls three primary overspeed trip solenoids and automatic synchronizing. It also interfaces to four passive pulse rate devices, and monitors shaft voltage and current. The speed signal cable to VTUR uses the J5 plug on the front of the board, and the other signals use the J3 connector on the VME rack. Terminal board TTUR provides simplex signals through the JR connector, and fans out TMR signals to the JR, JS, and JT connectors. J4 on the VME rack connects to the TRPG terminal board described in the Primary Trip section. The cable connections are shown in Figure 9-66. A two-slot version of this board (VTURH2) is available for driving six trip solenoids using two TRPG boards. VTURH2 only accepts eight flame detectors.
TTURH1B Terminal Board 37-pin "D" shell type connectors with latching fasteners VTUR VME Board
x RUN FAIL STAT
x
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
JT1
JT5 JS1
Cables to VME Rack T VME Bus to VCMI
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
JS5 Cables to VME Rack S JR1 JR5

VTUR x
J 5
J3 TB3 x
Shield Bar
Wiring to TTL Speed Pickups
J4
BarrierType Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from board for maintenance Cable to TRPG
Cables to VME Rack R
Figure 9-66. Turbine Control Terminal Board, Processor Board, and Cabling
Operation
In the Simplex application, up to four pulse rate signals may be used to measure turbine speed. Pulse rate to digital circuits are on the VTUR board. Generator and bus voltages are brought into VTUR for automatic synchronizing in conjunction with the turbine controller and GE excitation system. TTUR has permissive generator synchronizing relays and controls the main breaker relay coil 52G. Shaft voltage is picked up with brushes and monitored along with the current to the machine case. VTUR alarms high voltages and tests the integrity and continuity of the circuitry.
Terminal Board TTURH1B (input Noise) ti NS <R> Control Rack J3
Turbine Board
Generator Feedback Terminal Board TTURH1B (continued) 28Vdc JR1

TMR SMX
52G a
02 01
Gen. Volts 120 V ac from PT Bus Volts 120 Vac from PT
GENH
17 Suppression 18
JR1
VTUR
Pulse J3 Rate/ Digital ID
GENL
JP1 K25P RD
Mon
BUSH
19 20
NS
MUX A/D AC&DC shaft test

TMR SMX
Synch. Perm.
BUSL
To TPRO
SVH
JP2 K25 RD
Mon
Auto Synch
21 22
175V
SVL
NS
K25A
Synch. check from VPRO
Shaft
SCH
J5
23
J4 NS
Mon
14V
SCL
24 5 (TB3) ) 41 42
Machine Case #1 Primary Magnetic Speed PU
TTL1_R MPU1RH MPU1RL TTL2_R
JR5
Filter Clamp AC Coupling
J8
08
06,7 05
04
03
NS
#2 Primary Magnetic Speed PU #3 Primary Magnetic Speed PU #4 Primary Magnetic Speed PU
MPU2RH MPU2RL
6 (TB3) ) 43 44 45 46 47 48
Trip Signals to TRPG

ID
B K R
M A N
A U T P125Gen
NS
Filter Clamp AC Coupling Filter Clamp AC Coupling Filter Clamp AC Coupling
NS
NS
Note 1: TTL option available on first two Pickups. Note 2: An external closed auxiliary contact must be provided the Breaker close coil as indicated. Note 3: Signal to comes from through TRPG &
52G b Bkr Coil N125Gen
Figure 9-67. Turbine Control Inputs, Synchronizing, and Primary Trip Interface, Simplex
In TMR applications all inputs fan to the three control racks. Control signals coming into TTUR from R, S, and T are voted before they actuate permissive relays K25 and K25P. Relay K25A is controlled by the VPRO and TREG boards. All three relays have two normally open contacts in series with the breaker close coil. The TMR arrangement is shown in Figure 9-68.
52G a
Terminal Board TTURH1B (input portion)

GENH
<T> <S> <R>

Turbine Board
Generator Feedback
Noise 17 Suppression 18
Terminal Board 02B5 01 TTURH1B (continued) B5 J3 JR1 JP1

2G L 2G H
JR1
J3 VTUR
f( ) Pulse Rate/ Digital
Gen. Volts 120 Vac from PT
NS
28Vdc
TMR SMX
GENL
K25P
J3
Bus Volts 120 Vac from PT
BUSH
19 20
JS1 NS
MUX A/D AC&DC shaft test J3
JS1
2 RD 3
Synch. Permissve
BUSL
JP2
TMR SMX
To TPRO
SVH
JT1
2 RD 3
K25
Auto Synch.
21 22
175V
SVL
NS
JT1 J4
K25A
Synch. check from VPRO
Shaft
SCH
J5
23
Mon NS Connectors at bottom of VME rack JR5

14V
SCL
24 5 (TB3)
)
J8
08
Machine C
TTL1R
07 06 BK R H
05 M A N
04 A UT O
03
#1 Primary Magnetic Speed PU
MPU1RH 41
MPU1RL
42
NS 4 Circuits*
Trip Signals to TRPG JS5 Note 1: TTL option only available on first two ccts. each group of 4 Note 2: An external closed auxiliary contact must be provided the Breaker close coil as indicated. Note 3: Signal to comes from through TRPG &
TTL1S
3 (TB3) 33 34
)
P125Gen 52G b Bkr Coil N125Gen
MPU1SH
NS
MPU1SL
TTL1T
1 (TB3) 25 26
)
4 Circuits*
JT5
MPU1TH
To Rack S
NS
MPU1TL
4 Circuits*
To Rack T
Figure 9-68. Turbine Control Inputs, Synchronizing, and Primary Trip Interface, TMR
Features
Speed Pickups
An interface is provided for four passive, magnetic speed inputs with a frequency range of 2 14,000 Hz. The median speed signal is used for speed control and for the primary overspeed trip signal. Using passive pickups on a 60-tooth wheel, circuit sensitivity allows detection of 2 rpm turning gear speed to determine if the turbine is stopped (zero speed). If automatic turning gear engagement is provided in the turbine control, this signal initiates turning gear operation. The primary overspeed trip calculations are performed in the controller using algorithms similar to (but not the same as) those shown in the section on the VPRO Protection Module. The fast trip option used on gas turbines runs in VTUR and is described below.
Primary Trip Solenoid Interface

The normal Primary Overspeed trip is calculated in the controller and passed to the VTUR and then to the TRPG terminal board. TRPG contains magnetic relays for interface with the Electrical Trip Devices (ETDs). TRPG works in conjunction with the TREG board to form the Primary and Emergency sides of the interface to the ETDs. Usually this applies to turbines which do not have a mechanical overspeed bolt and require a separate emergency overspeed (EOS) system. Three ETDs can be driven from each TRPG/TREG combination with the positive side of each solenoid connected to the TREG and the negative side connected to the TRPG. A metal oxide varister (MOV) and a current limiting resistor are used in each circuit. Two different versions of the TRPG are available, with version 1 used for triple redundant (TMR) systems and version 2 used for Simplex systems. The only difference is that the TMR version has three voting relays per ETD circuit and the Simplex version has one relay per circuit. The VTUR board monitors the current flowing in its relay driver control line to determine its energize or de-energize vote/status of the relay coil. A normally closed contact from each relay on the TRPG board is monitored by the diagnostics to determine its proper operation.
Shaft Voltage and Current Monitor

Bearings can be damaged by the flow of electrical current from the shaft to the case. This current can occur for several reasons. A static voltage can be caused by droplets of water being thrown off the last stage buckets in a steam turbine. This voltage will build up until a discharge occurs through the bearing oil film. An ac ripple on the dc generator field can produce an ac voltage on the shaft with respect to ground through the capacitance of the field winding and insulation. Note that both of these sources are weak, so high impedance instrumentation is used to measure these voltages with respect to ground. A voltage may be generated between the ends of the generator shaft due to dissymmetries in the generator magnetic circuits. If the insulated bearings on the generator shaft break down, the current will flow from one end of the shaft through the bearings and frame to the other end. Brushes can be used to discharge damaging voltage buildup, and a shunt should be used to monitor the current flow.
The turbine control continuously monitors the shaft to ground voltage and current, and alarms excessive levels. There is an ac test mode and a dc test mode. The ac test applies an ac voltage to test the integrity of the measuring circuit.
The dc test checks the continuity of the external circuit, including the brushes, turbine shaft, and the interconnecting wire. Note The dc test is driven from the <R> controller only. If the <R> controller is down, this test cannot be run successfully.
Specification
Table 9-27. VTUR Board Specifications Item Number of Inputs Specification TTUR: 12 Passive Speed Pickups 1 Shaft Voltage and 1 Shaft Current Measurement 1 Generator and 1 Bus Voltage Generator Breaker Status contact 4 Passive Speed Pickups 1 Shaft Voltage and 1 Current Measurement 1 Generator and 1 Bus Voltage Generator Breaker Status 8 Flame Detectors from first TRPG Generator Breaker Coil, 5A at 125 V dc Automatic Synchronizing Primary Trip Solenoid Interface, 3 outputs to TRPG Additional 3 trip outputs from second TRPG using VTURH2
VTUR:
Number of Outputs
TTUR: VTUR:
Trip Solenoids (TRPG) Power Supply Voltage MPU Pulse Rate Range MPU Pulse Rate Accuracy
Solenoids draw up to 1 A at 125 V dc and have a time constant of L/R = 0.1 sec. TTUR: Nominal 125 V dc to breaker coil
2 Hz to 14 kHz 0.05% of reading Voltage signal is 5 V dc pulses from 0 to 2,000 Hz Up to 300 m (984 ft), with maximum two-way cable resistance of 15 ohms Applies a 5 V dc source to test integrity of the circuit. Circuit reads a differential resistance between 0 and 150 ohms within 5 ohms. Readings above 50 ohms indicate a fault. Return signal is filtered to provide 40 dB of noise attenuation at 60 Hz. Applies a test voltage of 1 kHz to the input of the VTUR shaft voltage circuit (R module only). Measures ac voltage up to 0.1 V pp Two Single Phase Potential Transformers, with secondary output supplying a nominal 115 V rms. Each input has less than 3 VA of loading. Allowable voltage range for synch is 75 to 130 V rms. Each PT input is magnetically isolated with a 1,500 V rms barrier. Cable length can be up to 1,000 ft. of 18 AWG wiring. Frequency Accuracy 0.05% over 45 to 66 Hz range. Zero crossing of the inputs is monitored on the rising slope. Phase Difference Measurement is better than 1 degree.
MPU Input Circuit Sensitivity 27 mV pk (detects 2 rpm speed) Shaft Voltage Monitor Shaft Voltage wiring Shaft Voltage DC Test
Shaft Voltage AC Test Shaft current input Generator and Bus Voltage Sensors
Synchronizing measurements
Generator Breaker Circuits (Synchronizing)
External circuits should have a voltage range within 20 to 140 V dc. The external circuit must include a Normally Closed Breaker Aux Contact to interrupt the current. Circuits are rated for NEMA class E creepage and clearance. 250 V dc applications require interposing relays. 20 V dc indicates high and 6 V dc indicates low. Each circuit is optically isolated and filtered for 4 ms.
Contact Voltage Sensing
Table 9-28 summarizes the configuration choices and defaults. For details refer to GEH-6403, Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Turbine Controller.
Table 9-28. Typical VTUR Configuration Parameter Configuration VTUR System Limits SMredundancy AccelCalType FastTripType J3J5:IS200TTURH1A PulseRate1 PRType PRScale SysLim1Enable SysLim1Latch SysLim1Type SysLimit1 SysLim2Enable TMRDiffLimit ShVoltMon SysLim1Enable SysLim1Latch SysLim1Type SysLimit1 SysLim2Enable ShCurrMon ShuntOhms Shunt Limit Brush Lim Select System Limits Select Simplex or Redundant system Select Acceleration Calculation Type Select Fast Trip algorithm TTUR connected to VTUR via J3 and J5 Pulse Rate Input 1 - Card Point Select Speed or Flow type input Select Pulses per Revolution Select System Limit 1 Select whether alarm will latch Select type of alarm initiation Select alarm level in GPM or RPM Select System Limit 2 (as above) Difference Limit for voted PR inputs EU Shaft Voltage Monitor - Card Point Select System Limit 1 Select whether alarm will latch Select type of alarm initiation Select alarm level in frequency Select System Limit 2 (as above) Shaft Current Monitor - Card Point Shunt resistance Shunt maximum ohms Shaft Brush maximum ohms Enable, Disable Simplex or TMR Slow, Medium, Fast Unused, PR_Single, PR_Max Connected, Not Connected Point Edit (Input FLOAT) Description Choices
Unused, Speed, Flow, Speed_LM 0 to 1,000 Enable, Disable Latch, Not Latch >= or <= 0 to 20,000 Enable, Disable 0 to 20,000 Point Edit (Input FLOAT)
Enable, Disable Latch, Not Latch >= or <= 0 to 100 Enable, Disable Point Edit 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 (Input FLOAT)
SysLim1Enable SysLim1Latch SysLim1Type SysLimit1 SysLim2Enable GenPT_KVolts PT_Input PT_Output SysLim1 SysLim2 BusPT_Kvolts Ckt_Bkr System Frequency CB1CloseTime CB1 AdaptLimit CB1 AdaptEnabl CB1FreqDiff CB1PhaseDiff CB2CloseTime J4:IS200TRPGH1A Card Points Signals L3DIAG_VTUR1 L3DIAG_VTUR2 L3DIAG_VTUR3 ShShntTst_OK ShBrshTst_OK CB_Volts_OK CB_K25P_PU CB_K25_PU CB_K25A_PU Gen_Sync_LO L25_Command Kq1_Status : Kq6_Status FD1_Flame : FD16_Flame SysLim1PR1
Select System Limit 1 Select whether alarm will latch Select type of alarm initiation Select alarm level in Amps Select System Limit 2 Generator Potential Transfomer - Card Point PT input in kVrms for PT output PT output in Vrms, nominal 115 V rms Select alarm level in kVrms Select alarm level in kVrms Bus Potential Transformer - Card Point Circuit Breaker - Card Point Select frequency in Hz Breaker 1 Closing Time, ms Breaker 1 Self Adaptive Limit, ms Select Breaker 1 Self Adaptive Limit Breaker 1 special window Frequency Difference, Hz Breaker 1 special window Phase Diff, Degr Breaker 2 Closing Time, ms (as above) TRPG Terminal Board, 8 Flame Detectors Description Point Edit (Enter Signal Connection) Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Shaft Voltage Monitor Shunt Test OK Shaft Voltage Brush Test OK L3BKR_VLT Circuit Breaker Coil Voltage Available L3BKR_PERM Sync Permissive Relay Picked Up L3KBR_GES Auto Sync Relay Picked Up L3KBR_GEX Sync Check Relay Picked Up Generator Sync Trouble (Lockout) --------------: --------------: ---------------
Enable, Disable Latch, Not Latch >= or <= 0 to 100 Enable, Disable Point Edit 0 to 1,000 0 to 150 0 to 1,000 0 to 1,000 Point Edit Point Edit 50 or 60 0 to 1,000 0 to 1,000 Enable, Disable 0 to 10 0 to 30 0 to 1,000 Connected, Not Connected Direction Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Type BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT (Input FLOAT) (Input BIT) (Input FLOAT)
: SysLim1PR4 SysLim1SHV SysLim1SHC SysLim1GEN SysLim1BUS SysLim2PR1 GenFreq BusFreq GenVoltsDiff Gen Freq Diff Gen Phase Diff CB1CloseTime CB2CloseTime Accel1 : Accel4 FlmDetPwr1 FlmDetPwr2 ShTestAC ShTestDC FD1_Level : FD16_Level Sync_Perm_AS Sync_Perm Sync_Monitor Sync_Bypass1 Sync_Bypass0 CB2_Selected AS_Win_Sel Sync_Reset Kq1 : Kq6 --------
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT
AC Shaft Voltage Frequency High L30TSVH AC Shaft Current High L30TSCH --------------(same set as for Limit1 above) Hz frequency Hz frequency KiloVolts rms - Gen Low is Negative Slip Hz-Gen Slow is Negative Phase Degrees - Gen Lag is Negative Breaker #1 Close Time in milliseconds Breaker #2 Close Time in milliseconds RPM/SEC : RPM/SEC 335 V dc 335 V dc L97SHAFT_AC SVM_AC_TEST L97SHAFT_DC SVM_DC_TEST 1 = High Detection Cnts Level : 1 = High Detection Cnts Level L83AS - Auto Sync Permissive L25P - Sequencing Sync Permissive L83S_MTR - Monitor Mode L25_BYP-1 = Auto Sync Bypass L25_BYPZ-0 = Auto Sync Permissive L43SAUT2 - 2nd Breaker Selected L43AS_WIN - Special Window Selected L86MR_SYNC - Sync Trouble Reset L20PTR1 - Primary Trip Relay : L20PTR6 - Primary Trip Relay
Diagnostics
Diagnostic information includes feedback from the solenoid relay driver and contact, high flame detector voltage, slow synch check relay, slow auto synch relay, and locked up K25 relay. If any one of the signals goes unhealthy a composite diagnostic alarm, L3DIAG_VTUR occurs. The diagnostic signals can be individually latched, and then reset with the RESET_DIA signal if they go healthy. Terminal board connectors JR1, JS1, JT1, JR5, JS5, JT5 have their own ID device which is interrogated by the I/O board. The ID device is a read-only chip coded with the terminal board serial number, board type, revision number, and plug location.
Automatic Synchronizing
All synchronizing connections are located on the TTUR terminal board. The generator and bus voltages are supplied by two, single phase, potential transformers (PTs) with a fused secondary output supplying a nominal 115 V rms. Measurement accuracy between the zero crossing for the bus and generator voltage circuits is 1 degree. Turbine speed is matched against the bus frequency, and the generator and bus voltages are matched by adjusting the generator field excitation voltage from commands sent between the turbine controller and the EX2000 over the Unit Data Highway (UDH). A command is given to close the breaker when all permissives are satisfied, and the breaker is predicted to close within the calculated phase/slip window. Feedback of the actual breaker closing time is provided by a 52G/a contact from the generator breaker (not an auxiliary relay) to update the data base. An internal K25A synch check relay is provided on the TTUR; the independent backup phase/slip calculation for this relay is performed in the Protection Module. Diagnostics monitor the relay coil and contact closures to determine if the relay properly energizes or de-energizes upon command.
Synchronizing Modes
There are three basic synchronizing modes. Traditionally, these modes are selected from a generator panel mounted selector switch: Off The breaker will not be closed by the Mark VI control. The check relay will not pickup. Manual The operator initiates breaker close, which is still subject to the K25A Synch Check contacts driven by VPRO. The manual close is initiated from an external contact on the generator panel, normally connected in series with a Synch Mode in Manual contact. Auto The system will automatically match voltage and speed, and then close the breaker at the right time to hit top dead center on the synchroscope. All three of the following functions must agree for this closure to occur: K25A synch check relay, checks the allowable slip/phase window, from VPRO. K25 auto synch relay, provides precision synchronization, from VTUR. K25P synch sequence permissive, checks the turbine sequence status, from VTUR.
Details of the various checks are discussed in the following sections.
Synch Check
The K25A synch check function is based on phase lock loop techniques. The calculations for this function are done in the VPRO, but interfaces to the Breaker close circuit on the TTUR board. It performs limit checks against adjustable constants as follows: Generator undervoltage Bus undervoltage Voltage error Frequency error (slip), with a maximum value of 0.33 Hz, typically set to 0.27 Hz. Phase error with a maximum value of 30 degrees, typically set to 10 degrees.
In addition, synch check arms logic to enable the function, and provides bypass logic for deadbus closure. The synch window in Figure 9-69 is based on typical settings:
SLIP +0.27 Hz
-10 -0.27 Hz
+10
PHASE Degrees
Figure 9-69. Typical Synch Window
Auto Synch
The Auto Synch K25 function uses zero voltage crossing techniques. It compensates for the breaker time delay, which is defined by two adjustable constants with logic selection between the two (for two breaker applications). The calculations, which are done on the VTUR board, include phase, slip, acceleration, and anticipated time lead for the breaker delay. Based on the measured breaker close time, the time delay parameter is adjusted, up to certain limits. In addition, auto synch arms logic to enable the function, and bypasses logic to provide for deadbus or manual closure. The auto synch projected synch window is shown in Figure 9-70, where positive slip indicates the generator frequency is higher than the bus frequency.
SLIP 0.3 Hz 0.12 Hz Gen. Lag 0 10 Gen. Lead (phase degrees)
Figure 9-70. Auto Synch Projected Window
The projected window is based on current phase, current slip, and current acceleration. The generator must currently be lagging and have been lagging for the last 10 consecutive cycles, and projected (anticipated) to be leading when the breaker actually reaches closure. Auto synch will not allow the breaker to close with negative slip; speed matching typically aims at around +0.12 Hz slip.
Synchronization Display
A special synchronization screen is available on the HMI with a real-time graphical phase display and control pushbuttons. The display items are listed in Table 9-29.
Table 9-29. Synchronizing Display Items Synch Display Dynamic Parameters Description Voltages: Frequencies: Phase: Generator, Bus, Difference Generator, Bus, Slip (difference) Difference angle, degrees Synch OFF, MANUAL, AUTO OFF, ON Open/close Open/close K25P Raise/lower Raise/lower
Status Indication
Mode: Synch Monitor: Dead Bus Breaker: Second Breaker if applicable: Synch Permissive: Auto Synch enabled Speed Adjust: Voltage Adjust: Gen Voltage: Bus Voltage: Gen Frequency: Bus Frequency: Difference Volts: Difference Frequ: Phase: K25 K25A
Synch Permissives
OK/not OK OK/not OK OK/not OK OK/not OK OK/not OK OK/not OK OK/not OK OK/not OK
Limit Constants Breaker Performance
Upper and Lower Limits for the above permissives Diagnostics: Slow check relay Synch relay lockup Breaker #1 close time out of limits Breaker #2 close time out of limits Relay K25P trouble Breaker closing voltage (125 V dc) missing Synch Monitor: Speed Adjust: Voltage Adjust: ON, OFF RAISE, LOWER RAISE, LOWER
Control Pushbuttons
Installation
Magnetic pick ups, shaft pick ups, potential transformers, and breaker relays are wired to two I/O terminal blocks on TTUR. Each block is held down with two screws and has 24 terminals accepting up to #12 AWG wires. A shield termination strip attached to chassis ground is located immediately to the left of each terminal block. Jumpers JP1 and JP2 select either SMX or TMR for relay drivers K25 and K25P. TB3 is for optional TTL connections to active speed pickups; these require an external power supply. The wiring connections are shown in Figure 9-71.
Turbine Terminal Board TTURH1B

JP1 TB1
x
JP2
K1
52G (L) AUTO BKRH N125GEN
x x x x x x x x
Gen (L) Bus (L) ShaftV (L) ShaftC (L)
x x x x
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
TMR SMX TMR SMX 52G (H) P125GEN MAN BKRH
K3
K2 Gen (H) Bus (H) ShaftV (H) ShaftC (H) To Connectors JR5, JS5, JT5, JR1, JS1, JT1 TB3 Screw Connections
TB2
x
MPU 1T (L) MPU 2T (L) MPU 3T (L) MPU 4T (L) MPU 1S (L) MPU 2S (L) MPU 3S (L) MPU 4S (L) MPU 1R (L) MPU 2R (L) MPU 3R (L) MPU 4R (L)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
MPU 1T (H) MPU 2T (H) MPU 3T (H) MPU 4T (H) MPU 1S (H) MPU 2S (H) MPU 3S (H) MPU 4S (H) MPU 1R (H) MPU 2R (H) MPU 3R (H) MPU 4R (H) TB3
TTL1T TTL2T
01 02
TTL1S TTL2S
03 04 01 J8
x
TTL1R TTL2R
05 06
Figure 9-71. TTUR Terminal Board
VTUR/TRPG - Primary Trip

The TRPG terminal board contains nine magnetic relays to interface with three trip solenoids, known as the Electrical Trip Devices (ETD). The TRPG works in conjunction with the TREG to form the Primary and Emergency sides of the interface to the ETDs. The TRPGH1A version for TMR applications, shown in Figure 9-72, has three voting relays per trip solenoid. The TRPGH2A version is for simplex applications and has one relay per trip solenoid. TRPG also accommodates eight Geiger Mueller flame detectors. An optional double-width VTURH2A board can be cabled to a second TRPG board for interface to three additional ETDs, but no additional Flame Detectors.
TRPGH1A Terminal Board ETD Power from PDM
VTUR VME Board

x RUN FAIL STAT
x
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
J1
JT1
37-pin "D" shell type connectors with latching fasteners Cables to VME Rack T VME Bus to VCMI
JS1
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
Cables to VME Rack S JR1
J 5
J2 J4 J5 J3
VTUR x
J3
x
Cable to TTUR (Speed signals)
Shield Bar 335 V from Rack Power Supplies R, S, T J4 Cable to TREG Cable to TTUR
Connectors on VME Card Rack R
Cable to VME Rack R
Figure 9-72. TRPG Terminal Board, I/O Board and Cabling
Operation
VTUR provides the primary trip function by controlling the relays on TRPG, which trip the main protection solenoids. In the TMR case the three inputs are voted in hardware using a relay ladder logic two-out-of-three voting circuit. Relay coil currents, contact status, and supply voltages are monitored for diagnostic purposes, as shown in Figure 9-73.
<PDM> 125 Vdc + Terminal Board TRPGH1A (TMR), H2A (Simplex) JR1 J1
Monitoring Outputs
01 03 05 P125 09 10 N125
<R> VTUR J4
RD RD
ID
KR1 KR2 KR3 28 Vdc
"PTR 1/4" KR1 KS1 KS1 KT1 KT1 KR1
02
Trip Solenoid 1 or 4 + J2
Terminal Board TREG

01 KE1
J2
RD
Mon
Mon
04
KR1,2,3 <S> VTUR J4 JS1 These relays in TMR systems
"PTR 2/5" KR2 KS2 KS2 KT2 KT2 KR2
Optional Economizing Resistor

04
03
05
KE2
RD RD
ID
KS1 KS2 KS3 28 Vdc
J2
Mon
08 07
RD
Mon
"PTR 3/6" KR3 KS3 KS3 KT1 KT2 KT3 To JR1, JS1, JT1 Solenoid Power Monitor KT3 KT3 KR3
06
09
KE3
<T> VTUR J4
KS1,2,3 JT1
J2
Mon
RD RD
ID
12 11 02 06 10
RD
28 Vdc
Mon
N125 Vdc KT1,2,3 8 Signals to JR1,JS1,JT1

FLAME1H FLAME1L
J2
J2
3 Monitor Signals to JR1,JS1,JT1 335 V dc
33 34
Voltage Supply and Monitor Voltage Supply and Monitor Voltage Supply and Monitor
J3 335 Vdc from R rack J4 335 Vdc from S rack J5 335 Vdc from T rack
NS NS
Eight Flame Detector Circuits
Supply 8 Detectors
Figure 9-73. TRPG and Trip Solenoids
Features
VTUR controls the main breaker via TTUR, and three trip solenoids via TRPG. With a second TRPG, six trip solenoids can be controlled. In addition, VTUR handles shaft speed, generator voltage, and bus voltage inputs from TTUR, plus up to eight flame detector inputs from one TRPG board.
Control of Trip Solenoids

Both TRPG and TREG control the trip solenoids so that either one can remove power and close the steam or fuel valves. TRPG holds nine relays in three voting groups of three, one group for each trip solenoid. Voltage for the relay coils is supplied from the R, S, and T rack backplane. The trip solenoids are supplied with power through plug J1. A metal oxide varistor (MOV) for current suppression is on TREG, and an optional economizing current limiting resistor can be wired to the TREG terminals. In Simplex systems TRPGH2 is used. This board has one relay per ETD circuit instead of three and is controlled by only one VTUR board.
Flame Detectors
Up to eight flame detectors can be used for gas turbine applications. The detectors are supplied with 335 V dc, 0.5 mA through plugs J3, J4, and J5. With no flame present the detector charges up to the supply voltage, but presence of the flame causes the detector to charge to a level and then discharge through the TRPG board. As the flame intensity increases the discharge frequency increases. When the detector discharges, VTUR and TRPG convert the discharged energy into a voltage pulse. The pulse rate varies from 0 to 1,000 pulses/sec. These voltage pulses are fanned out to all three modules. Voltage pulses above 2.5 volts generate a logic high, and the pulse rate over a 40 ms time period is measured in a counter.
Specification
Table 9-30. TRPG Specification Item Trip Solenoids Solenoid Rated Voltage/Current Solenoid Response Time Current Suppression Current Economizer Control Relay Coil Voltage Supply Flame Detectors Detector Supply Voltage/Current Specification 3 Solenoids per TRPG (total of 6 per VTUR) 125 V dc standard with up to 1 Amp draw 24 V dc is alternate with up to 1 Amp draw L/R time constant is 0.1 sec Metal oxide varister (MOV) on TREG Terminals for optional 10 ohm, 70 watt economizing resistor Relays supplied with 28 V dc from R, S, and T racks 8 detectors per TRPG (total of 8 per VTUR) 335 V dc with 0.5 mA per detector
Like all I/O boards, the TRPG board is configured using the toolbox. This software usually runs on a data-highway connected CIMPLICITY station or workstation. Table 9-31 summarizes the configuration choices. For details refer to GEH-6403, Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Turbine Controller.
Table 9-31. Typical TRPG Configuration Parameter Configuration J4:IS200TRPGH1A FlameInd1 FlmDetTime FlameLimitHI FlameLimitLOW Flame_Det FlameIndN Kq1_Status Kq1 PTR_Output J4A:IS200TRPGH1A First TRPG Terminal board Intensity (Hz), Flame detector Number 1 - Card Point Flame Detector Time Interval Flame Threshold Limit HI (HI detection cnts means LOW sensitivity) Flame Threshold Limit LO (LOW detection cnts means HI sensitivity) Flame Detector selected Flame detectors 2 through 8 as above - Card Point Primary Trip relay status, first of 3 PTRs - Card Point Primary Trip Relay, first of three PTR - Card Point Primary Trip relay Used/Unused Second TRPG Board for expanded VTUR, with three more Trip Solenoid outputs, and Flame Detectors 9 through 16 (not used) Description Point Edit (Enter Signal Connection) Intensity (Hz) Intensity (Hz) Intensity (Hz) Connected, not connect. Point Edit (Input FLOAT) Description Choices
0.04, 0.08, 0.16 sec 0 to 160 0 to 160 Used, Unused Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit (Input FLOAT) (Input BIT) (Output BIT)
Used, Unused Connected, Not Connected
Card Points Signals FlameInd1 : FlameInd8
Type FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT
Diagnostics
Descriptions of the TRPG diagnostics are listed under VTUR. The diagnostics include feedback from the trip solenoid relay driver and contact, solenoid power bus, and the flame detector excitation voltage too low or too high. Connectors JR1, JS1, and JT1 on the terminal board have their own ID device which is interrogated by the I/O board. The ID device is a read-only chip coded with the terminal board serial number, board type, revision number, and the plug location.
Installation
The three trip solenoids are wired directly to the first I/O terminal block, and the flame detectors (if used) to the second terminal block. Power to the flame detectors is wired to J3, J4, and J5. These connections are shown in Figure 9-74.
Turbine Primary Trip Terminal Board TRPG

J1
125 V dc
Trip Solenoid 1 or 4 Trip Solenoid 2 or 5 Trip Solenoid 3 or 6 125 Vdc (N)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
125 Vdc (P) 125 Vdc (P) 125 Vdc (P) 125 Vdc (N) To Connectors JR1, JS1, JT1
x x x x x
To Connectors JR1, JS1, JT1

Flame 1 (L) Flame 2 (L) Flame 3 (L) Flame 4 (L) Flame 5 (L) Flame 6 (L) Flame 7 (L) Flame 8 (L)
x x x x x x x x
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
J2 Flame 1 (H) Flame 2 (H) Flame 3 (H) Flame 4 (H) Flame 5 (H) Flame 6 (H) Flame 7 (H) Flame 8 (H) Cable to TREG
J4 J5 J3
335 Vdc 335 Vdc 335 Vdc
Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from terminal board for maintenance
Figure 9-74. TRPG Terminal Board Wiring
DTRT - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Trip Transition Board

The DTRT board is a DIN-rail mounted trip transition board that interfaces the VTUR board with the DRLY board. DTRT allows up to six trip functions on the VTUR to interface with DRLY, instead of the normal TRPG board. Two VTUR boards can be connected to the DTRT to control a total of six relays on DRLY, as shown in Figure 9-75. Only the Simplex version of this board is available. DTRT transfers board identification from the ID chip on DRLY to VTUR for diagnostic purposes. DTRT has its own ID chip connnected to J2. DTRT must be used in all applications where trips from VTUR to DRLY are required. DTRT cannot be eliminated if the application requires only one VTUR. Three 37-pin D connectors for the three cables are provided. A high density Euro Block type terminal block is permanently mounted to the board with three screw connections for the ground connection (SCOM).
VTUR Boards
x RUN FAIL STAT x RUN FAIL STAT
DTRT Board J1 J3 To DRLY board (Six relay circuits) J2
VME Bus to VCMI
ID
J 5 To first DTUR board To second DTUR board

VTUR x
J 5
VTUR x
J3
J3
To first DTUR board To second DTUR board J4 J4
Three relay circuits Three relay circuits
Figure 9-75. DTRT Board
Installation
There is no shield termination strip with this design. The DTRT board slides into a plastic holder, which mounts on the DIN-rail. The three cables connecting VTUR and DRLY plug into the 37-pin D type connector as shown in Figure 9-76. The first three DRLY circuits are driven by the VTUR connected to J1, and the second three DRLY circuits are driven by the VTUR connected to J2. Three screws are provided on terminal block TB1 for the SCOM (ground) connection, which should be as short a distance as possible. DTRT must be used in all applications where trips from VTUR to DRLYs are required. DTRT is still required if the application only requires one VTUR
DTRT
TB1 1 2 3 J1 J2 J3
SCOM
Chassis Ground Chassis Ground Chassis Ground
DIN-rail mounting
Cable from first VTUR board Cable from second VTUR board To DRLY board (Six relay circuits)
Figure 9-76. DTRT Wiring and Cabling
DTUR - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Pulse Rate Terminal Board

The DTUR board is a compact pulse-rate terminal board, designed for DIN-rail mounting. The board accepts four passive pulse-rate transducers (magnetic pickups) for speed and flow measurement. It connects to the VTUR processor board with a 37-pin cable and a 15-pin cable as shown in Figure 9-77. These cables are identical to those used on the larger TTUR terminal board. DTUR boards can be stacked vertically on the DIN-rail to conserve cabinet space. VTUR only accommodates one DTUR board, and only the Simplex version is available. DTUR has on-board pulse rate signal conditioning identical to that on the TTUR. High density Euro Block type terminal blocks are permanently mounted to the board with two screws for the ground connection (SCOM). Two on-board ID chips identify the connectors and board to VTUR for system diagnostic purposes.
<R> Control Rack
DTUR Board
MPU1H 1
VTUR JR5
Noise Suppresion
#1 Magnetic Speed Pickup
MPU1L 2
NS
SCOM
f( ) Pr/D MUX A/D ID J5
MPU2H
MPU2L 4
NS
SCOM
Filter Clamp AC Coupling Filter Clamp AC Coupling Filter Clamp AC Coupling
MPU3H 5
MPU3L 6
NS
SCOM
MPU4H 7
JR1
J3
J4
MPU4L 8
NS
SCOM
Circuit Terminals
ID
Figure 9-77. DTUR Board
Installation
There is no shield termination strip with this design. The DTUR board slides into a plastic holder, which mounts on the DIN-rail. The magnetic pickups are wired directly to the terminal block which has 36 terminals as shown in Figure 9-78. Typically #18 AWG shielded twisted pair wiring is used. There are two screws for the SCOM (ground) connection, which should be as short a distance as possible.
MPU means Magnetic Pick Up
JR5
DTUR Screw Connections MPU 1 (Low) MPU 2 (Low) MPU 3 (Low) MPU 4 (Low) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35
Screw Connections MPU 1 (High) MPU 2 (High) MPU 3 (High) MPU 4 (High)
Cable to J5 on front of VTUR board JR1 37-pin "D" shell connector with latching fasteners
Chassis ground Cable to J3 connector in I/O rack for VTUR board
Chassis ground
SCOM Euro Block type terminal block
DIN-rail mounting
Figure 9-78. DTUR Wiring and Cabling
VVIB/TVIB - Vibration/Position
The Mark VI system uses Bently Nevada probes for shaft vibration monitoring. Up to 14 probes connect directly to the TVIB terminal board, two of which can be cabled to the VVIB board. The signals are processed by the VVIB board, and the digitized displacement and velocity signals are sent over the VME bus to the controller. If desired a Bently Nevada 3500 monitoring system can be cabled into the terminal board to permanently monitor turbine vibration. Also the type 2 terminal board (TVIBH2A) has BNC connectors allowing portable vibration data gathering equipment to be plugged in for predictive maintenance purposes. (The BNC signals include a 10 ohm isolating resistance.) These connectors are shown in Figure 9-79, and details of the TVIB board are shown in Figure 9-80.
TVIB Terminal Board x 37-pin "D" shell type connectors with latching fasteners VVIB VME Board
x RUN FAIL STAT
Vibration Signals
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
...JA1 ... ... . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... JB1 . ... ... . ... ... . ... ... .
JT1
JS1
Cable to Rack T VME Bus to VCMI
JC1
Vibration Signals
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 JD1 29 31 JR1 33 P2 P1 35 37 39 P6 P5 P4 P3 41 43 45 P10 P9 P8 P7 47 14 13 12 P11
Cable to Rack S
VVIB
x
J3
Shield Bar Plugs for Portable BentlyNevada Data Gathering & Monitoring Equipment Cables to fixed BentlyNevada 3500 Vibration Monitoring System Cable to VME Rack R Cable from second TVIB J4
Figure 9-79. Vibration Terminal Board, Processor Board, and Cabling
<R>
<S>
<T>
Terminal Board TVIBH2A N28V N28VR Current Limit 1 N24V1 S CL V 2 PR01H S <S> <T>
ID
JR1
J3
Vibration Board VVIB 28Vdc

Amp A/D
To Controller Sampling type A/D Converter (16 bit)
P s V R 3mA S O JP1A P,A 3 PR01L X S PCOM Vib. or Pos. Eight of the Prox. (P), or above ccts. P,V,A Seismic (S), or Accel (A), N28V or Velomiter S (V) JP1B CL Negative 25 N24V9 Volt Ref
S S S
JS1 N28V
J3
Same as <S>
ID
JT1 N28V
J3
TMR Applications Same as <T>
P R O X Position Prox
26 PR09H 27 PR09L
ID
JA1 Buffer Amplifiers

D B2 5
Four of the above ccts. PCOM N28V CL
JB1
D B2 5
J4
Buffer Amplifiers
P1-P8 JC1
D B2 5
J4
37 N24V13
S S S
P R O X
38 PR13H 39
PR13L
Reference or PCOM Keyphasor Prox. One of the above ccts for Mark VI. (Two of the above ccts for B/N P13-P14 Four cables to Bently Nevada 3500 System
Buffer Amplifiers
P9-P12 BNC JD1 Connectors
J4
D B9
Figure 9-80. TVIB Board, Vibration Probes, and Bently Nevada Interface
Operation
TVIB supports Proximitor, Seismic, Accelerometer, and Velomitor probes of the type supplied by Bently Nevada. Power for the vibration probes comes from the VVIB boards, in either Simplex or TMR mode. The probe signals return to VVIB where they are A/D converted and sent over the VME bus to the controller. Vibration, eccentricity, and axial position alarms and trip logic are generated in the controller. A 28 V dc source is supplied to the terminal board from the VME board for Proximitor power. In TMR systems, a diode high-select circuit selects the highest 28 V dc bus for redundancy. Regulators provide individual excitation sources, 23 to 26 V dc, short circuit protected. Probe inputs are sampled at high speed over discrete time periods. The maximum and minimum values are accumulated, the difference is taken (max-min) for vibration, and the results are filtered. The resulting peak to peak voltage is scaled to yield mils (peak to peak) displacement, or velocity.
Features
Vibration Functions
Vibration probe inputs are normally used for four protective functions in turbine applications as follows: Vibration: Proximity probes monitor the peak-to-peak radial displacement of the shaft (the shaft motion in the journal bearing) in two radial directions. This system uses non-contacting probes and Proximitors, and results in alarm, trip, and fault detection. Rotor Axial Position: A probe is mounted in a bracket assembly off the thrust bearing casing to observe the motion of the thrust collar on the turbine rotor. This system uses non-contacting probes and Proximitors, and results in thrust bearing wear alarm, trip, and fault detection. Differential Expansion: This application uses non-contacting probe(s) and Proximitor(s) and results in alarm, trip, and fault detection for excessive expansion differential between the rotor and the turbine casing. Rotor Eccentricity: A probe is mounted adjacent to the shaft to continuously sense the surface and update the turbine control. The calculation of eccentricity is made once per revolution while the turbine is on turning gear. Alarm and fault indications are provided.
Probes
The eight vibration inputs on each terminal board can be applied as either proximitor, accelerometer, seismic (velocity), or velomitor inputs. Jumpers on the terminal board are used to assign a specific vibration sensor type to each input point with the seismic type assigned to point (S), the velomitor type assigned to point (V), and the proximitor and accelerometer types sharing point (P/A). A proximitor reads a shaft keyway to generate a once per revolution KeyPhasor input for phase angle reference.
Alarms and Trips

Diagnostics perform a high/low (hardware) limit check on the input signal and a high/low system (software) limit check. The software limit check is adjustable in the field.
A probe fault, alarm, or trip condition will occur if either of an X or Y probe pair exceeds its limits. In addition, the application software will inhibit a vibration trip (the ac component) if a probe fault is detected based on the dc component. Position inputs for thrust wear protection, differential expansion, and eccentricity are monitored similar to the vibration inputs except only the dc component is used for a position indication. A 16-bit sampling type A/D converter is used with 14-bit resolution and overall circuit accuracy of 1% of full scale.
Vibration Monitoring and Analysis

Mark VI provides vibration protection and displays the basic vibration parameters Each input is actively isolated and the signals made available through four plugs for direct cabling to a Bently Nevada 3500 monitor. This configuration provides the maximum reliability by having a direct interface from the proximitors to the turbine control for trip protection and still retain the real-time data access to the Bently Nevada system for static and dynamic vibration monitoring. Note that the Mark VI displays the total vibration, the 1X vibration component and the 1X vibration phase angle, but it is not intended as a vibration analysis system. Fourteen BNC connectors on TVIB provide buffered signals available to portable data gathering equipment for predictive maintenance purposes. Buffered outputs have unity gain, 10 K ohm internal impedance, and can drive loads up to 1500 ohms.
Specification
Table 9-32. VVIB Specification Item Number of Channels Specification TVIB: 13 probes: 8 Vibration, 4 Position, 1 Key Phasor VVIB: 26 probes with two TVIB boards Measurement Displacement Displacement Velocity Velocity Velocity Velocity Velocity (track filter) Position Range 0 to 4.5 V pp 0 to 4.5 V pp 0 to 2.25 V p 0 to 2.25 V p 0 to 2.25 V p 0 to 2.25 V p 0 to 2.25 V p .5 to 20 V dc Accuracy 0 .030 V pp 0 .150 V pp Max [2% reading, 0.008 Vp] Max [5% reading, 0.008 Vp] Max [2% reading, 0.008 Vp] Max [5% reading, 0.008 Vp] 0 .015 Vp 0.2 V dc Frequency 5 to 200 Hz 200 to 500 Hz 5 to 200 Hz 200 to 500 Hz 5 to 200 Hz 200 to 500 Hz 10 to 233 Hz Air Gap (average) up to 14,000 rpm
Vibration Proximity Seismic Velomitor Accelerometer Position Phase Probe Power Probe Signal Sampling
Degrees 0 to 360 degrees 2 degrees (1X vibration component with respect to key slot) 24 V dc from the 28 V dc bus; each probe supply is current limited. 12 mA load per transducer
16-bit A/D converter with 14-bit resolution on the VVIB Sampling rate is 4,600 samples per second in fast scan mode (4,000 to 17,500 rpm) Sampling rate is 2,586 samples per second for nine or more probes (less than 4,000 rpm) All inputs are simultaneously sampled in time windows of 160 ms. If greater than 4,000 rpm, can use eight vibration channels, (others can be Prox/position) If less than 4,000 rpm, can use 16 vibration channels, and other probes Amplitude accuracy is 0.1% for signal to Bently Nevada 3500 vibration analysis system
Rated RPM Buffered outputs
Configuration
Table 9-33. VVIB Configuration Parameter Configuration System Limits Vib_PP_Fltr LMVib1A SysLim1Enable SysLim1Latch SysLim1Type SysLimit1 SysLim2Enable TMR_DiffLimt LMVib1B LMVib1C LMVib2A LMVib2B LMVib2C LMVib3A LMVib3B LMVib3C J3:IS200TVIBH1A GAP1_VIB1 VIB_Type Enable system limits First order filter time constant (sec) Vib, 1X component, for LM_RPM_A, input #1 - Card Enable, Disable 0.01 to 2 Point Edit (Input FLOAT) Description Choices
Point
Enable System Limit 1 Fault Check Latch System Limit 1 Fault System Limit 1 Check Type System Limit 1 - Vibration in mils (Prox) or Inch/sec (seismic, accel) Enable System Limit 2 (same configuration as above) Difference Limit for Voted TMR Inputs in Volts or Mils Vib, 1X component, for LM_RPM_B, #1 - Card Point Vib, 1X component, for LM_RPM_C, #1 - Card Point Vib, 1X component, for LM_RPM_A, #2 - Card Point Vib, 1X component, for LM_RPM_B, #2 - Card Point Vib, 1X component, for LM_RPM_C, #2 - Card Point Vib, 1X component, for LM_RPM_A, #3 - Card Point Vib, 1X component, for LM_RPM_B, #3 - Card Point Vib, 1X component, for LM_RPM_C, #3 - Card Point Vibration Terminal board, first of two Average Air Gap (for Prox) or DC volts (for others) Enable, Disable Latch, Not Latch >= or <= 100 to +100 Enable, Disable 100 to +100 Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT)
Card Point
Type of vibration probe Unused, PosProx, VibProx, VibProx-KPH1, VibProx-KPH2, VibLMAccel, VibVelomitor, KeyPhasor 0 to 2 0 to 90 Enable, Disable Latch, Not Latch >= or <= 100 to +100 Enable, Disable 100 to +100
VIB_Scale ScaleOff SysLim1Enable SysLim1Latch SysLim1Type SysLimit1 SysLim2Enabl TMR_DiffLimt
Volts/mil or Volts/ips Scale offset for Prox position only, in mils Enable System Limit 1 Latch the alarm System Limit 1 Check Type System Limit 1 GAP in negative volts (for Vel) or positive mils (Prox) Enable System Limit 2 (same configuration as above) Difference Limit for Voted TMR Inputs in Volts or Mils
Vib1 SysLim1Enable GAP2_VIB2 Vib2 GAP9_POS1 GAP13_KPH1 J4:IS200TVIBH1A GAP14_VIB9 Vib9 GAP22_POS5 GAP26_KPH2 Card Points Signals L3DIAG_VVIB1 L3DIAG_VVIB2 L3DIAG_VVIB3 SysLim1GAP1 : SysLim1GAP26 SysLim2GAP1 : SysLim2GAP26 SysLim1VIB1 : SysLim1VIB16 SysLim1ACC1 : SysLim1ACC9 SysLim2VIB1 : SysLim2VIB16 SysLim2ACC1 : SysLim2ACC9 RPM_KPH1 RPM_KPH2 Vib1X1
Vibration, displacement (pk-pk) or velocity (pk) - Card
Point Edit
(Input FLOAT)
Point
System limits configured as above Second Vibration Probe of 8 - Card Point Vibration, displacement (pk-pk) or velocity (pk) - Card Enable, Disable Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT)
Point
First Position Probe of 4 - Card Point Key Phasor Probe air gap - Card Point Second Vibration Terminal board First Vibration Probe of 8 - Card Point Vibration, displacement (pk-pk) or velocity (pk) - Card
Connected, Not Connected Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point edit (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) Type BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT
Point
First Position Probe of 4 - Card Point Key Phasor Probe air gap - Card Point Description - Point Edit (Enter Signal Connection) Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Gap signal limit : Gap signal limit Gap signal limit : Gap signal limit Vibration signal limit : Vibration signal limit Acceleration signal limit : Acceleration signal limit Vibration signal limit : Vibration signal limit Acceleration signal limit : Acceleration signal limit Speed RPM, of KP #1 Speed RPM, of KP #2 Vibration, 1X component only, displacement
Direction Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
: Vib1X16 Vib1XPH1 : Vib1XPH16 LM_RPM_A LM_RPM_B LM_RPM_C
: Vibration, 1X component only, displacement Angle of 1X component to KP : Angle of 1X component to KP ----------------------
Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output
FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT
Installation
Fourteen vibration probes are wired to the two terminal blocks, three wires per probe. Jumpers JP1 through JP8 select the type of the first eight probes. Refer to Figure 9-81 for wiring and connector pin assignments. Use of connectors JA1, JB1, JC1, and JD1 for a Bently Nevada system is optional, and there are no permanent cable connections to BNCs P1 through P14.
Vibration Terminal Board TVIBH2A
JPxB B/N Buffer:
P,V,A P,A
JPxA Sensor Input: V
Jumper Positions Probe Selection Jumpers
PR01 (H) N24V02 PR02 (L) PR03 (H) N24V04 PR04 (L) PR05 (H) N24V06 PR06 (L) PR07 (H) N24V08 PR08 (L)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
N24V01 PR01 (L) PR02 (H) N24V03 PR03 (L) PR04 (H) N24V05 PR05 (L) PR06 (H) N24V07 PR07 (L) PR08 (H)
Vibration probes
JP1B JP1A JP2B JP2A JP3B JP3A JP4B JP4A JP5B JP5A JP6B JP6A JP7B JP7A JP8B JP8A
Connectors JR1, JS1, JT1, to VME Racks Connectors JA1,JB1, JC1, JD1 to optional Bentley Nevada 3500 system Position probes P2 BNC connectors for portable data gathering equipment
PR09 (H) N24V10 PR10 (L) PR11 (H) N24V12 PR12 (L) PR13 (H) N24V14 PR14 (L)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
N24V09 PR09 (L) PR10 (H) N24V11 PR11 (L) PR12 (H) N24V13 PR13 (L) PR14 (H)
P1
P6 P5 P4 P3 P10 P9 P8 P7
Reference probe P14 P13 P12 P11 Bently Nevada probe Px, BNC Connector P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14
P1 is PR01 P2 is PR02 and so on. P14 is for Bently Nevada Jumper JPXA: S = Seismic V = Velomitor P = Proximitor A = Accelerometer Jumper JPXB: S = Seismic V = Velomitor P = Proximitor A = Accelerometer
Ckt 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14
Connector Pin Assignments Sensor Conn Comm Sign Shld Vib 1 JA1 2 3 4 Vib 2 JA1 6 7 8 Vib 3 JA1 10 11 12 Vib 4 JA1 24 23 22 Vib 5 JB1 2 3 4 Vib 6 JB1 6 7 8 Vib 7 JB1 10 11 12 Vib 8 JB1 24 23 22 Pos 1 JC1 2 3 4 Pos 2 JC1 6 7 8 Pos 3 JC1 10 11 12 Pos 4 JC1 24 23 22 Ref probeJD1 3 1 2 B/N only JD1 9 5 4
Figure 9-81. Terminal Board TVIB Wiring
DVIB - Simplex DIN-rail Mounted Vibration Terminal Board

The DVIB board is a compact vibration terminal board, designed for DIN-rail mounting. (Designed to meet UL 1604 specification for operation in a 65 C class 1, division 2 environment.) The board accepts eight vibration, four position, and one keyphasor input. It connects to the VVIB processor board with a 37-pin cable as shown in Figure 9-82. These cables are identical to those used on the larger TVIB terminal board. VVIB accommodates two DVIB boards, and only the simplex version is available. High-frequency decoupling to ground on all signals is the same as on TVIB. High density Euro Block type terminal blocks are permanently mounted to the board with two screws for the ground connection (SCOM). An on-board ID chip identifies the board to VVIB for system diagnostic purposes.
<R> DVIB Board N28V N28VR Amp Current Limit 1 N24V1 S CL V 2 PR01H S
ID
JR1
J3
Vibration Board VVIB 28Vdc

A/D
To Controller Sampling type A/D Converter (16 bit)
P R S V S O JP1A P,A 3 PR01L X S Vib. or Pos. Eight of the Prox. (P), or P28V above ccts. Seismic (S), or Accel (A), N28V or Velomiter (V)
CL 25 N24V9
3mA
PCOM
S S S
P R O X Position Prox
26 PR09H 27
PR09L
J4
Four of the above ccts. PCOM N28V CL
37 N24V13
S S S
P R O X
38 39
PR13H PR13L
Reference or Keyphasor Prox.
PCOM
Figure 9-82. DVIB Board
Installation
There is no shield terminal strip with this design. The DVIB board slides into a plastic holder, which mounts on the DIN-rail. The vibration probes are wired directly to the terminal block which has 42 terminals as shown in Figure 9-83. Typically #18 AWG shielded twisted triplet wiring is used. There are two screws for the SCOM (ground) connection, which should be as short a distance as possible.
DIN Vibration Terminal Board DVIB
Screw Connections V 37-pin "D" shell connector with latching fasteners JR1 V V V V V Cable to J3 connector in I/O rack for the VVIB board V V JP1A S JP2A S JP3A S JP4A S JP5A S JP6A S JP7A S JP8A S P P P P P P P P PR01 (H) N24V02 PR02 (L) PR03 (H) N24V04 PR04 (L) PR05 (H) N24V06 PR06 (L) PR07 (H) N24V08 PR08 (L) PR09 (H) N24V10 PR10 (L) PR11 (H) N24V12 PR12 (L) PR13 (H) SCOM 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41
Screw Connections N24V01 PR01 (L) PR02 (H) N24V03 PR03 (L) PR04 (H) IN24V05 PR05 (L) PR06 (H) N24V07 PR07 (L) PR08 (H) N24V09 PR09 (L) PR10 (H) N24V11 PR11 (L) PR12 (H) N24V13 PR13 (L) SCOM
Vib 1-8
Pos 1-4
Ref Probe
SCOM
DIN-rail mounting
Figure 9-83. DVIB Wiring and Cabling
VGEN/TGEN - Generator Board

The generator board VGEN and its terminal board TGEN monitor the generator three-phase voltage and currents, and calculate three-phase power and power factor. The boards and cabling are shown in Figure 9-84. For large steam turbine applications, VGEN provides the Power Load Unbalance (PLU) and Early Valve Actuation (EVA) functions, using fast acting solenoids located on the TRLY terminal board.
TGEN Terminal Board TB1
VGEN VME Board 37-pin "D" shell type connectors with latching fasteners
x RUN FAIL STAT
Current Inputs & Gen PT Signals
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
JT1
JS1
Cable to VME Rack T VME Bus to VCMI
TB2 Cable to VME Rack S
Gen CT Signals
TB3
JR1
VGEN x
TB4
x
J3
Shield Bar
Cable to VME Rack R J4
Cable to Optional TRLY, for Fast Acting Solenoids Figure 9-84. Generator Terminal Board, Processor Board, and Cabling
Operation
VGEN monitors two, three-phase potential transformer (PT) inputs, and three, onephase current transformer (CT) inputs. On TGEN there are four analog inputs which can be configured for 4-20 mA or 5, 10 V dc.
Test points on the generator and bus voltages and currents are for checking the phase of the input signals. Signal conversion and calculations of power, power factor and frequency take place on the VGEN board. Details of the terminal board are shown in Figure 9-85. Note TGEN may be used with on VGEN board (Simplex) or three VGEN boards (TMR).
<R> <S> <T>
Terminal Board TGEN

Analog Inputs TB1 +24 Vdc +/-5,10 Vdc 4-20 ma Return
01 03 02 04
Controller
4 Circuits per Term. Board Noise Suppression.

Current Limit
P28VV
P28V, R S T
Vdc
JP1A
20 ma
Generator Board VGEN
250 ohms
JP1B
Open 17 18
A B C A B C H1 H2 L1 L2 H1 H2 L1 L2 H1 H2 L1 L2
Return PCOM
115 Vrms yields 1.5333 Vrms, Gen & Bus
JR1
J3
Shown for <R> +28 Vdc

A/D
TB1 Generator 3-Phase Volts (115 Vac) Bus 3-Phase Volts (115 Vac) TB2 Current Phase A (115 Vac) TB3 Current Phase B (115 Vac) TB4 Current Phase C (115 Vac)
PCOM
19 20 21 22 23 24 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 TB4 Noise Suppr.

1:2000 1:2000 1:2000
Test Points TP-GA TP-GB TP-GC TP-BA TP-BB TP-BC TP-IA1 TP-IA2 TP-IB1 TP-IB2 TP-IC1 TP-IC2
100 ohms 0.01% 100 ohms 0.01% 100 ohms 0.01% ID ID ID
JS1
J3
Buffer
To TRLY from <R> <S> <T>
Same for <S>

JT1 J3
Same for <T>
Connectors at bottom of VME Racks 5 amp input yields 0.25 Vrms (line-neutral) or 0.433 Vrms (line-line)
Figure 9-85. TGEN Board Showing Potential and Current Transformer Inputs
Features
VGEN monitors generator three-phase power, and supplies the Power Load Unbalance (PLU) and Early Valve Actuation (EVA) functions for large steam turbines.
Power Monitoring
The generator and bus PT inputs are three-wire, open delta, voltage measurements that are used to calculate all three line-to-line voltages. They are not used for automatic synchronizing which requires two separate single-phase PT inputs. Each PT input is nominally 115 V rms, and the PTs are magnetically isolated. Three single-phase CT inputs are provided with a normal current range of 0 to 5 A continuous. The CTs are magnetically isolated on TGEN. Terminations for the CTs are on non-pluggable terminal blocks with captive lugs accepting are up to #10 AWG wires. Test points are provided for all PT and CT inputs to verify the phase in the field. The following parameters are calculated from these inputs: Total MWatts Total MVars Total MVA Power Factor Bus Frequency (5 to 66 Hz)
The four analog inputs can accept 420 mA inputs or 5, 10 V dc inputs. A +24 V dc source is available for all four circuits with individual current limits for each circuit. The 420 mA transducer can be connected to use the +24 V dc source from the turbine control or as a self-powered source. A jumper is located on the terminal board to select between current and voltage inputs for each circuit. High frequency and 50/60 Hz noise is reduced with an analog hardware filter
Specification
Table 9-34. VGEN Specification Item Inputs to TGEN and VGEN Specification 2 Three-phase Generator and Bus PTs 3 One-phase Generator CTs 4 Analog Inputs (420 mA, 5, 10 V dc) 12 Relay Outputs (for large steam turbines) Nominal 115 V rms with range of interest of 10 to 120% Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz with range of interest 25 to 66 Hz Magnetic isolation to 1,500 V rms and loading less than 3 VA Input measurement resolution is 0.1% Input accuracy is 0.5% of rated V rms from 45 to 66 Hz Input accuracy is 1.0% of rated V rms from 25 to 45 Hz Input loading less than 3 VA per circuit Normal current range is 0 to 5 A with overange to 10 A Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz with range of interest 45 to 66 Hz Magnetic isolation to 1,500 V rms Input accuracy 0.5% of full scale (5A) with resolution of 0.1% FS Input burden less than 0.5 ohms per circuit
Outputs from VGEN via TRLY Generator and Bus Voltages
Generator Current Inputs
Analog Inputs
Current Inputs: 420 mA Voltage Inputs: 5 V dc or 10 V dc Transducers can be up to 300 m (984 ft) from the control cabinet with a two-way cable resistance of 15 ohms. Input burden resistor on TGEN is 250 ohms. Jumper selection of single ended or self powered inputs Jumper selection of voltage or current inputs Analog Input Filter: Breaks at 72 and 500 radians/sec Ac Common Mode Rejection (CMR) 60 dB Dc Common Mode Rejection (CMR) 80 dB Sampling type 16-bit A/D Converter, 14 bit resolution Accuracy 0.1% overall 100 Hz Total MWatts and MVars have an accuracy of 1% FS, and 0.5% for totalizing. Total MVA and Power Factor have an accuracy of 1% full scale. Bus frequency (5 to 66 Hz) has an accuracy of 0.1%.
Conversion Accuracy Frame Rate Calculated values
Configuration
Table 9-35. Typical VGEN Configuration Parameter Configuration PLU_Enab PLU_Del_Enab MechPwrInput PLU_Rate PLU_Unbal PLU_Delay Press Ratg Current Ratg EVA_Enab EVA_ExtEnab EVA_Rate EVA_Unbal EVA_Delay MW_Ratg IVT_Enab Min_MA_Input MAx_MA_Input SystemFreq J3:IS200TGENH1A AnalogIn1 Input Type First Analog Input (of four) - Card Point Type of analog input Enable PLU function Enable PLU delay Mech. Power via TMR (first 3 MA ccts), Dual Xducer (Max), Single Xducer, or Signal Space Select PLU threshold rate PLU Unbalance threshold % PLU delay, secs Reheat press equiv. to 100% Mech. Power Generator Current equivalent to 100% Elect Power Enable EVA function Enable external EVA function Select EVA threshold rate EVA unbalance threshold % EVA drop out time, seconds Generator MW equivalent to 100 % Electrical Power Enable IVT function Minimum MA for Healthy 4-20 mA Input Maximum MA for Healthy 4-20 mA Input System Frequency in Hz Enable, Disable Enable, Disable TMR_1 thru 3, Dual 1 and 2, SMX_1, SMX_2, Signal Space ME, LO, HI 20 to 80 0 to 10 50 to 600 1,000 to 60,000 Enable, Disable Enable, Disable LO, ME, HI 20 to 80 0 to 10 10 to 1,500 Enable, Disable 0 to 21 0 to 21 50 or 60 Connected, Not Connected Point Edit (Input FLOAT) Description Choices
Unused, 420 ma, 5 V, 10 V
Low Input Low Value System Limits GenPT_Vab_KV PT_Input PT_Output Phase Shift System Limits BusPT_Vab_KV GenCT_A CT_Input CT_Output System Limits J4:IS200TRLYH1A Relay01_Tst Relay Output RelayDropTime Card Points Signals L3DIAG_VGEN1 L3DIAG_VGEN2 L3DIAG_VGEN3 SysLim1Anal1 : SysLim1Anal4 SysLim2Anal1 : SysLim2Anal4 SysL1GenPTab SysL1GenPTbc SysL1GenPTca SysL1BusPTab SysL1BusPTbc SysL1BusPTca SysL2GenPTab SysL2GenPTbc
Input MA at low value Input value in Engineering Units at low MA (configuration inputs the same as for TBAI) Standard System Limits (see TBAI configuration) Generator Potential Transformer Input "ab", (first of 3)
10 to 20 3.4028e+038 to 3.4028e+038
Point Edit 1 to 1,000 60 to 150
(Input FLOAT)
- Card Point
PT Input in KiloVolts rms for PT_output PT Output in Volts rms for PT_Input-typically 115 Compensating Phase Shift, applied to PT signals Standard System Limits (similar to Analog Inputs) Bus Potential Transformer Input "ab", (first of three) configuration similar to GenPT - Card Point Generator Current Transformer A (first of three) - Card Point Edit Point Edit (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT)
Zero, Plus 30, Plus 60, Minus 30, Minus 60
Point
CT Input in Amperes rms for rated CT_Output Rated CT Output in Amperes rms, typically 5 Standard System Limits (similar to genPT) Connected, Not Connected Fast Acting Solenoid #1 Test, first of 12 relays - Card Point Edit (Output BIT) 100 to 50,000 1 to 5
Point
FAS Valve Type Relay dropout time Description Point Edit (Enter Signal Name) Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic System Limit 1 exceeded on Analog cct #1 : System Limit 1 exceeded on Analog cct #4 System Limit 2 exceeded on Analog cct #1 : System Limit 2 exceeded on Analog cct #4 System Limit 1 exceeded on Gen PT, Vab System Limit 1 exceeded on Gen PT, Vbc System Limit 1 exceeded on Gen PT, Vca System Limit 1 exceeded on Bus PT, Vab System Limit 1 exceeded on Bus PT, Vbc System Limit 1 exceeded on Bus PT, Vca System Limit 2 exceeded on Gen PT, Vab System Limit 2 exceeded on Gen PT, Vbc Unused, CV, Tst Only, CV EVA 0 to 5 Direction Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Type BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT
SysL2GenPTca SysL2BusPTab SysL2BusPTbc SysL2BusPTca SysL1GenCTa SysL1GenCTb SysL1GenCTc SysL2GenCTa SysL2GenCTb SysL2GenCTc Relay01_Fdbk : Relay12_Fdbk L10PLU_EVT L10EVA_EVA GenMW GenMVAR GenMVA GenPF BusFreq PLU_Tst EVA_Tst IV_Trgr EVA_ExtCmd EVA_ExtPrm TN_Hz MechPower AnalogIn1 : AnalogIn4 GenPT_Vab_KV GenPT_Vbc_KV GenPT_Vca_KV BusPT_Vab_KV BusPT_Vbc_KV BusPT_Vca_KV GenCT_A GenCT_B
System Limit 2 exceeded on Gen PT, Vca System Limit 2 exceeded on Bus PT, Vab System Limit 2 exceeded on Bus PT, Vbc System Limit 2 exceeded on Bus PT, Vca System Limit 1 exceeded on Gen CT, Phase A System Limit 1 exceeded on Gen CT, Phase B System Limit 1 exceeded on Gen CT, Phase C System Limit 2 exceeded on Gen CT, Phase A System Limit 2 exceeded on Gen CT, Phase B System Limit 2 exceeded on Gen CT, Phase C Status of Relay 01 : Status of Relay 12 Power Load Unbalance event Early Valve Actuation event Generator MWatts Generator MVars Generator MVA Generator Power Factor, 0/1/0 Bus Frequency, Hz Power Load Unbalance Test Early Valve Actuation Test Intercept Valve Trigger Command Early Valve Actuation External Command Early Valve Actuation External Permissive PLL Center Frequency, Hz Mech Power, percent, when config via signal space Analog Input 1 : Analog Input 4 Kilo-Volts RMS Kilo-Volts RMS Kilo-Volts RMS Kilo-Volts RMS Kilo-Volts RMS Kilo-Volts RMS Generator Amperes RMS, phase A Generator Amperes RMS, phase B, same config as Phase A
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT
GenCT_C Relay01_Tst : Relay12_Tst
Generator Amperes RMS, phase C, same config as Phase A Fast Acting Sol #1 Test : Fast Acting Sol #12 Test
Input Output Output Output
FLOAT BIT BIT BIT
Diagnostics
Diagnostics perform a high/low (hardware) limit check on the input signal and a high/low system (software) limit check. The software limit check is adjustable in the field. Open wire detection is provided for voltage inputs, and relay drivers and coil currents are monitored. Connectors JR1, JS1, and JT1, on the terminal board have their own ID device which is interrogated by the I/O board. The ID device is a read-only chip coded with the terminal board serial number, board type, revision number, and the plug location. .
Installation
The analog current and PT inputs are wired to terminal block 1. The CTs are wired to special terminal blocks TB2, 3, and 4, which cannot be unplugged. This protects against an open CT circuit. Jumpers J1A,B through J4A,B set the desired input current or voltage on analog inputs 1 through 4. The wiring connections are shown in Figure 9-86.
Generator Terminal Board TGEN Analog Input Jumpers TB1

x
JT1
20ma
VDC RET
OPEN
20 mA (1) RET (1) 20mA (2) RET (2) 20mA (3) RET (3) 20mA (4) RET (4) PCOM GenB BusA
BusC
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
P24V (1) VDC (1) P24V (2) VDC (2) P24V (3) VDC (3) P24V (4) VDC (4) PCOM GenA GenC BusB
JP1A
JP1B
JP2A JP3A JP4A
JP2B JP3B JP4B JS1
CurAH1 CurAH2 CurAL1 CurAL2 CurBH1 CurBH2 CurBL1 CurBL2 CurCH1 CurCH2 CurCL1 CurCL2
1 2 TB2 3 4 1 2 TB3 3 4 1 2 TB4 3 4
JR1
Test Points
Terminal Block 1 can be unplugged from terminal board for maintenance. TB2, TB3, TB4 are not pluggable. Figure 9-86. Terminal Board TGEN and Wiring
VPYR/TPYR - Pyrometer Board

The Optical Pyrometer Board (VPYR) provides a dynamic temperature profile of the rotating turbine blades, and computes temperature conditions that can lead to a trip. The Pyrometer terminal board (TPYR) is wired to two infrared TBTMS thermometers, known as Pyrometers, and to two KeyPhasor Proximitor probes for shaft reference. Dedicated analog to digital converters on VPYR provide sampling rates up to 200,000 samples per second for burst data from two of the temperature channels. Fast temperature data is made available for display and off-line evaluation. The terminal board has Simplex and TMR capability, as shown in Figure 9-87.
TPYR Terminal Board VPYR VME Board
x
Pyrometer Wiring
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
JT1
RUN FAIL STAT
VME Bus to VCMI JS1 Cables to VME Racks S and T
KeyPhasor Wiring
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 x
JR1 Cable to VME Rack R Connectors on VME Rack

VPYR x
J3
Shield Bar J4 BarrierType Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from board for maintenance
Figure 9-87. Pyrometer Terminal Board, Processor, and Cabling
Operation
Analog signals from the terminal board, shown in Figure 9-88, are cabled to the VPYR processor board where signal sampling and conversion take place. VPYR calculates the temperature profiles and runs turbine protection algorithms using both pyrometer signals. If a trip is indicated and the signals are validated, VPYR issues the trip signal.
Chan A
1 2
TPYR Terminal Board

P24A PCOM N24A PCOM 20ma A1 RetA1 20ma A2 RetA2
<T> <S> <R> VPYR Pyrometer Board JR1 Fan Distrib -ution P28VR N28VR
ID All others
Current P28VX Limiter Current N28VX Limiter 100 ohms Average
P Y R O M E T E R
J3 Chan A Fast Fast A/D sampling Chan B Fast Fast A/D sampling
3 4 5 6 7 8
Max-Pk Avg-Pk Fast
9 20ma A3 10 RetA3 11 20ma A4 12 RetA4
Mux
A/D
JS1 P28VS N28VS

ID
J3 Same for <S>
Chan B
13 P24B Current 14 PCOM Limiter
P28VX N28VX
P Y R O M E T E R
15 N24B Current 16 PCOM Limiter 17 20ma B1 18 RetB1 19 20ma B2 20 RetB2 21 20ma B3 22 RetB3 23 20ma B4 24 RetB4
Avg
Max Pk
JT1
Avg-Pk
J3 Same for<T>
Fast
P28VT N28VT
ID
P R O X
30 N24Pr1 Current Limiter 31 PrH1 32 PrL1
N28VX
KeyPhasor#1
P R O X
33 N24Pr2 Current Limiter 34 PrH2 35 PrL2
P28VX N28VX N28VX
P28VR P28VS P28VT N28VR N28VS N28VT
KeyPhasor#2
Noise Suppression on all Inputs & Power Outputs
Figure 9-88. TPYR Terminal Board and Processor Board
Features
Optical Pyrometer Measurements
Two infrared pyrometers dynamically measure the temperature profile of the rotating turbine blades. Each pyrometer is powered by a +24 V dc and a 24 V dc source on the terminal board, diode selected from voltages supplied by the three VPYR boards. Four 420 mA signals are returned from each pyrometer, representing the following blade measurements: The average temperature The maximum peak temperature The average peak temperature A fast dynamic profile, with 30 kHz bandpass, providing the full signature.
Each 420 mA input generates a voltage across a resistor which is sent to the VPYR board where it is multiplexed and converted. A dedicated A/D converter is used to sample the fast input (#4) at up to 200,000 samples per second. VPYR can be configured for different numbers of turbine buckets, with up to 30 temperature samples per bucket.
KeyPhasor Inputs
Two keyphasors are used for shaft position reference, one as a backup. These keyphasor probes and associated circuitry are identical to those used with TVIB/VVIB. They sense a shaft keyway or pedestal to provide a time stamp.
Turbine Protection Algorithm

Fast burst data is used for the protection algorithms. One peak temperature per bucket is isolated and the highest for that revolution is selected. The delta temperature compared to the previous revolution is calculated (the rate of change) and compared to a calculated value which uses configurable parameters. Three of these are computed using different parameters. Similarly a distance variable is computed by taking the difference between the revolution peak and a peak taken y samples ago, where y is configurable. This delta is also compared to a configurable value. Finally the three rate signals and one distance signal are logically combined with permissives and the other channel trip condition to produce the trip signal.
Diagnostics
VPYR provides system limit checking on the KeyPhasor gap signals. The two pyrometer inputs are compared against configuration limits to determine if they are tracking, and the fast data is compared with other inputs to check validity. Connectors JR1, JS1, and JT1, on the terminal board have their own ID device which is interrogated by the I/O board. The ID device is a read-only chip coded with the terminal board serial number, board type, revision number, and the plug location.
Specification
Table 9-36. VPYR Board Specifications Item Number of Inputs (TPYR and VPYR) Current Inputs from Pyrometers Specification 2 Pyrometers, each with 4 analog 420 mA current signals 2 Key Phasor probes, each with 0.5 to 20 V dc inputs 4-20 mA across a 100 ohm resistor Common Mode Rejection: Dc up to 5 V dc, CMRR of 80 dB Ac up to 5 Volt peak, CMRR of 60 dB Measurement accuracy of 0.1 % full scale, 14-bit resolution Bandwidth of 0 to 100 Hz on 6 slow inputs using multiplexed A/D converter Bandwidth of 0 to 30,000 Hz on two fast inputs using dedicated A/D converters, sampling at 200,000 per sec. Input voltage range of 0.5 to 20 V dc Common Mode Rejection: CMR of 5 Volt, CMRR of 50 dB at 50/60 Hz Accuracy 2 % of full scale (0.2 V dc) Dc level detection typically 0.2 V/mil sensitivity Speed measurement 2 to 5,610 RPM with accuracy of 0.1 % of reading Pyrometers have individual power supplies, current limited: P24V source is diode selected, +22 to +30 V dc, 0.175 Amp N24V source is diode selected, -22 to -30 V dc, 0.175 Amp Rated RPM up to 5,100 RPM Number of Buckets per stage, up to 92 Number of samples per bucket, up to 30 Fast inputs sampled in bursts covering three revolutions, at twice per second.
Keyphasor Inputs
Device Excitation
Measurement Parameters
Like all I/O boards, VPYR is configured using the Control System Toolbox. This software usually runs on a data-highway connected CIMPLICITY station or workstation. Table 9-37 summarizes the configuration choices and defaults. For details refer to GEH-6403, Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Turbine Controller.
Table 9-37. Typical VPYR Configuration Module Parameter Calibration System Limits Min_MA_Input Max_MA_Input RPMrated BuckSamples BuckOffset_A BuckSpan_A BuckNumb_A SetptR1_A SetptR1B_A Enables or Disables all System Limit Checking Min MA for healthy 420 mA Input Max MA for healthy 420 mA Input Rated turbine RPM Minimum samples per bucket at 110 percent speed Offset from key to the first bucket, % bucket, Pyr A Percent of bucket to include in Protection Algorithm, Pyr A Number of Buckets, Pyr A Setpoint, Rate 1, Pyr A Setpoint, Rate 1, Bias, Avg temp, Pyr A Enable, Disable 0 to 21 0 to 21 0 to 10,000 10 to 30 0 to 100 0 to 100 30 to 92 0 to 30 1 to 1 Description Choices
SetptR2_A SetptR2B_A SetptR3_A SetptR3B_A SetptD_A SetptDB_A SetptDDepth_A Rate2Enab_A Rate3Enab_A DistEnab_A
Setpoint, Rate 2, Pyr A Setpoint, Rate 2, Bias, Avg temp, Pyr A Setpoint, Rate 3, Pyr A Setpoint, Rate 3, Bias, Avg temp, Pyr A Setpoint distance, Pyr A Setpoint distance. Bias, Avg Temperature, Pyr A Setpoint, Depth of the Distance measurement, Pyr A Enable, Temperature rate 2, Pyr A Enable, Temperature rate 3, Pyr A Enable Temperature rate 3, Pyr A Same Configuration for Channel B Pyrometer
0 to 30 1 to 1 0 to 30 1 to 1 0 to 30 1 to 1 0 to 30 Enable, Disable Enable, Disable Enable, Disable
J3:IS200TPYRH1A SlowAvg_A Input Use Low_Input Low_Value High_Input High_Value TMR_Diff SlowMXPk_A SlowAvgPk_A FastAvg_A SlowAvg_B SlowMXPk_B SlowAvgPk_B FastAvg_B GAP_KPH1 VIB-Type VIB_Scale KPH_Thrshld KPH_Type SysLim GAP_KPH2
Terminal board 1 connected to VPYR via J3 Slow, Average temperature, Pyr A - Card Point Is this point used? Input MA at Low Value Input value in Engineering Units at Low MA Input MA at High Value Input Value in Engineering Units at High MA Difference Limit for Voted TMR Inputs in % of (High Value-Low Value) Slow, Max Peak Temperature, Pyr A (configuration similar to above) - Card Point Slow, Average Peak Temperature, Pyr A - Card Point Fast, Average Temperature, Pyr A - Card Point Slow, Average Temperature, Pyr B - Card Point Slow, Max Peak Temperature, Pyr B - Card Point Slow, Average Peak Temperature, Pyr B - Card Pt Fast, Average Temperature, Pyr B - Card Point Air Gap, Keyphasor #1 - Card Point Configurable Item Volts/mil
Connected, Not connected Point Edit (Input FLOAT)
Used, Unused 0 to 21 3.4e+038 to 3.4e+038 0 to 21 3.4e+038 to 3.4e+038 0 to 100 Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT)
Used, Not used 0 to 2
Voltage difference from gap voltage where Keyphasor 1 to 5 Trigger Type of Pulse Generator System Limits 1 and 2, and TMR same as above Slot, Pedestal Standard Choices (Input FLOAT)
Air Gap, Keyphasor #2, config. Same as above - Card Point Edit Point
Card Points (Signals) L3DIAG_VPYR1 L3DIAG_VPYR2 L3DIAG_VPYR3 TripPyrA TripPyrB KeyPh1Act KeyPh2Act SysLim1KP1 SysLim2KP1 SysLim1KP2 SysLim2KP2 FastMxMxPk_A FastAgMxPk_A FastMnMnPk_A FastAgMnPk_A FastMxMxPk_B FastAgMxPk_B FastMnMnPk_B FastAgMnPk_B RPM_KPH1 RPM_KPH2 TripBuckIx_A TripBuckNb_A TripBuckIx_B TripBuckNb_B LogTrigger TurbRPM SlowAvg_A SlowMXPk_A SlowAvgPk_A FastAvg_A SlowAvg_B SlowMXPk_B SlowAvgPk_B FastAvg_B GAP_KPH1 GAP_KPH1
Description Point Edit (Enter Signal Name) Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Bucket Temp Rate Trip, Pyrometer A Bucket Temp Rate Trip, Pyrometer B Keyphasor 1 Active Keyphasor 2 Active System Limit System Limit System Limit System Limit Fast, Max of the Max Peaks Temp, Pyr A Fast, Average of the Max Peaks Temp, Pyr A Fast, Min of the Min Peaks Temp, Pyr A Fast, Average of the Min Peaks, Pyr A Fast, Max of the Max Peaks Temp, Pyr B Fast, Average of the Max Peaks Temp, Pyr B Fast, Min of the Min Peaks Temp, Pyr B Fast, Average of the Min Peaks, Pyr B RPM Keyphasor #1 RPM Keyphasor #2 Index of the first Bucket causing trip, Pyr A Number of Buckets causing trip, Pyr A Index of the first Bucket causing trip, Pyr B Number of Buckets causing trip, Pyr B When true, records freeze, two before, one after Turbine Speed in RPM Slow, Average Temperature, Pyr A Slow, Max Peak Temperature, Pyr A (configuration similar to above) Slow, Average Peak Temperature, Pyr A Fast, Average Temperature, Pyr A Slow, Average Temperature, Pyr B Slow, Max Peak Temperature, Pyr B Slow, Average Peak Temperature, Pyr B Fast, Average Temperature, Pyr B Air Gap, Keyphasor #1 Air Gap, Keyphasor #1
Direction Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Type BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT
Installation
The two optical pyrometers are wired to the first terminal block on TPYR, and the two KeyPhasor probes are wired to the second terminal block. Power comes in through the JR1, JS1, and JT1 connectors. There are no jumpers as on the TVIB board. The wiring connections are shown in Figure 9-89.
TPYR Terminal Board
JR1
Pyr A wiring
Pyr B wiring
PCOM1 (A) PCOM2 (A) Ret (A1) Ret (A2) Ret (A3) Ret (A4) PCOM1 (B) PCOM2 (B) Ret (B1) Ret (B2) Ret (B3) Ret (B4)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
P24 (A) N24 (A) 20ma (A1) 20ma (A2) 20ma (A3) 20ma (A4) P24 (B) N24 (B) 20ma (B1) 20ma (B2) 20ma (B3) 20ma (B4)
Cable to <R> JS1
x x x
Key phasors 1&2
N24 Pr (1) PrL (1) PrH (2)
x x x x x x x x x x
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
Cable to <S> PrH (1) N24Pr (2) PrL (2) JT1
Cable to <T>
Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from terminal board for maintenance Figure 9-89. Terminal Board TPYR and Wiring
VSCA/DSCB - Serial Communications Board

The Serial Communications Board (VSCA) provides I/O interfaces with external devices, using RS232C, RS422, and RS485 serial communications (see Figure 9-90). Currently the IS200VSCAH2A version is available. The associated Din-Rail mounted Serial Communications Terminal Board (DSCB) is wired to the external devices, which include intelligent pressure sensors such as the smart Honeywell Pressure Transducers (see Figure 9-91). Connectivity between VSCA and the DSCB terminal board(s) is through the J6 and J7 front panel connectors. These are parallel connected, each using the a 37-pin D shell connector, with group shielded twisted pair wiring. Connectivity between the terminal board and the external device is through the Euro Block (Phoenix type), using screw terminations and twisted shielded pair, AWG#18, wiring. The DSCB terminal board includes two screws for SCOM (ground) that must be connected to a good shield ground. DSCB can interface external devices up to distances of 1000 ft. for RS422 and RS485, at baud rates up to 375 kbps. For RS232C, the distance is only 50 ft, or 2500 pF of cable capacitance (including the cable from VSCA to the DSCB). It supports short haul modems for longer distances.
Operation
The VSCA is a single slot board, providing six serial communication ports. Each port is independently configurable to an RS232C, RS485, or RS422 interface, using a three position group jumper (berg array). Both RS232C and RS422 support full duplex. The line drivers are located on the VSCA board, and include appropriate termination resistors, with configurable jumpers, to accommodate multidrop line networks. Outputs for RS422 and RS485 have tri-state capability. Inputs/Outputs go to high impedance condition when powered down. They do not cause significant disturbance when powered down/up (less than 10 ms) on a party line. The open wire condition on a receiver is biased to a high state. RS232C supports: RXD, TXD, DTR/RTS, GND, CTS (five wire) RS422 supports: TX+, TX-, RX+, RX-, GND RS485 supports: TX/RX+, TX/RX-, GND
The VSCA/DSCB is a Data Terminal Device (DTE).
VSCA Jumpers
Jumpers JP1 thru JP6 are block jumpers, used to select the port electrical characteristic, RS232C, RS422, or RS485. Each jumper has three positions marked 232, 422, and 485. Jumpers JP7 thru JP12 are block jumpers, used to select the correct termination configuration for all the transmission lines (Tx). Each jumper has three positions marked TRM, THR, and PRK where: TRM means with terminating resistor. THR means no terminating resistor, pass through to J7. PRK means no terminating resistor, or Park position.
Jumpers JP13 thru JP18 are block jumpers, and are used to select the correct termination configuration for all the Receive lines (Rx). Each jumper has three positions marked TRM, THR, and PRK, where the meanings are the same as above.
Table 9-38. VSCA Board Jumper Positions Network Port Number Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 232/422/485 Communication JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 Tx TRM/THR/PRK JP7 JP8 JP9 JP10 JP11 JP12 Rx TRM/THR/PRK JP13 JP14 JP15 JP16 JP17 JP18
Features
Data Flow from VSCA to Controller
Data Flow from VSCA to the controller UCV_ is of two types, fixed I/O and Modbus I/O. Fixed I/O is associated with the smart pressure transducers and the Kollmorgen electric drive data. This data is completely processsed every frame, the same as conventional I/O. The required frame rate is 100 Hz. These signals are mapped into signal space, using the .tre file, and have individual health bits, use system limit checking, and have offset/gain scaling. Modbus I/O is the I/O associated with the Modbus ports. Because of the quantity of these signals, they are not completely processed every frame; instead they are packetized, and transferred to the UCV_ processor, over the IONet through a special service. This can accommodate up to 2400 bytes, at 4 Hz, or 9600 bytes at 1 Hz, or combinations thereof. This I/O is known as second class I/O, where coherency is at the signal level only, not at the device or board level. Health bits are assigned at the device level, the UCV_ expands (fully populate) for all signals, and system limit checking is not performed. Two consecutive time outs are required before a signal is declared unhealthy. Diagnostic messages are used to annunciate all communication problems. Ports 1 and 2 only (as an option) support the Honeywell pressure configuration. It reads inputs from the Honeywell Smart Pressure Transducers, type LG-1237; this service is available on ports 1 and 2 only, as an option (Pressure Transducers or ModBus). The Pressure Transducer Protocol utilizes interface board DS200XDSAG#AC, and RS422. Each port can service up to six transducers. The service is 375 kbaud, asynchronous, 9 data bits, (11 bits including start and stop). It includes failsafe features as follows: Communication miss counters, one per device, and associated diagnostics. After four consecutive misses it forces the input pressure to 1.0 psia, and posts a diagnostic. After four consecutive hits (good values) it removes the forcing and the diagnostic.
Three ports (any three, but no more than three) support the Kollmorgen electric drive. It communicates with a Kollmorgen Electric Fast Drive FD170/8R2-004 at 19200 Baud rate, point to point, using RS422.
Modbus service. The current Modbus design supports the Master mode, however the design does not preclude the future enhancement of Modbus slave mode of operation. It is configurable, at the port level as follows: Used , Not Used Baud Rate RS232C: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 RS485/422: 19200, 38400, 57600, 115000 Parity: Data Bits: Stop Bits: none, odd, even seven, eight one, two
Station Addresses Multidrop, up to 8 devices per port; maximum of 18 devices per board RTU Time Out (seconds) per device Signal Type Register Number Read/Write Transfer Rate, 0.5, 1, 2, or 4 Hz Scaling, Offset, and Gain
The Modbus service is configurable at the signal level as follows:
The service supports Function Codes 1-7, 15, and 16; it also supports double 16-bit registers for floating point numbers and 32-bit counters. It periodically (20 s) attempts to reestablish communications with a dead station. Type casting and scaling of all I/O signals to/from engineering units are supported on the VSCA and the toolbox, for both fixed I/O and Modbus I/O.
Twisted shielded pair AWG#18 min, up to 1000 ft, ground shields at Mark VI end only Mark VI Control J2 8+ 9 - Rx 4+ 6 - Tx 5 Grd 3 6 7 8 31 32 J4 Enable P24V Enable Crit Fault chassis Relay J1 18 20 22 J4 23 4 5 1236 30 27 17 19 21 28 Electric Drive FD170/8F2-004
V S C A
D S C B
V C C C
T R L Y T B C I
+ 125 VDC Power Ph A Ph B Ph C Grd Ref
Drive Enable Relay L4FMVn_ENAX Enable = Close Contact Input L5FMVn_CFZ Fault = Open
1 2 3 5
4 6 7 8 FE A B DCG
Motor Grd Motor Frame exc exc sec2 sec2 sec1 sec1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ther Shield (int)
Resolver
L V D T
Actuator/Valve
V S V O
T S V O
Monitoring Signals
Figure 9-90. VSCA Interface to Electric Servo Drive
DSCB - DIN-rail Mounted Terminal Board

The DSCB board is held in a plastic frame and mounts on a DIN-rail. Six intelligent transducers are wired to DSCB using shielded twisted pair. There are six jumpers on the board for the six channels. The wiring connections to the Euro Block type terminal block are shown in Figure 9-91. There are four terminals for the SCOM (ground) connection, which should be as short as possible.
Sin
Cos
Note Jumpers J1 J6 direct SIGRET either directly to SCOM or through a capacitor to SCOM. The shield must be grounded at one end or the other, but not both. If the shield is grounded at the device end, the jumpers should be set to include the capacitor in the circuit. If the shield is not grounded at the device end, the jumpers should be set to go directly to SCOM.
DSCB JA1
DIN-rail mounted Terminal Board s

SCOM
To/from VSCA, J6 37 wire cable, with twisted pair, group shielding
Cap
J1 SIGRET SCOM
Twisted Shielded AWG#18, to external devices. Configurable to RS422, or RS485. Six channels, definitions below
Six channels
SCOM
GRD
Terminal Assignments, RS422 RS485 RS232 Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3 Chan 4 Chan 5 Chan 6 TX+ NC CTS 1 8 15 22 29 36 TXNC DTR/RTS 2 9 16 23 30 37 RX+ RXTx/RX+ Tx/RXRX NC 3 10 17 24 31 38 4 11 18 25 32 39 NC NC TX 5 12 19 26 33 40 SIGRET JPx SIGRET JPx SIGRET JPx 6 13 20 27 34 41 JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 SCOM SCOM SCOM 7 14 21 28 35 42 43,44,45,46
Comments: The RS422/RS485 transmit and receive pairs must twisted pair in the VSCA to DSCB
Figure 9-91. DSCB Wiring, Cabling, and Jumper Positions
Mark VI Control From VSCA Board Front, J6

JA1
Fuel Skid XDSAG1ACC

P1 Adr= 0
DSCB
Port #1
1 Tx 2
Chan A, RS422 + +
Rx 3 4
1 Power 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Press Xdr LG-1237 Press Xdr LG-1237
Outer Valve GP1OA Outer Valve GP2OA Outer Valve GP1OB Outer Valve GP2OB
Chan A P2 Adr= 1
Port #2
Chan B, RS422 + Tx 8 9 Rx 10 11 +
9 Power 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
P3 Adr= 2 Chan B P4 Adr= 3 Stab-on nearest gnd
XDSAG1ACC
1 Power 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P1 Adr= 4
Pilot Valve GP1PA Pilot Valve GP2PA Pilot Valve GP1PB Pilot Valve GP2PB
Chan A P2 Adr= 5
43 44 45 46 SCOM Gnd
9 Power 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
XDSA Jumper Settings: Termination: Tx Only, JP1, JP2: Set to "IN" if end of line; Set to "OUT" if not end of line. Address: Jumper Outer Pilot Inner JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Chan A Chan A Chan B Chan B
XDSAG1ACC
1 Power 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P1 Adr= 8 Chan A P2 Adr= 9
Inner Valve GP1IA Inner Valve GP2IA Inner Valve GP1IB Inner Valve GP2IB
9 Power 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
P3 Adr=10 Chan B P4 Adr=11 Stab-on nearest gnd
Figure 9-92. DSCB Connections to XDSA and Pressure Transducers
DPWA - DIN-rail Mounted Transducer Excitation Power Distribution Terminal Board

DPWA is DIN-rail mounted and has an input voltage of 28 V dc 5%, provided through 2-pin locking connectors (see Figure 9-93). Connectivity between the terminal board and the external devices is through the Euro Block (Phoenix type) terminal block, using screw terminations and twisted shielded pair, AWG#18, wiring. DPWA provides three voltage output sources of 12 V dc 5%, with each output rated at 0 to 0.4 A, and is compatible with interface board DS200XDSAG#AC. Outputs are short circuit protected, and self recovering. Two terminal boards per system are required when servicing redundant ports. DPWA provides excitation power to the type LG-1237 Honeywell pressure transducers (see Figure 9-94). Note The DPWA terminal board includes two screw terminals for SCOM (ground) that must be connected to a good shield ground.
DPWA Peripherial P28V dc from control rack P28V dc to P12Vdc, P12 V dc 1.2 Amp Isolation
P12
9 10
P12V1 P12R1 P12V2 P12R2 P12V3 P12R3 SCOM SCOM
1 P1 2 P2
P12
11 12
Return
s s
P12
13 14 15
P3
100k
16
P4
20 k
Bus centering bridge
1k
1k
100 k 100 k 20 k 20 k
1
SCOM
PSRet SCOM
SCOM
SCOM
3 4 5 6
PS28VA SCOM PS28VB SCOM
Figure 9-93. DPWA Board Block Diagram
Power Supply, IS2020RKPS

Com PS28C "Normal" 28V
PS28C 1 2 3
Mark VI Control
Fuel Skid
Power for Chan A DPWA

1 2 28 VDC +/5% 1 2 Redundant Power Supply when required P1 + 12 Vdc +/-5% 1.2 Amp P12 9 28 V Return 10 to 12 V P12 Isol Return P12 Return Grd1 Grd2 P3 Return 100K 20K SCOM P28_J1 100K 20K SCOM P28_J2 100K 20K SCOM + + + + +
XDSAG1ACC
1 Power 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P1 Adr= 0
Press Xdr LG-1237
Outer Valve GP1OA
Chan A P2 Adr= 1
Press Xdr LG-1237
Outer Valve GP2OA
11 12 13 14 15 16
P2
1 2 3 4 5 6
9 Power 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Press Xdr LG-1237
Outer Valve GP1OB
Press Xdr LG-1237
Outer Valve GP2OB
P4
XDSAG1ACC
+ 1 Power 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P1 Adr= 4 Chan A P2 Adr= 5
Press Xdr LG-1237
Pilot Valve GP1PA
Press Xdr LG-1237
Pilot Valve GP2PA
Power for Chan B DPWA

P1 12 Vdc +/-5% 1.2 Amp P12 9 28 V Return 10 to 12 V Isol P12 Return Return Grd1 Grd2 P3 VAIC P4 Return 100K 20K SCOM P28_J1 100K 20K SCOM P28_J2 100K 20K SCOM
1 2 3 4 5 6 11 12
+ + +
9 Power 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Press Xdr LG-1237
Pilot Valve GP1PB
Press Xdr LG-1237
Pilot Valve GP2PB
P2
P12 13
14 15 16
XDSAG1ACC P1
+ 1 Power 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Adr= 8 Chan A P2 Adr= 9 Press Xdr LG-1237
Inner Valve GP1IA
VDCx Retx VDCx Retx VDCx Retx Power Supply Monitoring +
Press Xdr LG-1237
Inner Valve GP2IA
9 Power 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
P3 Adr= 10 Chan B P4 Adr=11 Stab-on nearest gnd
Press Xdr LG-1237
Inner Valve GP1IB
Press Xdr LG-1237
Inner Valve GP2IB
Figure 9-94. DPWA Power Distribution to XDSA and Smart Pressure Transducers
VPRO/TREG - Turbine Emergency Trip

Operation
The VPRO board in the Protection Module provides the emergency trip function. Up to three trip solenoids can be connected between the TREG and TRPG terminal boards. TREG provides the positive side of the 125 V dc to the solenoids and TRPG provides the negative side. VPRO provides emergency overspeed protection and the emergency stop functions. It controls the 12 relays on TREG, nine of which form three groups of three to vote inputs controlling the three trip solenoids. A second TREG board may be driven from VPRO through J4. VPRO also connects to the TPRO terminal board and has an Ethernet connection for IONet communications with the control modules (refer to Figure 9-95). Details of the TREG board are shown in Figure 9-96.
TREG Terminal Board
P125 Vdc JH1
VPRO Module R8 J1 To TRPG Ethernet IONet

I O N E T x RUN FAIL STAT X 8 Y 4 T 2 Z R 1 C S E R x x
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
J2
JZ1
To TSVO Termination Boards (SMX)
JY1
Cable to VPRO-T8
J 5 To TPRO
J 6
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 x
To TPRO JX1 Cable to VPRO-S8
J 3
F VPRO x
J 4
N x
P5 COM P28A P28B E T H R P A R A L
P O W E R
x
Cable to VPRO-R8 To Second TREG (optional)
Shield Bar BarrierType Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from board for maintenance
Figure 9-95. Trip Emergency Terminal Board, VPRO Board, and Cabling
Terminal Board TRPG 02 J2
Trip Solenoid 1 or 4
+
Terminal Board TREGH1A

01
JX1 KX1 KX2 KX3

P28X1
KE1
KX1 KY1
KY1 KZ1 KX1
RD RD RD
Mon
KX1,2,3 28Vdc ID
 VPRO Section X J3
J2
Mon
Optional Economizing Resistor, Trip Solenoid 100 ohm, 2 or 5 70W 04 + J2
04 03
KZ1
K4X
KE2
05
KX2 KY2
KY2 KZ2 KX2 KY1 KY2
JY1
RD RD RD
Mon
KY1,2,3 28Vdc ID
J2
Mon
 VPRO Section Y J3
08 07
KZ2
KY3
P28Y1
06 J2
Trip Solenoid 3 or 6
+
K4Y
09 KE3
KX3 KY3
KY3 KZ3 KX3 KZ1 KZ2 KZ3

P28Z1
JZ1
J2
Mon
RD RD RD
Mon
KZ1,2,3 28Vdc ID
12 PWR_N1 for test 11 02 06 10
KZ3
 VPRO Section Z J3
J2
J2
N125V P125V 30 31
Sol Pwr Monitor JX1 JY1 Mon JZ1
K4Z
KE1,2,3
JX1 JY1 JZ1
PWR_P1 PWR_P2 for test probe
P28VV Mon
KE1,2,3
RD
2 3
JX1 JY1 JZ1
Three Economizing Relay Circuits
To TSVO P28VV Boards on J1 K4CL SMX Systems
K4CL
RD
K4CL
2 3
JX1 JY1 JZ1
Servo Clamp To Relay K25A on J2 TTUR
Mon J2
JX1 JY1 JZ1 JX1 JY1 JZ1
To Exc JX1 JY1 TRP JZ1
P125X NS NS N125X
35 TRP1H 36 TRP1L 13 14 16 15 17
ETRPH ETRPL
Trip Interlock seven circuits
P28VV
CL
RD
JH1 P125X N125X
BCOM
Mon
2 3
K4X K4Y K4Z
E-Stop
JUMPR JUMPR
18 Second E-STOP when applicable
Figure 9-96. TREG Board, Trip Interlocks, and Trip Solenoids
Features
TREG is entirely controlled by VPRO, and the only connections to the control modules are the J2 power cable and the trip solenoids. In Simplex systems a third cable carries a trip signal from J1 to the TSVO terminal board, providing a Servovalve clamp function upon turbine trip.
Control of Trip Solenoids

Both TRPG and TREG control the trip solenoids so that either one can remove power and actuate the hydraulics to close the steam or fuel valves. The nine trip relay coils on TREG are supplied with 28 V dc from VPRO boards in X, Y, and Z. The trip solenoids are supplied with 125 V dc via plug J2, and draw up to 1 Amp with a 0.1 second L/R time constant. The solenoid circuit has a metal oxide varistor (MOV) for current suppression and a 10 ohm, 70 watt economizing resistor. A separately fused 125 V dc feeder is provided from the turbine control for the solenoids which energize in the run mode and de-energize in the trip mode. Diagnostics monitor each 125 V dc feeder from the Power Distribution Module at its point of entry on the terminal board to verify the fuse integrity and the cable connection. Two series contacts from each emergency trip relay (ETR1, 2, 3) are connected to the positive 125 V dc feeder for each solenoid, and two series contacts from each primary trip relay (PTR1,2,3 in TRPG) are connected to the negative 125 V dc feeder for each solenoid. An economizing relay (KE1, 2, 3) is supplied for each solenoid with a normally closed contact in parallel with the current limiting resistor. These relays are used to reduce the current load after the solenoids are energized. The ETR and KE relay coils are powered from a 28 V dc source from the VPRO boards. Each VPRO board in each of the X, Y, and Z sections supplies an independent 28 V dc source. A normally closed contact from each relay is used to sense the relay status for diagnostics. The 28 V dc bus is current limited and used for power to an external manual emergency trip contact, shown as E-Stop. Three master trip relays (K4X, K4Y, K4Z) disconnect the 28 V dc bus from the ETR, and KE relay coils if a manual emergency trip occurs. Any trip which originates in either the Protection Module (such as EOS) or the TREG (such as a manual trip) will cause each of the three Protection Module sections to transmit a trip command over the IONet to the control module, and may be used to identify the source of the trip. In addition, the K4CL servo clamp relay will energize and send a contact feedback directly from the TREG terminal board to the TSVO servo terminal board. TSVO disconnects the servo current source from the terminal block and applies a bias to drive the control valve closed. This is only used on Simplex applications to protect against the servo amplifier failing high. Note that the primary and emergency overspeed systems will trip the hydraulic trip solenoids independent of this circuit.
Solenoid Trip Tests

Application software in the control module is used to initiate tests of the trip solenoids. Online tests allow each of the trip solenoids to be manually tripped one at a time either through the PTR relays from the control module(s) or through the ETR relays from the Protection Module. A contact from each solenoid circuit is wired back as a contact input to give a positive indication that the solenoid has tripped. Primary and emergency off-line overspeed tests are provided too for verification of actual trips due to software simulated trip overspeed conditions.
Specification
Table 9-39. TREG Board Specifications Item Number of Trip Solenoids (TREG) Trip Solenoid Rating Trip Solenoid Circuits Solenoid Response Time Suppression Relay outputs Specification 3 Solenoids per TREG (total of 6 per VPRO) 125 V dc standard with 1 Amp draw 24 V dc is alternate with 1 Amp draw Circuits rated for NEMA class E creepage and clearance. Circuits can clear a 15 A fuse with all circuits fully loaded. Solenoid L/R time constant is 0.1 sec. MOV across the solenoid 3 Economizer relay outputs, 2 second delay to energize Driver to breaker relay K25A on TTUR Servo clamp relay on TSVO Solenoid Control Relay Contacts Contacts are rated to interrupt inductive solenoid loads at 125 V dc, 1 A Bus voltage can vary from 70 to 145 V dc 7 trip interlocks to VPRO protection module, 125/24 V dc 1 Emergency Stop hardwired trip interlock, 24 V dc
Trip Inputs
Like all I/O boards, TREG is configured using the toolbox. This software usually runs on a data-highway connected CIMPLICITY station or workstation. Table 9-40 summarizes the configuration choices and defaults. For details refer to GEH-6403 Control System Toolbox for Configuring the Mark VI Turbine Controller.
Table 9-40. Typical TREG Configuration Parameter Configuration J3:IS200TREGH1A KESTOP1_Fdbk1 Contact1 ContactInput TripEnable TrpTimeDelay SeqOfEvents K1_Fdbk RelayOutput KE1_Fdbk RelayOutput First TREG Board Connected, Not Connected (Input BIT) (Input BIT) Description Choices
Emergency Stop - When TREG, ESTOP1, inverse sense, Point Edit K4 relay, True = Run - Card Point Trip Interlock 1 (first of 7) - Card Point Trip Interlock 1 used Trip Interlock active Time delay before Tripping Turbine after Contact Opens (sec) Record Contact Transitions in Sequence of Events Trip Relay 1 feedback (first of 3) - Card Point Relay feedback used Economizer Relay for Trip Solenoid Feedbk (first of 3) - Card Point Economizer Relay Feedback Used Point Edit
Used, Unused Enable, Disable 0 to 10 Enable, Disable Point Edit (Input BIT)
Used, Unused Point Edit (Input BIT)
Used, Unused
K4CL_Fdbk Relay Output K25A SynchCheck SystemFreq ReferFreq TurbRPM VoltageDiff FreqDiff PhaseDiff GenVoltage BusVoltage J4A:IS200TREGH1A KESTOP2_Fdbk K4_Fdbk KE4_Fdbk Card Points (Signals)
Drive Control Valve Servos Closed, use ONLY for Steam Turbine Simplex - Card Point Servo Valve Clamp used Synchronizing Check Relay on TTUR - Card Point Synch Check Relay K25A Used System Frequency in Hz
Point Edit
(Input BIT)
Used, Unused Point Edit (Input BIT)
Used, Unused 50 or 60
Select Generator Frequency Reference for PLL, standard PR Std or Sg Space PR input or from Signal Space Rated Load Turbine RPM Maximum Voltage Difference in kV rms for Synchronizing Maximum Frequency Difference in Hz for Synchronizing 0 to 20,000 0 to1,000 0 to 0.5
Maximum Phase Difference in Degrees for Synchronizing 0 to 30 Minimum Generator Voltage in kVolts RMS for Synchronizing Minimum Bus Voltage in kVolts rms for Synchronizing Second TREG Board When TREG, ESTOP, inverse sense, K4 relay, True = Run - Card Point Trip Relay 4 Feedback (first of three) - Card Point Economizing Relay for Trip Solenoid 4 (first of three) Card Point Description - Point Edit (Enter Signal Connnection) See Point Edit names above 1 to 1,000 1 to 1,000 Connected, Not Connected Point Edit Point Edit Point Edit Direction (Input BIT) (Input BIT) (Input BIT) Type
Diagnostics
Descriptions of the TREG diagnostics are contained in the VPRO section. The diagnostics cover the trip relay driver and contact feedbacks, solenoid voltage, economizer relay driver and contact feedbacks, K25A relay driver and coil, servo clamp relay driver and contact feedback, and the solenoid voltage source. Connectors JX1, JY1, and JZ1 on the terminal board have their own ID device that is interrogated by the I/O board. The ID device is a read-only chip coded with the terminal board serial number, board type, revision number, and the plug location.
Installation
The three trip solenoids, economizing resistors, and the emergency stop are wired directly to the first I/O terminal block. Up to seven trip interlocks can be wired to the second terminal block. The wiring connections are shown in Figure 9-97.
Power 125 V dc To TRPG, 12 wires
To TSVO boards on SMX systems J1
Turbine Emergency Trip Termination Board TREGH1A

x
JH1
J2
JZ1
PWR_N1 RES 1B PWR_N2 RES 2B PWR_N3 RES 3B E-TRP (H) E-TRP (L)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
SOL 1 or 4 RES 1A SOL 2 or 5 RES 2A SOL 3 or 6 RES 3A E-TRP (H) JUMPER JY1 VPRO Z
x x x
PWR_P2 (for probe)
x x x
Contact TRP1 (L) Contact TRP2 (L) Contact TRP3 (L) Contact TRP4 (L) Contact TRP5 (L) Contact TRP6 (L) Contact TRP7 (L)
x x x x x x x
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
PWR_P1 (for probe) Contact TRP1 (H) Contact TRP2 (H) Contact TRP3 (H) Contact TRP4 (H) Contact TRP5 (H) Contact TRP6 (H) Contact TRP7 (H)
JX1
VPRO Y
VPRO X Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from terminal board for maintenance
Figure 9-97. TREG Terminal Board
VPRO/TPRO - Turbine Protection

The Turbine Protection Module (VPRO) and associated terminal board (TPRO) provide an independent emergency overspeed protection system. The protection system consists of triple redundant VPRO boards in a module separate from the turbine control system, controlling the trip solenoids through TREG. Figure 9-98 shows the cabling to VPRO from the TPRO terminal boards.
TPRO Terminal Board Ethernet IONet JZ1

I O N E T
VPRO- R8
x RUN FAIL STAT 8 X 4 Y T 2 Z R 1 C S E R x x
x
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
JZ5 JY1 Cables to VPRO-T8
J 5
J 6
JY5
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
JX1 JX5
Cables to VPRO-S8
J 3
F VPRO x
J 4
N x
P5 COM P28A P28B E T H R P A R A L
P O W E R
x
Cables to VPRO-R8
x
To TREG Shield Bar BarrierType Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from board for maintenance To Second TREG (optional) 37-pin "D" shell type connectors with latching fasteners
Figure 9-98. Turbine Protection Terminal Board, VPRO Board, and Cabling
Figure 9-99 shows how the VTUR and VPRO processor boards share in the turbine protection scheme. Either one can independently trip the turbine via the relays on TRPG or TREG. Figure 9-100 provides details of the TPRO terminal board.
VTUR
Special speed cable
JR5 TTUR JS5
J5
JT5 JR1 JS1 Optional Daughter Board JT1 3 Relays Gen Synch 335 V dc from <Q> J3 J4 J5 TRPG Two xfrs
JR1 J3 To second TRPG board (optional) J1 125 VDC Cable J2 JS1 JT1
J4
J4
9 Relays (3 x 3 PTR's)
Trip Solenoids, three circuits
JX1 VPRO J3 J4 J5 J6 To second TREG Board (optional) JH1 P125 V dc from <PDM> NEMA class F Special speed cable JX5 JY5 JZ5 JX1 JY1 125 VDC JZ1 JY1 JZ1
J2
TREG
J1
Trip signal to TSVO TB's
12 Relays (9 ETR's, 3 Econ Relays)
TPRO
J7
Two xfrs
Figure 9-99. Turbine Control and Protection Boards
Termination Board TPRO 1 Gen. Volts 120 V ac from PT 2

Noise Suppression
VPRO R8 Protection JX1
VPRO S8 Protection
VPRO T8 Protection
NS
Bus Volts 120 Vac from PT

To TTUR
3 4
Noise Suppression
ID
J6
J6
J6
NS Thermocouple Inputs
NS NS NS NS NS NS
1
JY1
TCX1H TCX1L TCY1H TCY1L TCZ1H TCZ1L P24V1 V dc 20mA1 mAret
13 14 19 20 25 26 5 7 6 8
CJ
Three TC ccts to X
CJ
1
ID
JZ1
1
Three TC ccts to Y
CJ
Overspeed Em Stop Sync Check Overtemp
Three TC ccts to Z P28VV Current Limiter

ID
J5
J5
J5
JPA1
VDC
P28V,X P28V,Y P28V,Z
J3
J3
J3
20 ma 250 ohms To R8,S8, T8
J4
J4
J4
Open
Ret
One of the above ccts P28VV
JPB1 P24V2 20 mA2

9 10 Current Limiter 250 ohms To TREG and Trip Solenoids
To R8, S8, T8 JX5
Two of the above ccts #1 Emergency Magnetic Speed Pickup #2 Emergency Magnetic Speed Pickup #3 Emergency Magnetic Speed Pickup
MX1H
31 32 NS 3 Circuits
MX1H

ID
MY1H
37 38 NS 3 Circuits
MY1L
Filter Clamp AC Coupling Filter Clamp AC Coupling
JY5
ID
MZ1H
43 44 NS 3 Circuits
JZ5
ID
MZ1L
Figure 9-100. TMR Protection System
Operation
The main purpose of the Protection Module is emergency overspeed (EOS) protection for the turbine. In addition, the module has backup synchronization check protection, three analog current inputs, and nine thermocouple inputs, primarily intended for exhaust over-temperature protection on gas turbines. The Protection Module is always triple redundant with three completely separate and independent sections named X, Y, and Z. Any one of these sections can be powered down and replaced while the turbine is running without jeopardizing the protection system. Each section contains its own I/O interface, processor, power supply, and Ethernet communications (IONet) to the control modules. The communications allow initiation of test commands from the control module to the Protection Module and the monitoring of EOS system diagnostics in the control module and on the operator interface. Communications are resident on the VPRO board which is the heart of the system. The VPRO board has a VME interface to allow programming and testing in a VME rack; however, the backplane is neutralized when plugged into the Protection Module to eliminate any continuity between the three independent sections.
Features
Speed Control and Overspeed Protection
Speed control and overspeed protection is implemented with six passive, magnetic speed pickups. The first three are monitored by the control module(s) which use the median signal for speed control and the primary overspeed protection. The second three are separately connected to the X, Y, and Z sections of the Protection Module. Provision is made for nine passive magnetic speed pickups or active pulse rate transducers (TTL type) on the TPRO terminal board with three being monitored by each of the X, Y, and Z sections. Separate overspeed trip settings are programmed into the application software for the primary and emergency overspeed trip limits, and a second emergency overspeed trip limit must be programmed into the I/O configurator to confirm the EOS trip point. The speed is calculated by counting passing teeth on the wheel and measuring the time involved. Another protection feature is the calculation of the rate of change of speed which is compared with 100%/sec and transmitted to the control module to trip the unit if it is detected after the turbine reaches a predetermined steady-state speed. This steady-state speed limit is a tuning constant located in the controllers application software. Another speed threshold which is monitored by the EOS system is 10% speed. This is transmitted to the control module to verify that there is no gross disagreement between the first set of three speed pickups being monitored by the controller (for speed control and the primary overspeed protection) and the second set of three speed pickups being monitored by the EOS system.
Interface To Trip Solenoids

The trip system combines the Primary Trip Interface from the control module(s) with the EOS Trip Interface from the Protection Module. Three separate, triple redundant trip solenoids (also called Electrical Trip Devices - ETDs) are used to interface with the hydraulics. The ETDs are connected between the TRPG and TREG terminal boards. A separately fused 125 V dc feeder is provided from the turbine control for each solenoid which energize in the run mode and de-energize in the trip mode.
Backup Synch Check Protection

Backup synch check protection is provided in the Protection Module. The generator and bus voltages are supplied from two, single phase, potential transformers (PTs) secondary output supplying a nominal 115 V rms. The maximum cable length between the PTs and the turbine control is 100 meters of 18 AWG twisted, shielded wire. Each PT is magnetically isolated with a 1,500 V rms rated barrier and a circuit load less than 3 VA. The synch algorithms are based on phase lock loop techniques. Phase error between the generator and bus voltages is less than +/-1 degree at nominal voltage and 50/60 Hz. A frequency range of 45 to 66 Hz is supported with the measured frequency within 0.05% of the input frequency. The algorithm is illustrated under TTUR, generator synchronizing. Each PT input is internally connected in parallel to the X, Y, and Z sections of the Protection Module. The triple redundant phase slip windows result in a voted logical output on the TREG terminal board which drives the K25A relay. This relays contacts are connected in series with the synch permissive relay (K25P) and the auto synch relay (K25) to insure that no false command is issued to close the generator breaker. Similarly, contacts from the K25A contact are connected in series with the contacts from remote, manual synchronizing equipment to insure no false commands.
Thermocouple and Analog Inputs

Thermocouple and analog inputs are available in the Protection Module, primarily for gas turbine applications. Nine thermocouple inputs are monitored with three connected to each section of the Protection Module. These are generally used for backup exhaust over-temperature protection. Also, one 5, 10 V dc, 420 mA (selectable) input, and two 420 mA inputs can be connected to the TPRO terminal board which feeds the inputs in parallel to the three sections of the Protection Module.
Power Supply
Each VPRO board has its own on-board power supply. This generates 5 V dc and 28 V dc using 125 V dc supplied from the cabinet PDM. The entire TMR VPRO module therefore has three power supplies for high reliability.
Specification
Table 9-41. VPRO Board Specifications Item Number of Inputs Specification TPRO: 9 1 9 1 2 VPRO: 3 1 3 1 2 7 2 Passive Speed Pickups Generator and 1 Bus Voltage Thermocouples 420 mA current or voltage 420 mA current Passive Speed Pickups Generator and 1 Bus Voltage Thermocouples 420 mA current or voltage 420 mA current Trip interlocks Emergency Stop
Number of Outputs
TREG: 3 3 1 1 VPRO: 6 6 1 1
Trip Solenoids per TREG Economizer relays Breaker relay command, K25A on TTUR Servo clamp relay contact, to TSVO boards Trip Solenoids Economizer relays Breaker relay command, K25A on TTUR Servo clamp relay contact, to TSVO boards
Power Supply Voltage
TPRO: 28 V dc from X, Y, and Z boards, voted VPRO: Input supply 125 V dc (70145 V dc) Output 5 V dc and 28 V dc
Frame Rate MPU Characteristics
Up to 100 Hz Output resistance 200 ohms with inductance of 85 mH. Output generates 150 V p-p into 60 K ohms at the TPRO terminal block, with insufficient energy for a spark. The maximum short circuit current is approximately 100 mA. The system applies up to 400 ohm normal mode load to the input signal to reduce the voltage at the terminals. Sensors can be up to 300 m (984 ft) from the cabinet, assuming that shielded pair cable is used, with typical 70 nF single ended or 35 nF differential capacitance, and 15 ohms resistance. 2 Hz to 14 kHz 0.05% of reading; resolution is 15 bits at 100 Hz Noise of the acceleration measurement is less than 50 Hz/sec for a 10,000 Hz signal being read at 10 ms. Minimum signal is 27 mV pk at 2 Hz Minimum signal is 450 mV pk at 14 kHz Two Single-Phase Potential Transformers, 115 V rms secondary Voltage accuracy is 0.5% of rated Volts rms Frequency Accuracy 0.05% Phase Difference Measurement better than 1 degree. Allowable voltage range for synchronizing is 75 to 130 V rms. Each input has a load of less than 3 VA. Same specifications as for VTCC board Same specifications as for VAIC board
MPU Cable
MPU Pulse Rate Range MPU Pulse Rate Accuracy
MPU Input Circuit Sensitivity Generator and Bus Voltage Sensors
Thermocouple Inputs Analog Inputs
Configuration
Table 9-42. Typical VPRO-TPRO Configuration Parameter Configuration Turbine_Type Define the type of turbine from selection of ten types Two gas turbine Two LM Two large steam One medium steam One small steam Two Stag GT Enable, Disable Enable, Disable Description Choices
LMTripZEnable OT_Trip_Enbl
On LM machine, when no PR on Z, enable vote for trip Enable Overtemperature Trip
OvrTemp_Trip CPD_Corner CPD_Slope TA_Trip_Enab1 RatedRPM_TA Auto Reset DiagSolPwrA Min_MA_Input Max_MA_Input AccelCalType J5:IS200TPROH1A PulseRate1 PRType PRScale OS_Setpoint OS_Tst_Delta Zero_Speed Min_Speed Accel_Trip Acc-Setpoint TMR_DiffLimt J6:IS200TPROH1A BusPT_KVolts PT_Input PT_Output TMR_DiffLimt GenPT_KVolts TC11 ThermCplType Low Pass Filter TC21 TC31
Iso-thermal Overtemperature Trip Setting for Exhaust Thermocouples in Degree F Overtemperature Trip Compressor Discharge Pressure in psi at which CDP Bias Starts Overtemperature Trip Compressor Discharge Pressure Bias Slope in Degree F/psi Steam, Enable Trip Anticipation on ETR1 Steam, Rated RPM, used for Trip Anticipation calc Automatic Restoring of Thermocouples removed from scan When using TREL/TRES, Sol Power, BusA, diagnostic enable Minimum MA for Healthy 420 mA Input Maximum MA for Healthy 420 mA Input Select Acceleration calculation type J5 cable section of TPRO board First of three speed inputs - Card Point Selects Gearing (Resolution) Pulses per revolution (output RPM) Overspeed Trip Setpoint in RPM Offline Overspeed Test Setpoint Delta in RPM Zero Speed for this Shaft in RPM Minimum Speed for this Shaft in RPM Enable Acceleration trip Accelerate Trip Setpoint in RPM/second Difference Limit for Voted Pulse Rate Inputs in Engineering Units J6 Cable section of TPRO board Kilo-Volts RMS, Bus Potential Transformer - Card Point PT input in kilovolts rms for PT_Output PT output in Volts rms for PT_Input-typically 115 Difference Limit for Voted PT Inputs in Per Cent Kilo-Volts RMS, Generator PT, configuration similar to Bus PT - Card Point Thermocouple 1, for X module (first of 3) - Card Point Select Thermocouple Type or mV Input Enable 2 Hz Low Pass Filter Thermocouple 1, for Y module (first of three) Config as above - Card Point Thermocouple 1, for Z module (first of three) Config as above - Card Point
60 to 2,000 0 to 450 10 to 0 Enable, Disable 0 to 20,000 Enable, Disable Enable, Disable 0 to 21 0 to 21 Slow, Med, Fast
Point Edit
(Input FLOAT)
Unused, PR<6,000 Hz, PR>6,000 Hz 0 to 1,000 0 to 20,000 -2,000 to 2,000 0 to 20,000 0 to 20,000 Enable, Disable 0 to 20,000 0 to 20,000
Point Edit 0 to 1,000 60 to 150 0 to 100 Point Edit Point Edit
(Input FLOAT)
(Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT)
Unused, mV, T, K, J, E Enable, disable Point Edit Point Edit (Input FLOAT) (Input FLOAT)
Cold Junction TMR_DiffLimt AnalogIn1 Input Type Low_Input Low_Value High_Input High_Value InputFilter Trip_Enable TripSetpoint TripTimeDelay TMR_DiffLimt J3:IS200TREGH1A J4:IS200TREGH1A Card Points (Signals) L3DIAG-VPRO1 L3DIAG-VPRO2 L3DIAG-VPRO3 PR1_Zero PR2_Zero PR3_Zero Spare OS1_Trip OS2_Trip OS3_Trip Dec1_Trip Dec2_Trip Dec3_Trip Acc1_Trip Acc2_Trip Acc3_Trip TA_Trip TA_StpLoss OT_Trip MA1_Trip
Cold Junction for Thermocouples 1-3 Difference Limit for Voted TMR Cold Junction Inputs in Deg F First of Three Analog Inputs - Card Point Type of Analog Input Input MA at Low Value Input Value in Engineering Units at Low Value Input MA at High Value Input Value in Engineering Units at High MA Filter Bandwidth in Hz Enable Trip for this MA Input Trip Setpoint in Engineering Units Time Delay before Tripping Turbine after Signal exceeds Setpoint in seconds Difference Limit for Voted TMR Inputs in Per Cent of (High_Value-Low_Value)
Point Edit 60 to 2,000 Point Edit
(Input FLOAT)
(Input FLOAT)
Unused, 420 mA, 10 V 10 to 20 3.402e+38 to 3.402e+38 10 to 20 3.402e+38 to 3.402e+38 Unused, 12 Hz, 6 Hz, 3Hz, 1.5 Hz, 0.75 Hz Enable, Disable 3.402e+38 to 3.402e+38 0 to 10 0 to 100
First TREG board (see TREG section for configuration) Connected, Not Connected Second TREG board (optional) Description - Point Edit (Enter Signal Connection) Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic Card Diagnostic L14HP_ZE L14IP_ZE L14LP_ZE Spare L12HP_TP L12IP_TP L12LP_TP L12HP_DEC L12IP_DEC L12LP_DEC L12HP_ACC L12IP_ACC L12LP_ACC Trip Anticipate Trip L12TA_TP L30TA L26TRP L3MA_TRP1 Connected, Not Connected Direction Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Type BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT
MA2_Trip MA3_Trip SOL1_Vfdbk : SOL6_Vfdbk L25A_Cmd Cont1_TrEnab : Cont7_TrEnab Acc1_TrEnab : Acc3_TrEnab OT-TrEnab GT_1Shaft GT_2Shaft LM_2Shaft LM_3Shaft LargeSteam MediumSteam SmallSteam STag_GT_1S STag_GT_2S ETR1_Enab : ETR6_Enab K4CL_Enab K25A_Enab L5CFG1_Trip L5CFG2_Trip L5CFG3_Trip OS1_SP_CfgEr OS2_SP_CfgEr OS3_SP_CfgEr ComposTrip1 ComposTrip2 ComposTrip3 L5ESTOP1 L5ESTOP2 L5Cont1_Trip
L3MA_TRP2 L3MA_TRP3 When TREG, Trip Solenoid 1 Voltage : When TREG, Trip Solenoid 6 Voltage L25A Breaker Close Pulse Config_Contact 1 Trip Enabled : Config_Contact 7 Trip Enabled Config - Accel 1 Trip Enabled : Config - Accel 3 Trip Enabled Config - Overtemp Trip Enabled Config - Gas Turb, 1 Shaft Enabled Config - Gas Turb, 2 Shaft Enabled Config - LM Turb, 2 Shaft Enabled Config - LM Turb, 3 Shaft Enabled Config - Large Steam 1, Enabled Config - Medium Steam, Enabled Config - Small Steam, Enabled Config - Stag 1 Shaft, Enabled Config - Stag 2 Shaft, Enabled Config - ETR1 Relay Enabled : Config - ETR6 Relay Enabled Config - Servo Clamp Relay Enabled Config - Sync Check Relay Enabled HP Config Trip IP Config Trip LP Config Trip HP Overspeed Setpoint Config Mismatch Error IP Overspeed Setpoint Config Mismatch Error LP Overspeed Setpoint Config Mismatch Error Composite Trip 1 Composite Trip 2 Composite Trip 3 ESTOP1 Trip, TREG, J3 ESTOP2 Trip, TREG, J4 Contact1 Trip
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT
: L5Cont7_Trip LPShaftLock Bus Freq GenFreq Gen VoltsDiff GenFreqDiff GenPhaseDiff PR1_Accel PR2_Accel PR3_Accel PR1_Max PR2_Max PR3_Max SynCk_Perm SynCk_ByPass Cross_Trip OnLineOS1Tst OnLineOS1X OnLineOS2Tst OnLineOS3Tst OffLineOS1Tst OffLineOS2Tst OffLineOS3Tst TrpAntcptTst LokdRotorByp HPZeroSpdByp TestETR1 : TestETR4 PTR1 : PTR6 PR_Max_Rst CJBackup OS1_Setpoint OS2_Setpoint OS3_Setpoint
: Contact7 Trip LP Shaft Locked SFL 2 Hz SF 2 Hz DV_ERR KiloVolts rms-Gen Low is Negative SFDIFF2 Slip Hz Gen Slow is Negative SSDIFF2 Phase degrees Gen Lag is Negative HP Accel in RPM/SEC IP Accel in RPM/SEC LP Accel in RPM/SEC HP Max Speed since Last Zero Speed in RPM IP Max Speed since Last Zero Speed in RPM LP Max Speed since Last Zero Speed in RPM L25A_PERM - Sync Check Permissive L25A_BYPASS - Sync Check Bypass L4Z_XTRP - Control Cross Trip L97HP_TST1 - On Line HP Overspeed Test L43EOST_ONL - On Line HP Overspeed Test, with auto reset L97IP_TST1 - On Line IP Overspeed Test L97LP_TST1 - On Line LP Overspeed Test L97HP_TST2 - Off Line HP Overspeed Test L97IP_TST2 - Off Line IP Overspeed Test L97LP_TST2 - Off Line LP Overspeed Test L97A_TST - Trip Anticipate Test L97LR_BYP - Locked Rotor Bypass L97ZSC_BYP - HP ZeroSpeed Check Bypass L97ETR1 - ETR1 Test, True denergizes relay : L97ETR4 - ETR4 Test, True denergizes relay L20PTR1 - PrimaryTrip Relay CMD for Diagnostic only : L20PTR6 - Primary Trip Relay CMD for Diagnostic only Max Speed Reset Estimated TC Cold Junction Temperature in Deg F HP Overspeed Setpoint in RPM IP Overspeed Setpoint in RPM LP Overspeed Setpoint in RPM
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT BIT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT
OS1_TATrpSp CPD DriveFreq
PR1 Overspeed Trip setpoint in RPM for Trip Anticipate Fn Compressor Discharge Pressure for Overtemperature Trip CPD Bias Drive (Gen) Freq (Hz), used for non standard drive config.
Output Output Output
FLOAT FLOAT FLOAT
Diagnostics
Board diagnostics cover the thermocouple limits, reference voltage, cold junction, analog input health, and contact input test failure. Relay diagnostics cover the trip relay driver and contact feedbacks, solenoid voltage, economizer relay driver and contact feedbacks, K25A relay driver and coil, and the servo clamp relay driver and contact feedback. Voltage diagnostics cover the solenoid power bus, and the voltage to the solenoids. Connectors JX1, JY1, JZ1, JX5, JY5, and JZ5 on the terminal board have their own ID device which is interrogated by the I/O board. The ID device is a read-only chip coded with the terminal board serial number, board type, revision number, and the plug location.
Installation
The generator and bus potential transformers, and the analog inputs are wired to the first TPRO terminal block. The magnetic speed pickups are wired to the second block. Jumpers JP1A and JP1B are set to give either a 420 mA or voltage input on the first of the three analog inputs. The wiring connections are shown in Figure 9101.
Turbine Protection Termination Board TPRO

x
ma
VOLTS
JZ1
Gen (L) Bus (L) 20mA1 mAret 20mA2 20mA3 TC1X (L) TC2X (L) TC3X (L) TC1Y (L) TC2Y (L) TC3Y (L)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
Gen (H) Bus (H) P24V1 VDC P24V2 P24V3 TC1X (H) TC2X (H) TC3X (H) TC1Y (H) TC2Y (H) TC3Y (H)
JP1A Gen Volts Analog Inputs OPEN RETURN JP1B
JZ5 Thermocouple Inputs To J5 JY5
JY1
To VPRO-Z J6
TC1Z (L) TC2Z (L) TC3Z (L) MX1 (L) MX2 (L) MX3 (L) MY1 (L) MY2 (L) MY3 (L) MZ1 (L) MZ2 (L) MZ3 (L)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
TC1Z (H) TC2Z (H) TC3Z (H) MX1 (H) MX2 (H) MX3 (H) MY1 (H) MY2 (H) MY3 (H) MZ1 (H) MZ2 (H) MZ3 (H)
JX1 Magnetic Speed Pickups To J5 JX5
To VPRO-Y J6
To J5 To VPRO-X J6
Terminal Blocks can be unplugged from terminal board for maintenance
Figure 9-101. Terminal Board TPRO
VME Rack Power Supply

The VME rack power supply mounts on the side of the VME control and interface modules, as shown in Figures 9-102 and 9-106. It supplies + 5, 12, 15, and 28 V dc to the VME backplane. It runs off 125 V dc cabled in from the Power Distribution Module (PDM). A special 335 V dc output is provided for powering flame detectors connected to TRPG. A low voltage version (LVPS) for 24 V dc operation is also available. Note that a different power supply is used on the standalone control rack, which only powers the Mark VI controller, VDSK, and VCMI.
Cable Harness to VME Rack PSA POWER SUPPLY
Side View PSB
Pull to Toggle
On Off Normal Fault Available
Front View
Heat Sink Cooling Fins
Bottom View
PS28A
PS28B
PS28C PS335
PS125
28 V dc 335 (special) V dc
125 Vdc from PDM
Figure 9-102. VME Rack Power Supply, Front, Side, and Bottom Views
Operation
The power supply contains no user serviceable parts and the cover must not be removed. The power supply contains three circuit boards, an input board with control, monitoring and auxiliary functions, a module board with power supply modules, and an output board with four more power modules and output filtering.
Twelve power modules, shown in Figure 9-103, are mounted to the inside surface of the heat sink under these boards: Five +28 V dc supplies Two combined +5 V dc supplies One 28 V dc supply One +12 V dc supply One 12 V dc supply One +15 V dc supply One 15 V dc supply
The input board holds the control and monitoring circuits, plus a 335 V dc power supply circuit along with an auxiliary 24 V dc power supply for the control logic. Schematics of the power supply are shown in Figures 9-104 and 9-105.
Connectors for Cable Harness
Output Filtering
M-100 +5V M-101 +5V M-102 +28V M-103 +28V
Power Supply Modules Mounted under the Circuit Boards on the Heat Sink
Output Board
Heat Sink with Fins on Back of Assembly
M-300 -28V M-301 +28V M-302 +28V M-303 +28V
Module Board
M-304 +12V M-305 -12V M-306 +15V M-307 -15V
Control & Monitoring Circuits

10 A Fuse
Auxiliary 24 V Supply
335 Volt Supply
Latching Power On-Off Switch
Input Board
125 V dc Power Input

Figure 9-103. Inside View of VME Power Supply Showing Power Modules
Power Input 125 VDC PS125

P125 N125 2 1 3 4
IS2020RKPSG1AC
fuse NC suppression On/Off switch
400 W Power Supply

startup relay Green-- Normal Red----- Fault Yellow-- Avail
Continued on next page
enable P335V 1.68 W + Ret PS335 P335VDC 1 2 3
P28V 50/100 W + Ret
P28V 50/100 W + Ret
P28V 50/100 W + Ret
P28V 50/100 W + Ret
P28V 50/100 W + Ret
3 PS28A 2 1 3 PS28B 2 1 3 PS28C 2 1
PSA
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10 8 *PS28C "Normal"
To Safety Ground
*PS28C "Isolation"
Fan Power
1 2 1
P12Vdc N12Vdc PL1 PL2 PL3 P28A

s
I/O 21- Slot VME Rack
*PS28C 2 "Normal" 3
4 1 *PS28C 2 "Isolation" 3 4
P28B s
s s
P28C s
s
P28D
s
P28E
s PCOM
Test Points SCOM
PCOM
Slots 1 thru 5
Slots 6 thru 9
Slots 10 thru 13
Slots 14 thru 17
Slots 18 thru 21
PS28C Configuration: The Power Supply PS28C may be isolated from the I/O Rack for external use. One plug, two positions "Normal", "Isolation", for selection; Plug is located on left side of Rack (from the front). P28A and P28B are for internal cabinet use only, not to go outside of the cabinet.
The symbol, s
represents a pi suppression filter:
scom
Figure 9-104. VME I/O Rack Power Supply and Cables
IS2020RKPSG1AC Continued from previous page
400 W Power Supply
P125 (power) enable
N28V 25/100 W Ret
N15V 50/100 W Ret
P15V 50/100 W + Ret
N12V 25 W - Ret
P12V 50 W + Ret
P5V 150 W + Ret
28
26
32 20
30 18
12
10
16
14
PSA
PSB
20,24, 18,22, 28,32 26,30
21 Slot VME Rack P5V
DCOM s P15V s
s s s
P12V s
s
ACOM
s
ACOM N15V
s
N12V
s PCOM
PCOM *SCOM
SCOM
N28V
Above Distribution for All Slots
The symbol,
represents a pi suppression filter:
scom
Note: SCOM must be connected to ground via the Rack mounting hardware, metal to metal conductivity, to the mounting base and hence to ground.
Figure 9-105. VME I/O Rack Power Supply and Cables (continued)
Specification
Table 9-43. Power Supply Specification Item Input Voltage Description 70 to 145 V dc floating supply Up to 10 V pp ripple Under voltage shutdown on input voltage, latching, cycle shutdown switch to recover Isolation Output Voltages True isolation from Input to Output, 1500 Volts Output Voltage P5 P15 N15 P12 N12 P28 N28 P335 Total Output Short Circuit Temperature Indicating Lights +5 V dc +15 V dc 15 V dc +12 V dc 12 V dc +28 V dc 28 V dc +335 V dc Voltage Regulation Capacity Less than 3% Less than 3% Less than 3% Less than 3% Less than 3% Less than 5% Less than 5% Less than 5% 150 Watts 100 Watts 100 Watts 25 Watts 10 Watts 100 Watts 50 Watts 1.68 Watts Over Voltage Shutdown 20% 5% 20% 5% 20% 5% 20% 5% 20% 5% 20% 5% 20% 5% 10% to 20%
Maximum of 400 Watts Short circuit protection on all power supplies, with self recovery Ambient Air Convection Cooling 0 to 60 degree C Green: Normal Red: Fault Status is OK Power is applied but supply is shutdown due to: Trouble with the supply, latched off Low input voltage, latched off Power is applied, but switch is OFF
Yellow: Available Power Sequencing
The 5 V dc supply comes up first, then all the others
Diagnostics
Incoming and outgoing voltages and currents are monitored for control and protection purposes. The following protective actions can occur: An input 110 V dc undervoltage condition sets the fault latch, shuts off all power supplies, and lights the Red LED. Upon recovery, the fault can be reset with the on/off switch. Any power supply output overvoltage fault turns off the bad power supply and lights the Red LED. Reset by turning off the power supply. Undervoltage on the +5 Volt supply (output less than 4.7 Volts) cuts off all the power supplies until the 5 Volts comes back. The red LED is lit. The 335 V dc supply has an overvoltage circuit that lights the Red LED and shuts down the 335 Volts and other supplies. The output has current limiting.
Test points for all these voltages are located at the left-hand side of the VME rack.
Installation
The power supply is mounted to the right hand side of the VME rack on a sheet metal bracket, as shown in Figure 9-106. The 125 V dc input, 28 V dc output, and 335 V dc output connections are at the bottom. Two connectors, PSA and PSB, at the top of the assembly mate with a cable harness carrying power to the VME rack.
Power cables to VME Chassis 5 slots - A Fan +/- 12 Volts to Fan, used with Controller
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
4 slots - B
4 slots - C
4 slots - D
4 slots - E
PSA PSB
Power Supply
Plug Position P28 Normal Plug Position P28 Isolated VME Chassis, 21 slots for I/O and Control, or for just I/O
J301
Power Supply Test Points Rack Ethernet ID Plug GND 125 Vdc Input from PDM 335 V dc
Cable from PDM Monitor
P28C Power to External Peripheral Device (Move Plug from Normal to Isolated Position)
Figure 9-106. Power Supply, VME Chassis, and Cabling to External Devices
Each of the five 28 V dc power modules supplies a section of the VME rack. These sections are labeled A, B, C, D, E, and F. The P28C output at the bottom of the power supply can be used to power an external peripheral device. To do this the jumper plug shown on the bracket to the left of the rack must be moved from the Normal position to the Isolated position below. This allows Module D to supply rack sections D and E, and Module E to supply the external load via P28C. Note that normally only P28C is used. The fan is only used when the controller is mounted in the rack. It is powered by 12 V from the top connector on the same bracket (located on the left side of the rack).
TTPW - Power Conditioning Board

Large steam turbines use 24 V dc electrical trip solenoid valves (ETSV). Power for these valves is provided to the TRPL and TREL trip boards by a power transition board TTPW. Wiring from the rack power supplies, through TTPW, to the trip board is shown in Figure 9-107.
<R>
VME Rack
PL2 PS28C "Isolation" PL3 PS28C
Power Supply
Single ETSV Applications:
<S>
VME Rack
Power Supply
P1 P2 P3
T T P W
JA1
PwrA JP1
<T>
VME Rack
discrete wiring
T B A I
T R P L
ETSV
Power Supply
Monitoring
T R E L
Double ETSV Applications: <R>

VME Rack
Power Supply
P1
T T P W
JA1
PwrA
<S>
VME Rack
T B A I Monitoring P2
JP1 JP2 PwrB
Power Supply
T T P W
T R P L T R E L
JA1
ETSV1
ETSV2
<T>
VME Rack
Power Supply
T B A I Monitoring
Figure 9-107. Steam Turbine, 24 V dc Interface to Trip Valves
Operation
The turbine ETSV is a 24 V dc device with a 24 watt, 2022 ohm coil. Power is wired from the three I/O rack supplies to TTPW, where the three 28 V supplies are diode ORed to produce a single 28 V dc output. The primary output is 02 A (total), 2230 V dc, and there are four secondary outputs of 0.25 A each as shown in Figure 9-108.
TTPWG1B Power Supply Monitoring (screw compatible to TBAI) PCOM Sig Gnd Sig Gnd Sig Gnd Sig Gnd Sig Gnd
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 19 20
SCOM 100k 10k 100k 10k SCOM 100k 10k SCOM
P1
P2
P3
PCOM PCOM P28R P28S P28T
P28R
P28S P28T P28V
100k 10k
P28V
100k 10k
SCOM
SCOM
Bus Voltage Centering Bridge 1k 1k SCOM
Peripheral Power Outputs 22 - 30 VDC, 2.0 Amp total

P28V1 (-)
(+)
25 26 27 28 1 2 JA1 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
P28V SCOM
2.0 Amp (total)
P28V2 (+)
(-)
To TRPL (+) (-) (-)
P28V3
0.25 Amp Outputs (each)
P28V4 (+) P28V5 (-) P28V6
(+) (+) (-)
PCOM
PCOM
Figure 9-108. TTPW Board Showing Outputs and Monitoring
Installation
Three 28 V dc supplies are wired from I/O racks R, S, and T to plugs P1, P2, and P3. The primary 28 V dc output comes from plug JA1 and is wired to the trip board TRPL. The power monitoring signals are wired to the top terminal block (TB1) and go to an analog input board. The secondary voltage outputs are wired to the lower terminal block (TB2) as shown in Figure 9-109.
Power Conditioning Board TTPWG1B 28 V Power from Racks R, S, T

x x
PCOM (Gnd) P28R (Gnd) P28S (Gnd) P28T (Gnd) P28V (Gnd)
x x x x x x x x x x x
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
x
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
PCOM (Sig) P28R (Sig) P28S (Sig) P28T (Sig) P28V (Sig) Monitoring Signals to TBAI Board
P1 (R) P2 (S) P3 (T)
1 2 1 2 1 2
P28R PCOM P28S PCOM P28T PCOM
28 V Power to TRPL Trip Board

P28V1 (Neg) P28V2 (Neg) P28V3 (Neg) P28V4 (Neg) P28V5 (Neg) P28V6 (Neg)
26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48
x
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47
P28V1 (Pos) P28V2 (Pos) P28V3 (Pos) P28V4 (Pos) P28V5 (Pos) P28V6 (Pos) Power Outputs
JA1 (P28V)
1 2
P28V PCOM
Figure 9-109. TTPW Board with Wiring and Cabling
PDM - Power Distribution Module

The Power Distribution Module (PDM) provides 125 V dc and 115 V ac (or 230 V ac) to the Mark VI system for all racks and terminal boards. The PDM arrangement is shown in Figure 9-110. There is a second version of the PDM for the control cabinet in those systems using remote I/O cabinets.
Diagnostics to VCMI via J301 in <R> Rack Power Cables to Interface Modules 125 V dc, 115/230 V ac DIN rail Termination Board
Output Power Connectors
Power Distribution Module (for Interface Modules)
TB2
TB1 Input Terminals Power Filters Filtered DC and AC power to PDM
TB3
JTX1 115 V Cable to Transformer inside AC/DC Converter
AC/DC Converter
JTX2 230 V
Cable to PDM JZ2 or JZ3
JZ
TB1
One or two converters
Customer's Power Cables, 125 Vdc and 115/230 Vac
TB2
Figure 9-110. Power Distribution Module, Ac to Dc Converter, and Diagnostic Cabling
Operation
The customer's 125 V dc and 115/230 V ac power is brought through power filters into the PDM. The ac power is cabled out to one or two ac/dc converters which produce 125 V dc. This dc voltage is then cabled back into the PDM and diode coupled to the main dc power, forming a redundant power source, as shown in Figure 9-110. This power is distributed to the VME racks and terminal boards. Either 115 V ac or 230 V ac can be handled by the ac/dc converters. The transformer cable must be plugged into either JTX1 for 115 V ac, or JTX2 for 230 V ac operation. Diagnostic information is collected in the PDM and wired out to a DIN rail mounted terminal board. A cable then runs to the VCMI in rack <R> via J301.
PDM for Interface Cabinet

Ac feeders, J17-20, are fused and cabled out to the relay terminal boards. 125 V dc feeders are fused and cabled to the Interface (I/O) cabinets, protection modules, TRPG, TREG, and TRLY. To ensure a noise free supply to the boards, the PDM is supplied through a Control Power Filter (CPF) which suppresses EMI noise. The CPF rack holds either two or three Corcom 30 A filter modules as shown in Figure 9-111. Power to the contact inputs first passes through resistors R3 and R4, through TB2, before being fused and cabled to the TBCI boards. Contact inputs operate with 125 V dc excitation.
125 VDC + P125 - N125
AC1 115/230 VAC
AC2 115/230 VAC
TB2
4 1
DCF1 TB1
TB1
ACF1 6 3 4 1
ACF2 2
Power Filter Board
10
11
12
Chassis DS2020PDMAG6 DCHI For Bus Monitoring TB3

P125S (+1.82V) Chassis 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Chassis DS200TCPD AC2N JZ5

FU29 FU30 FU31 FU32
DCLO AC1H
AC1N AC2H JZ4
AC Feeders J17 J18 J19 J20

125 VDC To TREG, JH1, Contact Inputs +
P125V BJS P125 VR

332k 10k 10k 332k
JZ2 DACA#1
ACSHI JZ3 DACA#2
TB3 FU1/FU2 SW1
N125 S (-1.82V)
N125 VR
FU9/FU10 SW5 FU13/FU14 JZ1 FU19/FU20 FU34/FU35 FU38/FU39 SW6 SW8
TB2
1 2 3 4
1 10 9 6
DC feeders J1R [J2R [J1S J1T J2S [ J1C J2T R1 J1D 22 ohm J8A 70 J8B W J8C
12 11 10
R2 22 ohm 70 W
J8D
J7X J7Y J7Z J7A
Door
P125 VR 4 N125 VR 7 R4 R3 22 22 ohm ohm 70 W 70 W
11 12
Door
3 2
FU21/FU22 FU25/FU26 + P125 V FU28 3.2 Amp

FU27 3.2 Amp
1 J7W 2
P125 V N125 V
J12A J12B J12C

3 2 1
J15
R5, 50 ohm,* 70 W
R6, 50 ohm,* 70 W
1 2 3
J16
Diagnostic Info *Note: Field configurable
JPD
Figure 9-111. Power Distribution Module for I/O Cabinet
Diagnostic Monitoring
As shown in Figure 9-112, the 125 V dc is reduced by a resistance divider network to signal level for monitoring. Other items monitored include the fuses in the feeders to the relay output boards. In the interface cabinet this diagnostic data is monitored by the VCMI; in the control cabinet it is cabled to the VDSK board and then to the VCMI.
DS2020PDMAGx
Din Rail Transition Termination Board
P125 VR
TB3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 332k 10k 10k 332k N125 S (-1.82V) P125S (+1.82V) Chassis 37-pin connector
+28 Analog In 1 29 P125_Grd 27 Analog In 2 +26 N125_Grd + 7 Analog In 3 8 Spare01 +5 6
37-wire cable
N125 VR
JPD
P5V DCOM BAT AC1 AC2 Spare J19 Fuse31 J20 Fuse32 J17 Fuse29
One to one Analog In 4 compatability Spare02 between screw (TB) and 37-pin connector 10 P5V numbers. 9 DCOM 35 DIN1, Logic_In_1 34 DIN2, Logic_In_2 33 DIN3, Logic_In_3 32 DIN4, Logic_In_4 31 DIN5, Logic_In_5 30 DIN6, Logic_In_6 16 DIN7, Logic_In_7
Connect to VCMI via J301, in <Rx> I/O Rack
7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 9
Figure 9-112. PDM Diagnostic Monitoring
Control Cabinet PDM

Power requirements for the control cabinet are less than for the Interface cabinet. The PDM has the same layout but different fuse ratings, since only the control racks and relay output boards require power. For additional noise filtering for the controllers, Corcom power filters are included with the PDM. The controller PDM is shown in Figure 9-113.
125 VDC
AC1 115/230 Vac

AC1H 2 3 AC1N 4
AC2 115/230 Vac

AC2H 5 AC2N 6
To Safety Ground IS2020CCPD Chassis MOV Suppression
+P125 - N125
TB1
In+
Gnd
In- In+
Gnd
In-
In+
Gnd
In-
DCF1
120/250 V, 30 Amp
120/250 V, 30 Amp
ACF1
ACF2
120/250 V, 30 Amp
Power Filters
Out+
Out-
Out+
Out-
Out+
Out-
DCHI P125V
AC1H DCLO
AC1N AC2H JZ4
DS200TCPD FU29 AC2N FU30 JZ5 FU31 FU32 ACSHI
AC Feeders to TRLY Boards J17 J18 J19 J20 DACA#1 DACA#2
BJS
JZ2
FU1/FU2 FU3/FU4 FU5/FU6 SW1 SW2 SW3
JZ3 J1R J1S J1T

Din Rail Transition Term. Board
DC Feeders to Controller Racks <R0>,<S0>,<T0> + 28 Analog In 1

29 P125_Grd
P125 V
TB2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10k 332k 10k 332k
P125S (+1.82V)
37- pin connector
+ 27 Analog In 2
N125 S (-1.82V) Chassis
26 N125_Grd
+ 7 Analog In 3
8 6
Spare 01 Spare 02 DCOM

compatability between screw (TB) and 37-pin connector numbers.
+ 5 Analog In 4 One to one

10 P5V 9
Cable to VCMI via VDSK on front of <R0> Control Rack.
N125 V
Diagnostic Information JPD P5V 7 DCOM 8 1 BAT 2 AC1 3 AC2 4 Spare J19 Fuse31 5 J20 Fuse32 6 J17 Fuse29 9
35 DIN1, Logic_In_1 34 DIN2, Logic_In_2 33
DIN3, Logic_In_3
32 DIN4, Logic_In_4 31 DIN5, Logic_In_5 30 DIN6, Logic_In_6 16 DIN7, Logic_In_7
Figure 9-113. PDM for Controller Cabinet
Interface Cabinet PDM Installation

The cabling, wiring connections, and fuse locations for the PDM in the Interface cabinet are shown in Figure 9-114.
PDM JPD JZ2 JZ3 JZ1 J1R J2R J1S J2S J1T J2T J1C J1D J7X J7Y J7Z J7A J7W J8A J8B J8C J8D Ground reference Jumper BJS J12A J12B J12C J15 J16 J17 J18 J19 J20 Cable Destination Diagnostic Term. Bd. AC/DC Convert #1 AC/DC Convert #2 Cable to Door Resis. <R> Power Supply <R> Power Supply <S> Power Supply <S> Power Supply <T> Power Supply <T> Power Supply Spare Spare <X> Power Supply <Y> Power Supply <Z> Power Supply TRPG#1 TREG TRLY TRLY TRLY TRLY TBCI TBCI TBCI Miscellaneous Miscellaneous TRLY TRLY TRLY TRLY
JZ1
Note : When connecting AC power to the power distribution (TB1), thatf JTX connector on both AC source selectors (see AC/DC Converter) are plugged into JTX1 f 15 V ac, or JTX2 for 230 V ac. 1
125 V dc Supply 120 V ac Supply Auxiliary 120 V ac Supply
Figure 9-114. Interface Cabinet PDM Circuit Board
Fuses in Interface and Control Cabinet PDM

Interface Cabinet PDM Fuses. Values of the fuses for the PDM (DS2020PDMAG6) in the I/O (interface) cabinet are shown in Table 9-44.
Table 9-44. I/O Cabinet PDM Fuse Ratings
PDM Fuse* No.

FU1FU6 FU7FU10 FU13FU20 FU21FU26** FU27FU28*** FU29 FU30 FU31FU32 FU34FU39
J Connector
J1R, S, T J1C, D J8A, B, C, D J12A, B, C J15, 16 J17 J18 J19, 20 J7X, Y, Z
Current Rating
15 Amps 5 Amps 15 Amps 1.5 Amps 3.2 Amps 15 Amps 5 Amps 15 Amps 5 Amps
Voltage Rating
125 V 125 V 125 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 250 V 125 V
Vendor Catalog No.

Bussman GMA-15A Bussman GMA-5A Bussman GMA-15A Bussman GMC-1.5A Bussman MDL-3.2A Bussman ABC-15A Bussman ABC-5A Bussman ABC-15A Bussman GMA-5A
*All fuses are ferrule type 5 mm x 20 mm, except for FU27-FU32 which are 0.25" x 1.25 ". **The short circuit rating for FU21-FU26 is 100 Amps ***The short circuit rating for FU27-FU28 is 70 Amps
Control Cabinet PDM Fuses. The PDM in the controller cabinet (IS2020CCPD) does not supply power to any terminal boards except the TRLY boards. Values for the fuses in the controller cabinet PDM are similar to those in the I/O cabinet PDM, except the rating for fuses FU1FU6 is 5 Amps instead of 15 Amps.
Ground Reference Jumper

Jumper BJS is supplied for isolation of ground reference on systems with an external ground reference. The ground reference bridge across the 125 V dc power has two resistances, one on each side, and BJS connects the center to ground. Note When more than one PDM is supplied from a common 125 V dc source, remove all the BJS connections except one.
Low Voltage Power Supply

The low voltage rack power supply mounts on the side of the VME rack and runs off a 24 V dc supply, refer to Figure 9-115. It supplies the VME rack with the same voltages and currents as the 125 V dc version, but the 335 V output for powering flame detectors is not available.
Cable Harness to VME Rack PSA POWER SUPPLY Side View PSB
Pull to Toggle
On Off Normal Fault Available
Front View
Heat Sink Cooling Fins
Bottom View
PS28A
PS28B
PS28C
PS24
28 V dc (special)
Figure 9-115. Low Voltage VME Rack Power Supply
24 Vdc
Specification
The cooling air ambient temperature specification for the low voltage power supply is 65 C. Other specifications are similar to the 125 V dc version. Refer to Table 9-45 for details.
Table 9-45. Low Voltage Power Supply Specification Item Input Voltage Description 18 to 32 V dc floating supply Up to 2 V pp ripple Under voltage shutdown on input voltage, latching, cycle shutdown switch to recover True isolation from input to output, 1500 V Output Voltage P5 P15 N15 P12 N12 P28 N28 Total Output Short Circuit Temperature Indicating Lights +5 V dc +15 V dc 15 V dc +12 V dc 12 V dc +28 V dc 28 V dc Voltage Regulation Capacity Less than 3% Less than 3% Less than 3% Less than 3% Less than 3% Less than 5% Less than 5% 150 W 50 W 50 W 50 W 25 W 50 W 25 W Current Over Voltage Shutdown 30 A 3.33 A 3.33 A 4.17 A 2.08 A 1.78 A 0.89 A 20% 5% 20% 5% 20% 5% 20% 5% 20% 5% 20% 5% 20% 5%
Isolation Output Voltages
Maximum 325 W Short circuit protection on all power supplies with self recovery Ambient air convection cooling 0 to 65 C Green: Normal Red: Fault Status is OK Power is applied but supply is shutdown due to: Trouble with the supply, latched off Low input voltage, latched off Power is applied, but switch is off
Yellow: Available Power Sequencing
The 5 V dc supply reaches voltage first, then all the others
Glossary of Terms
ADL
Asynchronous Device Language, an application layer protocol used for I/O communication on IONet.
application code
Software that controls the machines or processes, specific to the application.
ARCNET
Attached Resource Computer Network. A LAN communications protocol developed by Datapoint Corporation. The physical (coax and chip) and datalink (token ring and board interface) layer of a 2.5 MHz communication network which serves as the basis for DLAN+. See DLAN+.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. An 8-bit code used for data.
attributes
Information, such as location, visibility, and type of data that sets something apart from others. In signals, an attribute can be a field within a record.
Balance of Plant (BOP)

Plant equipment other than the turbine that needs to be controlled.
baud
A unit of data transmission. Baud rate is the number of bits per second transmitted.
Bently Nevada
A manufacturer of shaft vibration monitoring equipment.
bind
A toolbox command in the Device menu used to obtain information from the SDB..
Glossary of Terms G-1
BIOS
Basic input/output system. Performs the controller boot-up, which includes hardware self-tests and the file system loader. The BIOS is stored in EEPROM and is not loaded from the toolbox.
bit
Binary Digit. The smallest unit of memory used to store only one piece of information with two states, such as One/Zero or On/Off. Data requiring more than two states, such as numerical values 000 to 999, requires multiple bits (see Word).
block
Instruction blocks contain basic control functions, which are connected together during configuration to form the required machine or process control. Blocks can perform math computations, sequencing, or continuous control. The toolbox receives a description of the blocks from the block libraries.
board
Printed wiring board.
Boolean
Digital statement that expresses a condition that is either True or False. In the toolbox, it is a data type for logical signals.
bus
An electrical path for transmitting and receiving data.
bumpless
No disruption to the control when downloading.
byte
A group of binary digits (bits); a measure of data flow when bytes per second.
CIMPLICITY
Operator interface software configurable for a wide variety of control applications.
CMOS
Complementary metal-oxide semiconductor.
COM port
Serial controller communication ports (two). COM1 is reserved for diagnostic information and the Serial Loader. COM2 is used for I/O communication
configure
To select specific options, either by setting the location of hardware jumpers or loading software parameters into memory.
G-2 Glossary of Terms
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check, used to detect errors in Ethernet and other transmissions.
CT
Current Transformer, used to measure current in an ac power cable.
datagrams
Messages sent from the controller to I/O blocks over the Genius network.
data server
A PC which gathers control data from input networks and makes the data available to PCs on output networks.
DCS (Distributed Control System)

Control system, usually applied to control of boilers and other process equipment.
dead band
A range of values in which the incoming signal can be altered without changing the output response.
device
A configurable component of a process control system.
DIN-rail
European standard mounting rail for electronic modules.
DLAN+
GE Industrial System's LAN protocol, using an ARCNET controller chip with modified ARCNET drivers. A communications link between exciters, drives, and controllers, featuring a maximum of 255 drops with transmissions at 2.5 MBPS.
DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory, used in microprocessor-based equipment.
EGD
Ethernet Global Data is a control network and protocol for the controller. Devices share data through EGD exchanges (pages).
EMI
Electro-magnetic interference; this can affect an electronic control system
Ethernet
LAN with a 10/100 M baud collision avoidance/collision detection system used to link one or more computers together. Basis for TCP/IP and I/O services layers that conform to the IEEE 802.3 standard, developed by Xerox, Digital, and Intel.
EVA
Early valve actuation, to protect against loss of synchronization.
event
A property of Status_S signals that causes a task to execute when the value of the signal changes.
EX2000 (Exciter)
GE generator exciter control; regulates the generator field current to control the generator output voltage.
fanned input
An input to the termination board which is connected to all three TMR I/O boards.
fault code
A message from the controller to the HMI indicating a controller warning or failure.
Finder
A subsystem of the toolbox for searching and determining the usage of a particular item in a configuration.
firmware
The set of executable software that is stored in memory chips that hold their content without electrical power, such as EEPROM.
flash
A non-volatile programmable memory device.
forcing
Setting a live signal to a particular value, regardless of the value blockware or I/O is writing to that signal.
frame rate
Basic scheduling period of the controller encompassing one complete input-compute-output cycle for the controller. It is the system dependent scan rate.
function
The highest level of the blockware hierarchy, and the entity that corresponds to a single .tre file.
gateway
A device that connects two dissimilar LAN or connects a LAN to a wide-area network (WAN), PC, or a mainframe. A gateway can perform protocol and bandwidth conversion.
Genius bus
GE Fanucs distributed network of intelligent I/O blocks.
Genius global data

Data that is automatically and repeatedly broadcast by a bus controller. All other bus controllers on the same bus are capable of receiving the data, although some bus controllers can choose not to. The controller can broadcast global data and receive global data from certain devices, such as the Series 90-70 PLC and other controllers.
Graphic Window
A subsystem of the toolbox for viewing and setting the value of live signals.
health
A term that defines whether a signal is functioning as expected.
Heartbeat
A signal emitted at regular intervals by software to demonstrate that it is still active.
hexadecimal (hex)
Base 16 numbering system using the digits 0-9 and letters A-F to represent the decimal numbers 0-15. Two hex digits represent 1 byte.
HMI
Human Machine Interface, usually a PC running CIMPLICITY software.
HRSG
Heat Recovery Steam Generator using exhaust from a gas turbine.
ICS
Integrated Control System. ICS combines various power plant controls into a single system.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. A United States-based society that develops standards.
initialize
To set values (addresses, counters, registers, and such) to a beginning value prior to the rest of processing.
Innovation Series Controller

A process and logic controller used for several types of GE industrial control systems.
I/O
Input/output interfaces that allow the flow of data into and out of a device.
I/O drivers
Interface the controller with input/output devices, such as sensors, solenoid valves, and drives, using a choice of communication networks.
I/O mapping
Method for moving I/O points from one network type to another without needing an interposing application task.
IONet
The Mark VI I/O Ethernet communication network; controlled by the VCMIs.
insert
Adding an item either below or next to another item in a configuration, as it is viewed in the hierarchy of the Outline View of the toolbox.
instance
Update an item with a new definition.
item
A line of the hierarchy of the Outline View of the toolbox, which can be inserted, configured, and edited (such as Function or System Data).
IP Address
The address assigned to a device on an Ethernet communication network.
LCI Static Starter

This runs the generator as a motor to bring a gas turbine up to starting speed.
logical
A statement of a true sense, such as a Boolean.
macro
A group of instruction blocks (and other macros) used to perform part of an application program. Macros can be saved and reused.
Mark VI Turbine controller

A version of the Innovation Series controller hosted in one or more VME racks that perform turbine-specific speed control, logic, and sequencing.
median
The middle value of three values; the median selector picks the value most likely to be closest to correct.
Modbus
A serial communication protocol developed by Modicon for use between PLCs and other computers.
module
A collection of tasks that have a defined scheduling period in the controller.
MTBFO
Mean Time Between Forced Outage, a measure of overall system reliability.
GENI controller board

IC660ELB912_. An optional board for the controller that provides an interface to an additional Genius I/O bus.
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association; a U.S. standards organization.
non-volatile
The memory specially designed to store information even when the power is off.
online
Online mode provides full CPU communications, allowing data to be both read and written. It is the state of the toolbox when it is communicating with the system for which it holds the configuration. Also, a download mode where the device is not stopped and then restarted.
pcode
A binary set of records created by the toolbox, which contain the controller application configuration code for a device. Pcode is stored in RAM and Flash memory.
Power Distribution Module (PDM)

The PDM distributes 125 V dc and 115 V ac to the VME racks and I/O termination boards.
period
The time between execution scans for a Module or Task. Also a property of a Module that is the base period of all of the Tasks in the Module.
pin
Block, macro, or module parameter that creates a signal used to make interconnections.
Plant Data Highway (PDH)

Ethernet communication network between the HMI Servers and the HMI Viewers and workstations
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller. Designed for discrete (logic) control of machinery. It also computes math (analog) function and performs regulatory control.
PLU
Power load unbalance, detects a load rejection condition which can cause overspeed.
product code (runtime)

Software stored in the controllers Flash memory that converts application code (pcode) to executable code.
Proximitor
Bently Nevada's proximity probes used for sensing shaft vibration.
PT
Potential Transformer, used for measuring voltage in a power cable.
QNX
A real time operating system used in the controller.
realtime
Immediate response, referring to process control and embedded control systems that must respond instantly to changing conditions.
reboot
To restart the controller or toolbox.
RFI
Radio Frequency Interference; this is high frequency electromagnetic energy which can affect the system.
register page
A form of shared memory that is updated over a network. Register pages can be created and instanced in the controller and posted to the SDB.
relay ladder diagram (RLD)

A ladder diagram represents a relay circuit. Power is considered to flow from the left rail through contacts to the coil connected at the right.
resources
Also known as groups. Resources are systems (devices, machines, or work stations where work is performed) or areas where several tasks are carried out. Resource configuration plays an important role in the CIMPLICITY system by routing alarms to specific users and filtering the data users receive.
RTD
Resistance Temperature Device, used for measuring temperature.
runtime
See product code.
runtime errors
Controller problems indicated on the front panel by coded flashing LEDS, and also in the Log View of the toolbox.
sampling rate
The rate at which process signal samples are obtained, measured in samples/second.
Serial Loader
Connects the controller to the toolbox PC using the RS-232C COM ports. The Serial Loader initializes the controller flash file system and sets its TCP/IP address to allow it to communicate with the toolbox over Ethernet.
Server
A PC which gathers data over Ethernet from plant devices, and makes the data available to PC-based operator interfaces known as Viewers.
SIFT
Software Implemented Fault Tolerance, a technique for voting the three incoming I/O data sets to find and inhibit errors. Note that Mark VI also uses output hardware voting.
signal
The basic unit for variable information in the controller.
Simplex
Operation that requires only one set of control and I/O, and generally uses only one channel. The entire Mark VI control system can operate in Simplex mode, or individual VME boards in an otherwise TMR system can operate in Simplex mode.
simulation
Running a system without all of the configured I/O devices by modeling the behavior of the machine and the devices in software.
stall detection
Detection of stall condition in a gas turbine compressor.
Status_S
GE proprietary communications protocol that provides a way of commanding and presenting the necessary control, configuration, and feedback data for a device. The protocol over DLAN+ is Status_S. It can send directed, group, or broadcast messages.
SOE
Sequence of Events, a high-speed record of contact closures taken during a plant upset to allow detailed analysis of the event.
Static Starter
See LCI.
Status_S pages
Devices share data through Status_S pages. They make the addresses of the points on the pages known to other devices through the system database.
symbols
Created by the toolbox and stored in the controller, the symbol table contains signal names and descriptions for diagnostic messages.
task
A group of blocks and macros scheduled for execution by the user.
TBAI
Analog input termination board, interfaces with VAIC.
TBAO
Analog output termination board, interfaces with VAOC.
TBCC
Thermocouple input termination board, interfaces with VTCC.
TBCI
Contact input termination board, interfaces with VCCC or VCRC.
TCP/IP
Communications protocols developed to inter-network dissimilar systems. It is a de facto UNIX standard, but is supported on almost all systems. TCP controls data transfer and IP provides the routing for functions, such as file transfer and e-mail.
TGEN
Generator termination board, interfaces with VGEN.
time slice
Division of the total module scheduling period. There are eight slices per single execution period. These slices provide a means for scheduling modules and tasks to begin execution at different times.
TMR
Triple Modular Redundancy. An operation that uses three identical sets of control and I/O (channels R, S, and T) and votes the results.
token passing network

The token is a message which gives a station permission to transmit on a network; this token is passed from station to station so all can transmit in turn.
toolbox
A Windows-based software package used to configure the Mark VI controllers, also exciters and drives.
TPRO
Turbine protection termination board, interfaces with VPRO.
TPYR
Pyrometer termination board for blade temperature measurement, interfaces with VPYR.
TREG
Turbine emergency trip termination board, interfaces with VPRO.
trend
A time-based plot to show the history of values, similar to a recorder, available in the Historian and the toolbox.
TRLY
Relay output termination board, interfaces with VCCC or VCRC.
TRPG
Primary trip termination board, interfaces with VTUR.
TRTD
RTD input termination board, interfaces with VRTD.
TSVO
Servo termination board, interfaces with VSVO.
TTUR
Turbine termination board, interfaces with VTUR.
TVIB
Vibration termination board, interfaces with VVIB.
UCVB
A version of the Mark VI controller.
Unit Data Highway (UDH)

Connects the Mark VI controllers, LCI, EX2000, PLCs, and other GE provided equipment to the HMI Servers.
validate
Makes certain that toolbox items or devices do not contain errors, and verifies that the configuration is ready to be built into pcode.
VCMI
The Mark VI VME communication board which links the I/O with the controllers.
VME board
All the Mark VI boards are hosted in Versa Module Eurocard (VME) racks.
VPRO
Mark VI Turbine Protection Module, arranged in a self contained TMR subsystem.
Windows NT
Advanced 32-bit operating system from Microsoft for 386-based PCs and above.
word
A unit of information composed of characters, bits, or bytes, that is treated as an entity and can be stored in one location. Also, a measurement of memory length, usually 4, 8, or 16-bits long.
Index
generator synchronization 9-1, 9-2, 9-5, 9-7, 9-9, 9-10, 9-11, 9-14, 9-15, 9-19, 9-22, 9-25, 9-27, 9-36, 941, 9-47, 9-58, 9-68, 9-69, 9-109, 9-111, 9-112, 9116, 9-129, 9-131, 9-155, 9-171, 9-180, 9-185, 9192, 9-195 Genius I/O 9-3 ground reference 9-2 GSM 9-139, 9-141, 9-143, 9-144, 9-145
H
Health 9-139, 9-155 heat recovery steam generator 9-1 Historian 9-1, 9-3 humidity range 9-5, 9-7, 9-9
C
CIMPLICITY HMI 9-1 controller 9-155
I
I/O Processor Boards VSCA 9-154, 9-155, 9-156, 9-157 VVIB 9-137 IEC 9-1 IEEE 9-13, 9-16, 9-37 IEEE 802.3 9-1, 9-20, 9-22, 9-125, 9-160 IONet 9-155 IONet port 9-24, 9-88, 9-90, 9-125, 9-126 IPC 9-24, 9-45, 9-46
D
data highways 9-1 Data Terminal Equipment 9-154 diagnostic alarms 9-1 DIN Board DPWA 9-160 DSCB 9-154, 9-157, 9-158 DVIB 9-137, 9-138 DSVO 9-102 DTE (see Data Terminal Equipment) 9-154
L
LAN 9-24, 9-88, 9-102, 9-106 LCI static starter 9-24, 9-64, 9-65 low voltage rack power supply 9-34 LVDT 9-154
E
engineering work stations 9-190 environmental 9-1 Euro block 9-108, 9-109, 9-141 Euro Block 9-137, 9-154, 9-157, 9-160
M
magnetic pickups 9-24, 9-125, 9-126 Mark VI controller 9-2, 9-24, 9-127, 9-128 mean time to repair 9-5, 9-7, 9-9 Modbus (see Serial Modbus) 9-155, 9-156 MTTR 9-93, 9-111, 9-162, 9-164, 9-168, 9-171
F
fiber-optic 9-1, 9-5, 9-7, 9-9, 9-16, 9-39, 9-61, 9-70, 981, 9-98, 9-122, 9-150, 9-165
N G
GE Fanuc 90-70 PLC 9-1, 9-2, 9-10, 9-11, 9-12, 9-14, 9-15, 9-19, 9-22, 9-25, 9-37, 9-43, 9-49, 9-50, 958, 9-59, 9-60, 9-61, 9-68, 9-69, 9-70, 9-77, 9-78, 9-79, 9-92, 9-93, 9-96, 9-97, 9-110, 9-111, 9-116, 9-118, 9-122, 9-125, 9-131, 9-132, 9-141, 9-142, 9-162, 9-164, 9-168, 9-171, 9-172, 9-180, 9-181, 9-184, 9-189, 9-192 Geiger Mueller 9-25, 9-37, 9-59, 9-97, 9-142, 9-189, 9192 network hubs 9-190
S
SCOM 9-137, 9-138, 9-154, 9-157 Serial Modbus 9-155, 9-156 Simplex 9-137 Standards (see Codes and Standards) 9-1 synchronization 9-1 system reliability 9-7
Index I-1
T
TBAO 9-20, 9-58, 9-63, 9-64 TBCI 9-20, 9-66, 9-67, 9-72, 9-73, 9-74, 9-81, 9-86, 9190 TBTC 9-20, 9-25, 9-31, 9-32, 9-34 TBTCH1B 9-32, 9-33 TCP/IP 9-5, 9-7, 9-9, 9-10 Terminal Boards TVIB 9-137 TMR (see Triple Modular Redundant) 9-1 Toolbox 9-156 TPRO 9-52, 9-62 TPYR 9-93, 9-108, 9-111, 9-162, 9-164, 9-168, 9-171, 9-8 TREG 9-162, 9-168, 9-171 trip solenoids 9-8 triple modular redundant 9-17, 9-19, 9-172, 9-180, 9189, 9-190, 9-192, 9-193, 9-194, 9-195 Triple Modular Redundant 9-1 TRLYH1C 9-110, 9-172 Troubleshooting 9-1 TRTD 9-116, 9-118, 9-139, 9-172, 9-178 TTPW 9-188 TTUR 9-121, 9-164
VSVO 9-50, 9-51, 9-60, 9-61, 9-92 VTCC 9-36, 9-47, 9-58, 9-61, 9-67, 9-70 VVIB 9-1, 9-116, 9-118, 9-171
X
XDSA 9-159, 9-161
U
UCVB 9-91, 9-165, 9-190 UCVD 9-38, 9-112, 9-114, 9-139, 9-141, 9-143, 9-144, 9-145, 9-172, 9-174 UCVE 9-2, 9-3 UDH 9-2, 9-5, 9-7, 9-9, 9-8 unhealthy 9-155 unit data highway 9-20, 9-24, 9-36, 9-37, 9-38, 9-39, 940, 9-41, 9-42, 9-43, 9-44, 9-45
V
VAIC 9-24, 9-34, 9-35, 9-45, 9-46, 9-47, 9-56, 9-57, 964, 9-65, 9-74, 9-75, 9-90, 9-102, 9-106, 9-125, 9126, 9-127, 9-128, 9-137, 9-138, 9-154, 9-157, 9158, 9-160 VAOC 9-131, 9-133 VCCC 9-15, 9-69, 9-70, 9-71 VDSK board 9-1 VGEN 9-108, 9-112 vibration 9-9 VME 9-2, 9-12, 9-14, 9-15, 9-16, 9-20, 9-22, 9-23, 924, 9-25, 9-34, 9-36, 9-44, 9-45, 9-52, 9-56, 9-62, 9-64, 9-66, 9-74, 9-76, 9-77, 9-88, 9-93, 9-96, 9102, 9-109, 9-111, 9-113, 9-122, 9-125, 9-127, 9131, 9-137, 9-140, 9-147, 9-164, 9-166 VME rack power supply 9-15, 9-69 VPRO 9-7, 9-9 VRTD 9-97, 9-111, 9-139, 9-141, 9-186
I-2 Index
*( ,QGXVWULDO 6\VWHPV
Brrhy@yrpvp8h $#"'&& B@vqvhyp $ Shxr7yq ThyrW6!# $"%#(!VT6

6421C Vol II System Manual For Mark VI

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

6421C Vol II System Manual For Mark VI

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

g

GEH-6421C, Volume II (Supersedes GEH-6421B)

SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI Turbine Control

GEH-6421C, Volume II (Supersedes GEH-6421B) 2001-06-27

SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI Turbine Control

We welcome comments and suggestions to make this publication more useful.

Your Companys Name and Address

______ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______

Detach and fax or mail to the address noted above.

...........................................................................................Fold here first .........................................................................................................

Safety Symbol Legend

Note Indicates an essential or important procedure, condition, or statement.

GEH-6421C, Vol. II Mark VI System Guide

Safety Symbol Legend a

b Safety Symbol Legend

Mark VI System Guide GEH-6421C, Vol. II

Safety Symbol Legend

IEC 617-2, No. 02-02-06 IEC 417, No. 5017

IEC 417, No. 5019

GEH-6421C, Vol. II Mark VI System Guide

Safety Symbol Legend c

Twisted Shielded Pair Wire

Low Level Wiring High Level Wiring Power Wiring

d Safety Symbol Legend

Mark VI System Guide GEH-6421C, Vol. II

GEH-6421C, Vol. II Mark VI System Guide

Mark VI System Guide GEH-6421C, Vol. II

Glossary of Terms Index

GEH-6421C, Vol. II Mark VI System Guide

Mark VI System Guide GEH-6421C, Vol. II

I/O Board Descriptions

GEH-6421C, Vol. II Mark VI System Guide

Chapter 9 I/O Board Descriptions 9-1

9-2 Chapter 9 I/O Board Descriptions

Mark VI System Guide GEH-6421C, Vol. II

Mark VI Controller UCVEH2

Monitor Port for GE use

VMEbus SYSFAIL Flash Activity Power Status

Ethernet Status LEDs Active

Ethernet Port for Unit Data Highway Communication

Figure 9-1. UCVEH2 Controller Front Panel

GEH-6421C, Vol. II Mark VI System Guide

Chapter 9 I/O Board Descriptions 9-3

Mark VI Controller UCVEM01

Monitor Port for GE use

VMEbus SYSFAIL Flash Activity Power Status

Ethernet Status LEDs Active Link

Primary Ethernet Port for Unit Data Highway Communication (Toolbox)

Speed (Off =10 MB/sec) (On = 100 MB/sec) Link / Active

Figure 9-2. UCVEM01 Controller Front Panel

9-4 Chapter 9 I/O Board Descriptions

Mark VI System Guide GEH-6421C, Vol. II

UCVE Controller Specification

Operating System LEDs

Primary Ethernet Interface

Secondary Ethernet Interface (M01 version only)

Power Requirements UCVEH2 Power Requirements UCVEM01

GEH-6421C, Vol. II Mark VI System Guide

Chapter 9 I/O Board Descriptions 9-5

ACTIVE SLOT1 BMAS ENET SYS BSLV RESET FLSH GENA

Monitor Port for GE Use Only

Connector for hard disk, for GE use